1 files changed, 11845 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/24909.txt b/24909.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5eab18f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/24909.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11845 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Golden Magnet, by George Manville Fenn
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Golden Magnet
+
+Author: George Manville Fenn
+
+Release Date: March 24, 2008 [EBook #24909]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GOLDEN MAGNET ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+The Golden Magnet, by George Manville Fenn.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+Books by George Manville Fenn are full of dreadful situations which the
+reader cannot see the way out of.  This one is no exception, in fact we
+would easily say that it is one of his best.
+
+Harry goes adventuring, and with him goes Tom, a young worker at Harry's
+father's soap-boiling factory.  Tom is wonderful.  He gets Harry out of
+numerous dire situations, and the book would not work without him.  He
+is down-to-earth, and full of commonsense and energy.
+
+Despite all sorts of adverse conditions and persons, they get the gold,
+and put everybody's affairs to rights, killing the villain, of course,
+on the way.  And marrying the heroine, even though she is his first
+cousin.
+
+A good example of a late nineteenth century teenager's book, and if you
+like that sort of thing you will enjoy it too, for it is what used to be
+called a crackingly good yarn.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+THE GOLDEN MAGNET, BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+INTRODUCTORY.
+
+Daybreak in the Incas' realm on the far western shores, known to our
+fathers as the great wonderland--the great country discovered by
+adventurous mariners, and thought of, dreamed of, seen through a golden
+mist raised by the imagination--a mist which gave to everything its own
+peculiar hue; and hence the far-off land was whispered of as "El
+Dorado," the gilded, "the Golden Americas," and the country whose rivers
+ran over golden sand, whose rocks were veined with the coveted ore; and
+nations vied with each other in seeking to humble the haughty Spaniard,
+whose enterprise had gained him the strongest footing in the coveted
+region.
+
+Daybreak at Tehutlan, the Incas' city, in the year 1533, and the peaks
+of the mighty mountains that appeared to pierce the bright blue sky,
+appearing to bear out the fabulous belief of the eastern lands, for
+their icy summits glowed, and flushed, and sparkled in the rays of the
+sun, which gilded every pinnacle and turned each glacier into a river of
+gold, seeming to flow slowly downwards towards the vales and plains of
+the Andes, as yet flooded with the darkness of the night.
+
+But soon the purple flood of darkness began to give place to golden
+light, as, still streaming down, as it were, from the mountain tops, the
+sunshine leaped in bright cataracts from point to point, rushing up this
+dark gully, that vast fissure, turning gloom into glowing landscape, and
+at last filling the vast vales with gladness and life, as the glowing
+picture burst into full beauty.
+
+Here, at the foot of the mountains, flowed the mighty rivers of South
+America, bordered by the vast, eternal tropic forest, with its dank,
+steaming moisture--the home of the fierce beast, the loathsome reptile,
+and insect plagues innumerable.  Far up the mountains was the land of
+ice and snow, fierce biting wind, and sleety tempest, with here and
+there patches of verdure, the pastoral land of the vicuna and llama
+flocks; but in the intermediate space, balanced, as it were, between the
+tropical heat and the wintry frosts, on the table-lands half-way up the
+mountains, was the stronghold of the Peruvian civilisation.  So near to
+the equator that intolerable heat might have been expected, an
+expectation, though, not fulfilled, for the elevation gave to the
+Peruvians a glorious climate, with all the brightness but none of the
+enervation of equatorial land.
+
+Cottage, house, and palace, of no mean construction, were scattered here
+and there, the homes of peasant and Peruvian noble.  But it was upon the
+temple crowning a near elevation that the eye would rest, in rapt
+astonishment at its magnificence and grandeur.  The description may
+sound like a scrap from some eastern fable, but none the less it is a
+fact culled from the pages of history.
+
+For as that bright morning sun peered at length above the shoulder of an
+eastern hill, it was to shine full upon the Temple of the Sun and its
+glorious gardens.
+
+Gold--gold everywhere--gold and precious stones.  Fronting the great
+entrance, and ready to receive its first beams, was a golden
+representation of the sun itself--a vast golden face surrounded by rays
+stretching out in every direction--vast, massive, and glowing
+effulgently, reflecting back the sun's rays, and lighting the interior
+of the gold-decked temple.
+
+For there was no paltry gilding here, but massive golden cornice,
+frieze, plate, stud, and boss ornamenting the massive walls--glistening,
+sparkling, and flashing back the sun's light, while, as if these were
+not sufficient, emeralds and other precious stones were lavishly spread
+in further ornamentation, adding their lustrous sheen to the warm glow
+already diffused through the magnificent building.  Flash, sparkle--
+glistening streams of golden light, dancing like golden water upon the
+gorgeous walls, gilding even those who entered, so that face and
+garments were bathed and dyed in the glorious radiance, till the eye of
+the beholder ached, and the darkened intellects of the simple Peruvians
+might well believe that they were in the presence of the sun-god
+himself.
+
+But not only was gold lavished upon the stone building, even to adorning
+its outer walls with a broad belt of the precious metal--solid, massive,
+and magnificently wrought; but the implements and vessels of the temple
+were of the yellow treasure.  Huge vases stood upon the floor filled
+with the produce of their land--offerings to the sun; perfume-censers,
+water-cruses, cistern-pipes, reservoirs, all were of the rich, ruddy
+metal.
+
+The Peruvians called the ore in their language of imagery "the tears
+wept by the sun;" and these tears they toiled to gather, and their
+artificers worked them up with a cunning skill under the direction of
+the priests; and, as if to complete the wonders of the temple, and to
+give it adornments that should never lose their lustre, never fade, it
+was surrounded by an Aladdin-like garden whose plants were gold--golden
+of leaf, silver of stem, and with flowers sparkling in combinations of
+the two metals.  Fountains of gold cast up golden water to fall back in
+golden basins--a mimic spray; and even then fresh objects of the
+goldsmith's skill were seen in the golden-fleeced llamas grouped around.
+
+But the glory of the Incas was passing.  After a long period of
+prosperity the evil days were at hand, the wondrous barbaric
+civilisation was about to be swept away; for the adventurous Spaniard,
+moved by his thirst for the gold, of whose existence rumour had from
+time to time told him, was now in the land.  The simple people, coasting
+along in their light balsas or rafts, had seen the coming of what to
+them were then wondrous ships, cock-boats, though, as compared even to
+our collier brigs.  War and rapine were in the land; the arms of the
+Spaniards--the thunder and lightning they bore with them in their guns--
+were everywhere victorious, and the riches of the temples were seized;
+gloriously wrought vessels were hastily molten down into ingots, along
+with plate, shield, and wonderfully-worked flowers; rapacity was
+triumphant, and upon one occasion the value of the treasure collected
+and melted down into bars was computed at three millions and a half
+pounds sterling of our money.
+
+The temples and their adornments were many and held sacred by the
+people, a sanctity they had ventured to hope would be observed by the
+conquerors; but the delusion was of short duration.  The coming of a
+body of Spaniards was the signal for the stripping of each gorgeous
+building.  Sacred vessel and ornament were seized upon and borne off;
+but the news was spread from temple to temple, from priest to priest,
+through the length and breadth of the land by means of swift-footed
+couriers, not by written letter, neither by word of mouth, but by means
+of a fringe of cords tied in knots, each knot and its place having its
+particular signification.
+
+The alarm spread, and the day of evil being upon them--their sun-gods
+giving no sign of crushing the profane intruders--the priests looked
+upon it as a sign of wrath and punishment; and sooner than their
+treasure should fall into the hands of the fierce, remorseless
+conquerors, eagerly stripped their temples themselves, and in remote
+hiding-places, with many a mysterious rite, re-committed the gold to its
+parent earth, binding all who beheld by the most fearful bonds never to
+reveal the treasure-places to the conquerors, but to wait for the great
+day when the ancient glory of Peru should be revived, when the Incas
+should reign once more, and their religion flourish, ere the sacred
+treasures were disinterred.
+
+But that day came not.  European civilisation began to take the place of
+that of the Incas, a new form of religion flourished, and from being
+monarchs in the country the Peruvians became the slaves, the hewers of
+wood and drawers of water of a new race.  Generations came and
+generations died out, and the years still rolled on till ages passed
+away; but though poor and degraded, the priestly caste existed still
+amongst the Indians, and from father to son was the great secret handed
+down in village after village, the idea of appropriating to their own
+use the buried treasures never once being dreamed of; but, with the
+wealth of princes scattered here and there throughout the country, the
+Indians watched over the treasures still, and handed down the secret to
+their children.
+
+Some were discovered by stratagem, others by treachery, others, again,
+by accident; and while the exact bearings of the places were mostly well
+remembered, others died out of the memory of those to whose trust they
+had been committed, or in some cases died with them.  But to this day it
+is believed that vast stores of the precious metal still lie waiting the
+hand of the discoverer, the barbaric relics of a fierce and bloody
+religion, the creed of an idolatrous people; and many an explorer
+unrewarded has wasted his days amidst the traces of the ruined temples
+and tokens of a grand civilisation, scattered here and there amidst the
+forests and mountain fastnesses of the mighty Andes.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+AFTER THREE AGES.
+
+Perhaps it was with reading _Robinson Crusoe_ and _Sindbad the Sailor_--
+I don't know, but I always did have a hankering after going abroad.
+
+Twopence was generally the extent of my supply of hard cash, so I used
+to get dreaming about gold, and to think that I had only to be wrecked
+upon some rocky shore to find the remains of a Spanish galleon freighted
+with gold in doubloons, and bars, and ingots, a prize to which I could
+lay claim, and be rich for ever after.
+
+Now, with such ideas as these in my head, I ask anybody, was it likely
+that I could take to soap-boiling?
+
+That was my father's business, and he was very proud of his best and
+second quality yellow, and his prime hard mottled.  He had made a
+comfortable living out of it, as his father and grandfather had before
+him, helping to cleanse no end of people in their time; but I thought
+then, as I think now, that it was a nasty unpleasant business, whose
+odour is in my nostrils to the present day.
+
+"You're no good, Harry," said my father, "not a bit, and unless you sink
+that tin-pot pride of yours, and leave off wandering about and wearing
+out your boots, and take off your coat and go to work, you'll never get
+a living.  You've always got your nose stuck in a book--such trash!  Do
+you ever see me over a book unless it's a daybook or ledger, eh?"
+
+My father had no sooner done speaking than my mother shook her head at
+me, and I went and stood out in the yard, leaning my back up against one
+of the great tallow hogsheads, and thought.
+
+It only took me five minutes to make up my mind, for the simple reason
+that it was already seven-eighths on the way, this not being the first
+time by many a score that my father had given me his opinion respecting
+my future prospects in life; and as I neared twenty such opinions used
+to seem to grit in amongst my mental works, while the longer I lived the
+more I thought that I should never get my livelihood by soap-boiling.
+
+Well, my mind was made up most stubbornly that I would go out to Uncle
+Reuben.
+
+Just then, as I stood moodily there, I heard the sound of a scuffle and
+a sharp smack, and directly after, one of our lads, a young fellow of my
+own age Tom Bulk by name, came hurriedly out of the kitchen door,
+rubbing the side of his red face, but only to drop his hand the moment
+he caught sight of me leaning against the tallow-tub.
+
+"What's the matter, Tom?"  I said, though I knew well enough that Tom
+was in hot water.
+
+"Got a flea in my ear, Mas'r Harry," he said, with a grin of vexation.
+"I caught it in the kitchen."
+
+"So have I, Tom," I said bitterly; "but I caught mine in the parlour."
+
+"Mas'r been rowing you agen, sir?"
+
+"Yes, Tom," I said drearily, "and it's for the last time.  If I'm no
+good I may as well be off.  I can't take to our business."
+
+"Well, tain't so sweet as it used to be, sir; and it don't seem right
+that, to make other folks clean, we should allers be in a greasy mess.
+But what are you going to do, Mas'r Harry?" he said anxiously.
+
+"Going abroad, Tom."
+
+"So am I, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"You, Tom?"
+
+"Sure I am, Mas'r Harry, if you are," said Tom; and then and there he
+pulled off his great, greasy leather apron and soapy white slop, and
+fetched his shiny jacket out of the boiling-house.  "I'm ready, Mas'r
+Harry," he exclaimed, as he fought hard to get one arm properly into his
+sleeve, but had to try again and again, because the button was off the
+wristband of his shirt, and the sleeve kept slipping up to his shoulder,
+necessitating a fresh attempt.
+
+I burst out laughing at him, as I saw the earnest way in which he took
+my announcement; but the more I laughed the more solid Tom became, as he
+worked his body into his old coat, and then proceeded to button it right
+up to the chin, slapping himself several times upon the chest to settle
+a wrinkle here and there, and ending by spitting in his hands, and
+looking at me as much as to say, "Where's boxes, Mas'r Harry?  Let's be
+off."
+
+"Watcher larfin' at, Mas'r Harry?" he said at last.
+
+"At you, Tom," I replied.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," he replied in the most philosophical way,
+"larfin' don't cost nothing, and it's very pleasant, and it don't matter
+when it's them as you know; but when it comes to somebody you don't
+know, why then it riles."
+
+I turned serious on the instant.
+
+"Do you know what you are talking about, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Sure I do, Mas'r Harry.  Talkin' 'bout going abroad."
+
+"But where?"
+
+"I d'know, Mas'r Harry; only it's along o' you."
+
+"But, my good fellow," I said, "perhaps I'm about to do very wrong in
+going."
+
+"Then, p'r'aps I am, Mas'r Harry," he replied, "and that don't matter."
+
+"But it might be the ruin of your prospects, Tom."
+
+"Ruin o' my prospecks!" cried Tom.  "Hark at him!" and he seemed to be
+addressing a pile of chests.  "Don't see as there's much prospeck in
+looking down into a taller tub.  I could do that anywheres."
+
+"But you don't understand me, Tom," I cried.
+
+"Don't want to, Mas'r Harry," he said.  "I know as I'm allers gettin' my
+face slapped when I go into the kitchen; that I always get the smell o'
+the tallow in my nose and can't get it out; and that I hate soap to such
+an extent that I wouldn't care if I never touched a bit again."
+
+"Oh, but you'll get on here, Tom, in time, and perhaps rise to be
+foreman."
+
+"No, I sha'n't, Mas'r Harry, 'cause I'm coming along with you."
+
+"But don't you see that I am going to a place where it would not be
+suitable for you."
+
+"What's sootable for you, Mas'r Harry, would be just as sootable for me,
+and I'd work like one of the niggers out there, only harder."
+
+"Niggers out where, Tom?"
+
+"Where we're going, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"How do you know there are any niggers where we are going, sir?"
+
+"Oh, there's sure to be, Mas'r Harry.  There's niggers everywheres, I've
+heerd tell."
+
+"Oh, but really, Tom," I said, "it is all nonsense.  Look here, I'm
+going out to join my uncle in South America."
+
+"South America, Mas'r Harry!" said Tom eagerly.  "Why, that's just the
+very place I want to go to."
+
+"I don't believe it, Tom," I said sharply.  "If I had told you I was
+going to South Australia, you would have said just the same."
+
+"Dessay I should, Mas'r Harry," he replied grinning.
+
+"Well now, look here, Tom," I continued very seriously, "I am going out
+to join my uncle, and if I get on, and can see that there is a good
+chance for you out there, why, I'll send you word, and you can join me."
+
+"No, you won't, Mas'r Harry," he said quietly.
+
+"But I promise you that I will."
+
+"No, you won't, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"Don't you believe my word, Tom?"
+
+"I believe that you believe you mean me to believe, Mas'r Harry," he
+said; "but I don't mean you to go without me, and so I tell you.  There
+wouldn't be no getting on without me alongside o' you, that there
+wouldn't, and I'm going along with you."
+
+"What are you two quarrelling about?" said my father, coming up just
+then.
+
+"We were not quarrelling, father," I replied, snatching at the
+opportunity to lay bare my plans now that I was a little excited, for I
+had been rather nervous about how my proposals would be taken.
+
+"Mas'r Harry's going out foreign abroad," said Tom sturdily; "and he
+said I warn't to go with him, and I said I would, sir--that's all."
+
+"Oh, he's going abroad, is he?" said my father.
+
+"Yes, sir," I replied, "I have made up mind to go and see if Uncle
+Reuben can find me anything to do."
+
+"I hope you don't think that you are going to lead a life of idleness
+out there, sir?"
+
+"Oh no, sir," I replied, "I mean to work."
+
+"Then why don't you work here?" said my father.
+
+"Because I hate the trade so, sir."
+
+"Nice clean business too," said my father; "makes clean money, and
+keeps people clean.  I suppose you know it's horribly hot out there?"
+
+"Not so hot as in our boiling-house, sir," I replied.
+
+"Humph!" said my father; and then, without another word, he walked back
+into the house.
+
+"I _am_ glad," cried Tom, rubbing his hands together softly.  "What a
+time of it we shall have, Mas'r Harry!"
+
+It was my turn now to be silent, and I stood watching Tom, and thinking
+as I struggled with myself that it would, after all, be very pleasant to
+have a sturdy trustworthy fellow like Tom always at my back when I was
+in a strange land.  For I had read that the descendants of the old
+Spaniards in South America were courtly noble-looking gentlemen enough,
+but were bitter and revengeful, and not always disposed to look with
+favour upon Englishmen.  How did I know but in my fortune-seeking
+adventures--for truly enough I meant to go out to seek my fortune--I
+might make enemies, and be sometime or another in danger.  Then how good
+it would be to have such a henchman as Tom at my side.
+
+My thoughts were very visionary, of course, for I could not foresee the
+strange adventures through which I should have to go; and for the moment
+I was about to turn sharp round on Tom, and shake hands and say, "That's
+right, Tom, we will go out and carve our fortunes together."  But I
+checked myself directly, as I thought of my position.
+
+For how was I to take out with me what to all intents and purposes would
+be a servant, when the probabilities were that I should hardly have the
+money to pay my own passage to the far-off land?
+
+I was interrupted in my thoughts by Tom, who turned to me and said,
+"Give me your knife, Mas'r Harry, and I'll give it a good sharp up along
+o' mine.  There's nothing like having a good keen knife in your pocket
+when you're going travelling, so they say."
+
+"Very true, Tom," I cried laughing; "are you really in earnest over
+this?"
+
+"Really in earnest, Mas'r Harry?  Why, I never felt so earnest before in
+my life.  To be sure I am, I want to see a bit o' the world."
+
+"Very well then, Tom," I replied; "you will have a hard lot to share
+with me, but share it you shall if you like."
+
+"I don't want to share or anything of the kind," said Tom gruffly.
+"You're young master, and I'm only lad.  I know what I am and what I'm
+fit for well enough, Mas'r Harry, so don't you get talking no more about
+sharing danger, because it won't do."
+
+"Oh, very well, Tom, we won't quarrel about that."
+
+"That's right then, Mas'r Harry; so now give us hold of your knife."
+
+I gave him my knife, in a thoughtful way, and he took it, opened it, and
+examined its edge.
+
+"Blunt as a butter knife, Mas'r Harry," he cried.  "And now, when do we
+start?"
+
+"Start, Tom?"  I cried laughing.  "Oh, it is not like going to London,
+we must make a great many preparations first, for it's a long journey."
+
+"Is it?" he said.  "Two or three hundred miles, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"A good deal more than two or three thousand, Tom," I replied.
+
+"Oh, all right, Mas'r Harry.  I don't mind how far it is, as long as we
+keep together.  My word an' honour, won't it be different to making best
+yaller and mottled and cutting it into bars?"
+
+"Different, Tom?"  I said dreamily.  "Yes, my lad, it will indeed."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+I COME TO AN UNDERSTANDING WITH MY FATHER.
+
+I believe I lay in bed that night with my eyes wide open, seeing, as if
+in a waking dream, the whole of the eventful life I had pictured out for
+myself--a glorious career of adventure in a land of imaginary beauties--
+a land built up out of recollections of Robinson Crusoe's island, _Sir
+Edward Seaward's narrative, The Conquest of Peru_, and _The Lives of the
+Buccaneers_, with a little _Arabian Nights' Entertainments_ dashed in by
+way of pickles or spice.  All these formed themselves into a glowing
+series of scenes--a sort of panorama of the future, and I lay and
+watched in imagination the glorious prospect of river and forest,
+mountain and plain, where I was going to win fame and fortune, in a
+series of wonderful adventures, such as had never before fallen to the
+lot of man.
+
+You will not be surprised to hear that I got up the next morning
+feverish and unrefreshed, and I felt quite envious of Tom when I saw him
+holding his shortly-cropped bullet head under the spout of the pump in
+the back yard, waggling the handle awkwardly as he had what he called "a
+sloosh."
+
+For he looked so hale and hearty and fresh, as he looked up on hearing
+my step, and cried out to me--
+
+"Lay hold o' the pump-handle, Mas'r Harry, and work it up and down a
+bit, it's awkward to do all by yourself."
+
+I felt quite spiteful as I took hold of the polished old handle and
+worked at it, meaning to give Tom a regular ducking; and I sent the pure
+cold well-water gushing out as he held his head under, letting the
+stream come first upon his poll, then upon one ear, then upon the other,
+and backing away at last to where he had hung his rough towel upon a
+hook in the wall, to seize it and begin to scrub.
+
+"Oh, I say, Mas'r Harry, it's 'evinly," he panted, as he rubbed away.
+"Just you try it.  Seems to make the strength go rattling through you
+like.  Have a go: I'll pump."
+
+I hesitated for a moment, and then, feeling that the cold shock would
+perhaps clear my heated brain, I threw off my cap and necktie, stripped
+my jacket from my shoulders, and, rolling up my sleeves, thrust my head
+under the spout, and the next moment was panting and gasping, and
+feeling half drowned and confused, as Tom sent the water streaming out
+with liberal hand.
+
+"Now then, what Tom-fool's game's this?" said a voice, as I withdrew my
+head and held out my hand for the towel; "washing the folly out of your
+head, Harry?"
+
+"No, father," I said quietly, as I rubbed away, feeling a refreshing
+glow thrill through me as the reaction set in.  "I was trying to freshen
+myself up after lying awake all night thinking of my future."
+
+"Then you are still harping on that project?" he said quickly.
+
+"Yes, sir; I have quite made up my mind to go."
+
+"What, and leave a quiet sensible business in search of a mare's nest?"
+
+"Don't be angry with me, father," I said.  "I know all about the
+business, and what a struggle you have had for years just to get a bare
+living."
+
+"Well, boy, that's true," he said with a sigh.
+
+"I know, too, how things are getting worse and worse, and that the large
+London works and competition make the business poorer every year."
+
+"They do, my lad, they do," he said more quietly.  "But I had hoped that
+you would grow into a clever industrious man, and set the poor old
+business on its legs again."
+
+"I'd try and be clever, father," I replied, "and I know I could be
+industrious, but my two arms would be of no use to contend against
+machinery and steam."
+
+He shook his head.
+
+"I've thought about it for long enough now, father," I said; "and I can
+see well enough that there's no chance of improving our little business
+without capital, and that if that is not to be had it must get smaller
+and smaller every day."
+
+"Why, Harry, my boy," he said, as we strolled down now into our bit of
+garden, "I didn't think you could see so far into a millstone as that."
+
+"Oh, father!"  I cried warmly, "do you think I have never felt miserable
+and discouraged to see what a fight it has been with you to make up your
+payments month after month?"
+
+"I never thought you gave a bit of heed to it, my lad," he said warmly,
+as he held out his hand, and took mine in a hearty grip.  "I've
+misjudged you, my boy; I've misjudged you.  I didn't think you had so
+much thought."
+
+"Oh, father!"  I cried, "why, all my wandering thoughts have had the aim
+of getting on in life, and for a long time past it has seemed to me that
+England's growing too full of people fighting against one another for a
+living; and I felt that some of us must go out and try afresh in another
+place."
+
+"Like the bees do, when they swarm, my lad," said my father, looking
+down at one of the old straw hives, with its pan turned over the top to
+keep off the rain.  "Well, perhaps you're right, Harry--perhaps you are
+right.  I won't fight against it, my boy.  I only wish you luck."
+
+"Father!"  I cried, and I was about to say something else, but it would
+not come, try how I would; and I stood there holding by his hand in the
+garden, while he looked me in the face with a calmer, more gentle look
+than I had seen in his eyes for some time past.
+
+He was the first to break the silence, and then he clapped me on the
+shoulder in a hearty, friendly way.
+
+"There's mother making signs that breakfast's ready, my boy.  Come along
+in."
+
+We went in and took our places at the table so quietly that my mother's
+hands began to tremble so much that she could hardly pour out the tea.
+
+"What have you been doing, Harry, to make father so cross?" she said at
+last.
+
+"Nay, nay, mother, nothing at all," said my father quickly.  "It's all
+right.  Harry and I have been coming to a bit of an understanding--
+that's all.  We haven't been quarrelling a bit."
+
+"Are you sure, dear?" said my mother dubiously.
+
+"Sure? ay!" cried my father.  "Why, Harry and I were never better
+friends."
+
+"Indeed, no," I cried excitedly.
+
+"You are both keeping something back from me," she cried, with her hands
+trembling and the tears coming into her eyes.
+
+"Oh, no, we won't keep anything back from you, mother," said my father
+kindly.  "Harry and I have been talking about his plans."
+
+"Not for going away?" said my mother; "don't say that."
+
+"But I must say it," said my father.  "Harry is quite right.  I didn't
+like it at first; but, as he says, there are too many of us here, and he
+is going to seek his fortune in a foreign land."
+
+"Oh, my boy, my boy!" she cried.
+
+"Same as your brother Reuben did," said my father.  "Come, come, old
+lady, courage!  We must look this sort of thing in the face."
+
+"And I'll go out there, mother and see if Uncle Reuben will help me.  If
+he can't, I'll try for myself, for I will get on; and some day, if I
+don't come back a rich man, I'll come back with a sufficiency to make
+the old age of both you and my father comfortable.  Trust me, I will."
+
+For some few minutes there was very little breakfast eaten; but at last
+my father roused us up, talking quite cheerfully, and evidently trying
+to reconcile my mother to my going, and then we went on with the meal.
+
+"So Tom wants to go with you, does he?" said my father.  "Well, he's a
+good, hard-headed sort of fellow, and likes you, Harry.  He'd better
+go."
+
+"But isn't he likely to lead poor Harry into mischief?" said my mother.
+
+"No; he's more likely to act as ballast and keep him from capsizing if
+he carries too much sail.  Tom's all right."
+
+My mother accepted the inevitable in a very short time, and soon began
+to talk as mothers do--that is to say, homely mothers--for almost as
+soon as she had wiped her eyes she exclaimed--
+
+"Why, Harry, my dear, you must have at least six new shirts."
+
+"Must I, mother?"  I said smiling.
+
+"Yes, my son, and of the best and strongest stuff.  I'm glad to say that
+I've just finished a couple of pairs of strongly-knitted stockings."
+
+And from that hour, I believe, my mother was happy in her task of
+getting ready my sea-chest, putting in no end of pleasant little
+surprises for me, to be ready when I was in the far-off land.
+
+Tom, too, was not forgotten, poor fellow, for he had no one to take
+tender notice of him.
+
+"And it don't matter a bit, Mas'r Harry," he cried cheerily, "I don't
+want a lot o' things.  One clean shirt and a pocket-comb--that's about
+all a chap like me wants."
+
+But he was better provided than that, and at last, before a couple of
+months had passed away, our farewells were said and we started for
+Liverpool, in low spirits with our partings, but full of hope and eager
+ambition, since at the great western port we were to take our passage in
+one of the great steamers for the West Indies, where we would have to
+change into a smaller trading vessel which would take us on to Caracas.
+
+"No soap-boiling out there, Mas'r Harry," cried Tom cheerily; and he
+gave a long sniff as if to get some of the familiar old smell into his
+nose.
+
+"No, Tom," I replied quietly.  "We are going to begin a new life now;"
+for the future looked to me a far more serious affair than I had
+imagined before in the midst of my sanguine aspirations and rather wild
+and dreamy ideas.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+TOM CATCHES THE COMPLAINT.
+
+"Oh, my eye, Mas'r Harry!  Dear heart, dear heart, how bad I do feel!"
+
+"Why, you kept laughing at me, you wretch," I said, as I rejoiced at
+Tom's downfall.
+
+"_Surely_, so I did, Mas'r Harry--I did, I did--but I didn't think it
+was half so--so bad as this here.  Oh, my eye! how badly I do feel!"
+
+"You old humbug, you!"  I cried in my triumph, for I was getting over my
+troubles, "sneered and jeered and pooh-poohed it all, you did, Tom, and
+now it has you by the hip at last."
+
+"No, it hasn't, Mas'r Harry," he groaned.  "It aren't the hip, it's more
+in the middle.  Oh, my eye! how ill I am!"
+
+"I'm precious glad of it, Tom," I said.
+
+"Well, I do call that cowardly, Mas'r Harry--I do really," groaned
+Tom--"'specially as you wasn't half so bad as I am."
+
+"Why, I was ten times worse, Tom," I cried.
+
+"Oh, Mas'r Harry! don't say that," groaned the poor fellow, "because
+it's unpossible.  If--Oh, my eye! how ill I do feel!--if you'd been ten
+times as bad as I am, you'd have died ten times over.  Oh, dear! oh,
+dear!  How is it the doctors can't cure this horrid--?  Oh, dear me! how
+ill I do feel!"
+
+It was very unfeeling, of course, but all the same I sat down close to
+poor Tom as he lay upon the deck, and roared with laughter to see his
+miserable yellow face, and the way in which he screwed up his eyes.  But
+it was only three days before when I was really ill that Tom was
+strutting about the deck ridiculing sea-sickness, and telling me what a
+poor sort of a fellow I was to knuckle under to a few qualms like that.
+
+For I must confess to having been one of the first attacked when we were
+well out at sea.  It was the first time I had ever seen the blue water;
+and no sooner did a bit of a gale spring up, and the great steamer begin
+to climb up the waves and then seem to be falling down, down, down in
+the most horrible way possible, than I began to prove what a thorough
+landsman I was, and, like a great many more passengers, was exceedingly
+ill.
+
+I remember thinking that it would have been much better if I had stayed
+at home instead of tempting the seas.
+
+Then as I grew worse I called myself by all sorts of names for coming
+upon such a mad expedition.
+
+Then I vowed that if I could get on shore again, I'd never come to sea
+any more.
+
+Lastly I grew so bad that I didn't care what became of me, and I felt
+that if the steamer sank I should be relieved from all my terrible
+pains.
+
+And all this time Tom was skipping about the deck as merry as a lark,
+chaffing with the sailors or making friends with the firemen, and every
+now and then coming to me and making me so cross that I felt as if I
+could hit him.
+
+"Now do let me fetch the doctor to you, Mas'r Harry," he kept on saying,
+pulling a solemn face, but with his eyes looking full of fun.
+
+"I tell you I don't want the doctor.  Don't be such an ass, Tom," I
+cried.
+
+"But you do seem so ill, Mas'r Harry," he said with mock sympathy.  "Let
+me see if I can get you some brimstone and treacle."
+
+"Just you wait till I get better, Tom," I said feebly.  "You nasty
+wretch, you.  Brimstone and treacle!  Ugh!"
+
+My sufferings ought to have awakened his sympathy, but it did not in the
+least, and I found that nobody thought anything of a sea-sick passenger.
+
+But at last I got over it, and, to my intense delight, all of a sudden
+Tom was smitten with the complaint, and became more prostrate than even
+I.
+
+I did not forget the way he had tortured me, and you may be sure that I
+did not omit to ask him if he would try the brimstone and treacle.  I
+behaved worse to him, I believe, for I tortured him by taking him cold
+fat pork and hard biscuits, and paid him various other little attentions
+of a kindred sort, making him groan with pain, till one day--it was
+while the sea was very rough, and I thought him too ill to move--he
+suddenly got up.
+
+"Tell you what, Mas'r Harry," he said, "I'm not going to stand your
+games no longer.  I shall get up and be better;" and better he seemed to
+grow at once, so that by the next day he was almost himself again, and
+we stood by the high bulwarks watching the great Atlantic rollers as
+they came slowly on, as if to swallow up our ship.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+A SAILOR ON SEA-SERPENTS.
+
+"It do puzzle me, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, as we sat in the chains one
+bright, sunny day, when the storm was over, but a fine stiff breeze was
+helping the toiling engines to send the steamer along at a splendid
+rate.
+
+"What puzzles you, Tom?"  I asked.
+
+"Why, where all the water comes from.  Just look at it now.  Here have
+we been coming along for more'n a week, and it's been nothing but water,
+water, water."
+
+"And we could go on for months, Tom, sailing, sailing away into the
+distant ocean, and still it would be nothing but water, water, water."
+
+"Well, but what's the good of it all, Mas'r Harry?  Why, if I was to get
+up a company to do it, and drain it all off, the bottom of the sea here
+would be all land, and people could walk or have railways instead of
+being cooped up in a great long tossing box like this, and made so--Oh,
+dear me, it nearly makes me ill again to think of it."
+
+"Ah! that would be a capital arrangement, Tom," I said smiling.  "What a
+lot more room there would be on the earth then!"
+
+"Wouldn't there, Mas'r Harry?" he cried eagerly.
+
+"A tremendous deal more, Tom.  Every poor fellow might have an estate of
+his own; but where would you drain the water to?"
+
+"Where would I drain the water to, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"To be sure," I said, enjoying his puzzled look.  "If you take it away
+from here you must send it somewhere else."
+
+"Of course, Mas'r Harry, of course," he replied eagerly.  "Oh, I'd
+employ thousands of navvies to dig a big drain and let the water right
+off."
+
+"Yes, I understand that," I replied; "but where is the drain to lead?"
+
+"Where's the drain to lead?"
+
+"Yes; where is the water to run?"
+
+"Where's the water to run?" said Tom, scratching his head.  "Where's the
+water to run, Mas'r Harry?  Why, I never thought of that."
+
+"No, Tom, you never thought of that; and you can't alter it, so it is of
+no use to grumble."
+
+"Don't you two young fellows slacken your hold there," said a sailor,
+looking over at us.
+
+"'Taint likely, is it?" said Tom grinning; "why, where should we be if
+we did?"
+
+"Down at the bottom some day," growled the sailor as he walked away, and
+Tom looked at me.
+
+"Just as if it was likely that a fellow would let go and try and drown
+hisself, Mas'r Harry.  Think it's deep here?" he added as he gazed down
+into the dense blue water.
+
+"Yes, Tom, very," I replied, gazing down as well, for the water was
+beautifully transparent, and the foam left by the bows of the steamer
+sparkled in the brilliant sunshine as we rushed along.
+
+"Deep, Tom?"  I said, "yes, very."
+
+"How deep, Mas'r Harry; forty or fifty foot?"
+
+"Two or three miles, p'r'aps, Tom," I replied.
+
+"Go along!  Two or three miles indeed!" he said, laughing.
+
+"I don't know that it is here, Tom," I continued, "but I believe they
+have found the depth nearly double that in some places."
+
+"What! have they measured it, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Yes, Tom."
+
+"With a bit of string?"
+
+"With a sounding-line, Tom."
+
+"And a bit of lead at the end?"
+
+"Yes, Tom, a sounding-lead with a great bullet, which they left at the
+bottom when they pulled the line in again."
+
+"Think o' that, now!" cried Tom.  "Why, I was wondering whether a fellow
+couldn't go down in a diving-bell and see what the bottom was like, and
+look at the fishes--say, Mas'r Harry, some of 'em must be whoppers."
+
+"Ay, my lad," said the same sailor who had before spoken, and he rested
+his arms on the bulwark and stared down at us; "there's some big chaps
+out at sea here."
+
+"Could we catch some of 'em?" asked Tom.
+
+"Oh, yes," said the sailor.  "Dessay you could, my lad, but I wouldn't
+advise you to try a sixpenny fishing-line with a cork float and a
+three-joint hazel rod with a whalebone top--you know that sort, eh?"
+
+"Know it?  I should think I do," cried Tom.  "So does Mas'r Harry here.
+We used to ketch the gudgeons like hooroar down in the sharp water below
+the mill up at home."
+
+"Ah!" said the sailor, "so used I when I was a boy; but there ain't no
+gudgeons here."
+
+"What sort o' fish are there, then?" said Tom.
+
+"Oh, all sorts: bonito, and albicore, and flying-fish, sometimes
+dolphins and sharks."
+
+"Any whales?" cried Tom, winking at me.
+
+"Sometimes; not very often, my lad," said the sailor quietly.  "They
+lies up in the cold water, more among the ice.  We're getting every day
+more into the warm."
+
+"I'm sorry there ar'n't any whales," said Tom.  "How long might they be,
+say the biggest you ever see?"
+
+"Oh!" said the sailor, "they mostly runs thirty or forty foot long, but
+I saw one once nearly eighty-foot."
+
+"What a whopper!" said Tom, giving me a droll look.
+
+"Sounds big," said the sailor, "but out here in the ocean, my lad,
+seventy or eighty-foot only seems to be a span long, and no size at all,
+while the biggest shark I ever see--"
+
+"How long was that?" said Tom; "a hundred foot?"
+
+"No," said the sailor drily; "he was eighteen-foot long--a long, thin,
+hungry-looking fellow, with a mouth and jaws that would have taken off
+one of your legs like a shot."
+
+"Well, but if an eighty-foot whale don't look big," said Tom, "an
+eighteen-foot shark must be quite a shrimp."
+
+"Ah! you wouldn't think so," said the sailor quietly, "if you were
+overboard and one of 'em after you."
+
+"But I thought you'd got monsters out here at sea," said Tom, giving me
+another of his cunning looks, as much as to say, "You see how I'll lead
+him on directly."
+
+"So we have," said the sailor, staring straight out before him, "only it
+don't do to talk about 'em."
+
+"Why?"  I said quickly, for the man's quiet, serious way impressed me.
+
+"Well, you see, sir," he replied, "if a man says he's seen a monster out
+at sea, and it isn't a whale which people knows of, having been seen,
+they say directly he's a liar, and laugh at him, and that isn't
+pleasant."
+
+"Of course not," I replied, "if he is telling the truth."
+
+"Of course, sir, if he's telling the truth; and, take it altogether,
+what I know of sailors after being at sea thirty-two year, beginning as
+a boy of twelve, sailors ain't liars."
+
+"Well, let's hope not," I said.
+
+"They ain't indeed, sir," said the man earnestly.  "They do foolish
+things, drinking too much when they get ashore after a voyage, and
+spending their money like asses, as the saying goes; but a chap as is at
+sea in the deep waters, and amongst storms and the lonesomeness of the
+great ocean, gets to be a serious sort of fellow--he isn't the liar and
+romancer some people seem to think."
+
+"No, but you do spin yarns, some of you?" said Tom.
+
+"Well, yes, of course," said the sailor.  "Why not sometimes for a bit
+of fun? but when a man's in 'arnest he ought to be believed."
+
+"Of course," said Tom; "but I say, mate, you never see the sea-serpent,
+did you?"
+
+The man did not answer for a few moments, but stood gazing straight out
+to sea before saying quietly:
+
+"I don't know.  A man sees some curious things out at sea in the course
+of thirty years; but he gets precious cautious about telling what he's
+seen after being laughed at, and chaffed when he's been only telling the
+simple truth.  Why, I remember, once when I was out with one captain, we
+saw what we thought was the sea-serpent or something of the kind, and
+observations were taken, it was all entered in the log, and sent to the
+papers afterwards; and the skipper got laughed nearly out of his skin
+for a romancer.  He was a queen's captain--man-o'-war it was, and all
+was as regular as could be; officers and men saw it all, but they were
+so roasted afterwards that, when anything of the kind's seen now, they
+say nothing about it."
+
+"But do you really mean to say you believe that there are monsters in
+the ocean that we have no regular account of in books?"
+
+He turned to me, and pointed out to sea.
+
+"Isn't there room there for thousands of great things, my lad; such as
+we've never seen or heard of?" he said.
+
+I nodded.
+
+"Why, do you know that in some parts out here the water's over four
+miles deep?  They've measured it, my lad, and they know."
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry, that's more than your two mile," cried Tom.
+
+"Ay, and I dessay there's parts where it's more than twice as deep, and
+when you come to think of the thousands of miles you can sail without
+nearing land, I say there's room for thousands of things such as nobody
+has ever seen."
+
+"That's very true," I said.
+
+"Why, I remember, down at home in Norfolk, when I was a boy, there was a
+big pool that people never fished, because they said there was no fish
+in it, and so it had been longer than anybody could recollect; and at
+last there was a plan made to drain a bit of bog close by, and a great
+dyke was cut.  This set the farmer the pool belonged to thinking that if
+he cut a ditch to the big dyke, he could empty the old pool, and if he
+did he would get 'bout three acres of good dry ground instead of a black
+peaty pool; so he set a lot o' chaps at work one dry summer when they
+weren't busy, and we boys went to see it done.  Now, you may believe me
+or you mayn't, my lads."
+
+"Oh, we'll believe you; won't we, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom grinning.
+
+"Well, I shall," I replied, and the sailor went on.
+
+"When the water began to get low in that pool we used to see that there
+were fish in it, and at last there was a regular set out catching of
+them in the bits of holes where the water had left them."
+
+"Oh, I say, Mas'r Harry, don't I wish we had been there!" cried Tom.
+
+"Ay, it was fun, my lad, for we got scores of tench, some of 'em three
+and four pound weight, and there was six or seven carp ever so much
+bigger.  One of 'em weighed nine pounds."
+
+"That was a fine un," said Tom.
+
+"But the biggest fish we got was a pike, and he was the only one there.
+That chap must have eat up all that had been before him, and he weighed
+three-and-thirty pound.  He was close upon four foot long, and a
+gentleman there said if he had been in good condition he would have
+weighed five-and-forty, for he was as thin as a lath."
+
+"I should have liked to see that fish," said Tom.
+
+"Ay, it was a fine one.  We boys daren't tackle him, he was so big,"
+continued the sailor; "and then out of the mud they got bushels of great
+eels, some of the biggest I ever saw."
+
+"Did you though?" said Tom.
+
+"Ay, we did.  When the water had got right down low, you could see 'em
+squirming about like snakes, and when they'd got all we could see they
+laid down boards over the mud, and punched about in the soft places when
+great fellows kept coming up to the top, and they got no end more.  They
+were the biggest eels ever I see, and as fat as butter."
+
+"Were they though?" said Tom.
+
+"Ay, they were, my lads; and what I wanted to say was this--If so be as
+those fish could live in that bit of a three-acre pool without people
+knowing of their being there, don't you think there can be no end of big
+fishes and things in the great waters, thousands of miles from shore,
+such as menfolks has never seen?"
+
+"Well, it do seem likely," said Tom; "but I never could swallow the
+sea-serpent."
+
+"No, my lad, more likely to swallow you," said the sailor drily.
+
+"But come now," said Tom drily.  "Did you ever come across the great
+sea-serpent?"
+
+"A mate o' mine," said the sailor, "told me he once saw out Newfoundland
+way part of a great cuttle-fish that had been washed ashore after a
+storm.  It was a great jellyfish sort of thing, and it was thirty foot
+long; and he said he was sure it couldn't have been more than half of
+it, and the next day he saw one of its arms all full of suckers, and it
+was twenty foot long."
+
+"Well, that must have been a pleasant sort of thing," said Tom, as I sat
+there listening thoughtfully, for the sailor seemed disposed to go on
+talking.
+
+"I remember one year, fifteen years ago I daresay it is, we were going
+from Singapore to Hong Kong, and it was a strangely hot calm time, when
+all at once away about a mile on our lee bow I saw something rise up out
+of the sea five-and-twenty or thirty feet, as it seemed to be, but it
+went down again directly; and I rubbed my eyes, thinking it was fancy,
+but directly after out it came again, making a curious kind of thrust
+like as if it was a long neck of something under the water.  Then down
+it went again, and I called the officer of the watch to look at it; and
+he came with his glass, laughing-like, but just then out it came again
+and he tried to get a glimpse of it through his glass, but he never
+could be quick enough, for there was no telling where the thing would
+dart out its head, and when it did come up it went down again directly.
+
+"I was in hopes it would come nigher, but it went the other way,
+shooting out its head once when it was a good way off, and then we did
+not see it any more."
+
+"And what do you think it was?"  I said eagerly.
+
+"Not knowing, can't say," he replied quietly.  "Our officer said,
+half-laughing, half-puzzled like, that he should have said it was the
+sea-serpent, only no one would believe him if he did."
+
+"Did you ever see anything else?"  I asked.
+
+"Oh, yes, my lad, I've seen a good many things that people wouldn't
+believe.  I remember once seeing a curious thing off the muddy Malay
+coast, a long way north of Malacca, where you have mangrove swamps right
+down about the mouths of the rivers, places where the crocodiles go in
+and out."
+
+"I say, how big's a crocodile?" said Tom sharply.
+
+"All sizes, mate," said the sailor.  "I've seen 'em two foot long and
+I've seen 'em twenty."
+
+"Oh, not bigger than that?" said Tom contemptuously.
+
+"No, my lad, that's the biggest I ever see, but I've heerd of 'em being
+seen five or six and twenty."
+
+"But tell us about the strange thing you saw off the Malay coast," I
+said impatiently.
+
+"Oh, ah! yes," he said, "that was just as the mist was lifting that lay
+between us and the coast.  It was in a shallow muddy sea, and three or
+four of us was trying to make out the trees ashore, and wondering
+whether there would be any chance of our getting some fresh fruit and
+vegetables before long; when, all at once, one of my mates claps his
+hand on my shoulder, and he says--`Lookye yonder, mate.'  `Why, it's the
+sea-sarpent!' says another.  `Well, that is a rum un,' says another.
+And then we stood looking at what seemed to be a great snake swimming,
+with twenty or thirty feet of its neck outer water; and it was holding
+it up in a curve just like a swan, and sometimes its head was right up
+high and sometimes curved down close to the water with its neck in a
+loop, and all the time it was going along five or six knots an hour.
+`Why, it _is_ the sea-sarpent!' says another of our mates, `look all
+behind there; you can see its back as it swims, 'tis a hundred foot
+long, see if it isn't!'  I looked, and sure enough it did seem to be a
+great length behind, nearly covered by the water; but, as I stood, it
+didn't seem to me like a snake swimming, for it seemed more than ever as
+if what we saw was a great slimy slaty-coloured thing, the make of a
+swan, swimming with its body nearly all under water and its head out;
+or, as I afterwards thought, just like one of the big West Indy turtles,
+such as you'll see by and by if you're lucky."
+
+"Like a turtle?"  I said.
+
+"Yes, my lad," he continued, "a great flat-bodied turtle, that might
+have been thirty or forty foot long and half as much across, while it
+had a great neck like a swan."
+
+"But what made you think it was like that?"  I asked.
+
+"Because you could see its back out of the water now and then, and it
+wasn't like a serpent, for it rose over like a turtle's, and sometimes
+it was higher out of the water sometimes lower; and what I saw as plain
+as could be was the water rippling up fore and aft, just as if the thing
+had nippers which it was working to send it along."
+
+"Did your captain see it?"  I asked at last.
+
+"No, my lad, for we was too full of wonderment just then to do more than
+stare at the thing, till all at once it seemed to stretch its neck out
+straight with quite a dart, as if it had caught something to eat, and
+then it wasn't there."
+
+"Didn't it come up again?" said Tom.
+
+"No, my lad, we never see it no more."
+
+"How far was it from the shore?"  I asked.
+
+"Five or six miles, my lad, more or less," he replied; and just then
+there was a call for all hands to take in sail, and our yarn-spinner
+went away.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX.
+
+ONWARD.
+
+"That was a rum sort of tale, Mas'r Harry," said Tom as soon as we were
+alone.  "Do you believe him?"
+
+"Yes," I replied, "I believe he is sincere."
+
+"What! and see those great things, Mas'r Harry, out at sea?"
+
+"I believe he saw something," I replied, "but whether it was just as he
+described is another thing.  There's plenty of room, though, in the sea
+for more than that, and perhaps people will find out some day that we
+have not seen everything that there is in the world."
+
+"Talk about snakes, though, Mas'r Harry," said Tom suddenly; "where did
+you say we was going?"
+
+"To Caracas first."
+
+"Ah!  Crackers--that's it.  Do you think there'll be any snakes there?"
+
+"Not sea-serpents, Tom," I said laughing; "but up the country where we
+are going there are sure to be plenty of land-serpents."
+
+"Not big ones, though, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"I should say there will be some very big ones in the swamps by the
+great rivers."
+
+"Think o' that now!" said Tom.  "Big serpents! ugh!  I can't abide eels
+even.  I don't know how I should get on with serpents.  But I say, Mas'r
+Harry, it's all nonsense about sea-serpents, ar'n't it?"
+
+"I don't know, Tom," I replied.  "Perhaps they never grow to a very
+large size; but there are thousands of small ones."
+
+"What! sea-serpents, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"To be sure there are."
+
+"But not in the sea--snakes couldn't swim?"
+
+"Indeed but they can, Tom.  Why, I've seen our common English snake go
+into a stream and swim beautifully with its head reared above the water,
+and after swimming about for some time, come out."
+
+"Think of that now!" said Tom.  "Where's the sea-serpents, then?"
+
+"Oh, all about the Indian and Chinese Seas."
+
+"Big uns?"
+
+"I never heard of their being more than five or six feet long, but some
+of them are very poisonous.  People have died from their bite."
+
+"Have they, though?" said Tom.  "And where else are there any, Mas'r
+Harry?"
+
+"Oh, they swarm in the Caspian Sea.  I've heard that they float about in
+knots of several together on calm, sunny days, and they come ashore in
+the shallow parts."
+
+"Caspian Sea!" said Tom; "where may that be--anywhere near Crackers?"
+
+"No, Tom," I said; "we've left that behind us in the Old World."
+
+"And a good job too," said Tom; "we don't want sea-serpents where we're
+going.  Why, Mas'r Harry, I shall never like to do a bathe again."
+
+Soon after this Tom proposed that we should try sea-fishing, but when we
+had borrowed lines and begun to make our preparations the weather set in
+so rough that we never once had a chance.  In fact there were many days
+when we had no opportunity of coming on deck unless we were prepared to
+be drenched with the spray that deluged the deck as some great wave
+struck the steamer's bows, and then flew in driving showers from end to
+end.
+
+There were times when I fancied that the officers looked quite serious,
+but they said nothing, only were very particular about the hatches being
+kept closed.
+
+Then came a spell of finer weather, during which we reached Jamaica, and
+I was thinking of getting a few days ashore, so as to see something of
+this beautiful island; but it was not to be, for we found that we were
+very late, that the steamer into which we were to shift had been waiting
+for us three days, and if we did not take passage in her we should have
+to wait a fortnight, perhaps longer, for another.
+
+"And I did so want to see the niggers in the sugar plantations, and
+taste real Jamaica rum.  Say, Mas'r Harry, that stuff people drink in
+England's all gammon."
+
+"Why so?"  I asked.
+
+"Because it's brown and yellow, like wine," he replied.  "Real Jamaica
+rum's quite white."
+
+"Well, Tom," I said, "I don't know that it will make any difference to
+us; and as to the sugar plantations and the niggers, as you call them, I
+daresay you will be able to see some at my uncle's place."
+
+"But he don't grow sugar, does he, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"I don't know about that," I said, "but I think so.  I know he grows a
+great deal of coffee."
+
+"Think of that, now, Mas'r Harry!  And tea, too?"
+
+"No, he does not grow tea, Tom."
+
+"Well, I do wonder at that," said Tom, "because you see tea's better
+than coffee to keep to."
+
+"How about climate, Tom?"  I said laughing.
+
+"Climate?  Ah! yes, I s'pose that do make a difference, Mas'r Harry.
+But he might grow sugar."
+
+"Perhaps he does, Tom," I said, "but we shall see before very long."
+
+"Well, it won't be because it isn't hot enough," said Tom, wiping his
+face.  "Phew! the sun does go it out here."
+
+"But it may be colder where my uncle lives, Tom."
+
+"Why, how can it be, Mas'r Harry, if it's anywhere out here?"
+
+"Perhaps he's high up in the mountains, and there it will be much
+colder."
+
+"Ha-ha-ha!  Well, that is a good un, Mas'r Harry," laughed Tom.  "You
+had plenty of schooling and I had none, but I do know better than that.
+Going up closer to the sun and finding it colder!  Well, that is a rum
+un, and no mistake."
+
+I tried to explain to Tom why it was that the climate was colder in
+mountain regions, but I suppose I did it in too bungling a way for him
+to comprehend, and he stood out for his own opinion till he saw, some
+weeks later, a magnificent specimen of a snow-capped mountain, at which
+he stared in amazement; and even then he was obstinate enough to declare
+that, after all, the dazzling whiteness might be due to the clear
+transparency of crystal rock.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN.
+
+FEEDING THE SHARKS.
+
+It was a wonderful change from the stormy, tossing Atlantic, with its
+bitter winds and chilling cold, to the calm transparency of the
+brilliantly-blue tropic waters, where everything looked so unclouded and
+so bright.  When we neared one or other of the islands, everything
+seemed so fresh that we began to forget the perils and troubles of our
+long, uneventful, but sufficiently troubled voyage.  For there were
+golden or dazzlingly white sands, upon which the calm sea softly
+rippled, while close down to the water's edge we could see what Tom
+called spike plants and sweep's-brush trees--these being his names for
+plants of the Yucca family and lovely slender-tufted palms.
+
+When we gazed down into the clear waters from the deck of our
+comparatively small steamer, we could see fish in plenty, for the
+brilliant sun seemed to light up the sea beneath the vessel's keel,
+while as the screw churned up the water and the steamer rushed on, the
+scaly occupants of the deep flashed away to right and left, darting out
+of sight like so many shafts of silver through the sunny depths.
+
+It was a wonderful change from cold and chill to a delicious atmosphere,
+where the soft sea-breeze fanned our cheeks, though we soon became aware
+of the fact that the sun possessed power such as we had never
+experienced before.
+
+"Why, it's like as if it came through a burning glass, Mas'r Harry,"
+said Tom; "and, I say, just you try to touch that copper hood thing that
+goes over the compass.  I did, and it burned my hand just as if it had
+come out of a hot fire."
+
+"Well, I don't want to burn my hands, Tom," I replied.  "I can see how
+hot it is by the pitch standing up in beads all along the ropes."
+
+"And it's making black icicles outside some of the boards, Mas'r Harry,
+only they're soft instead of hard.  I say, isn't it jolly?"
+
+The next day it was a great deal hotter, for there was not a breath of
+air, and Tom came to me as I was hanging listlessly over the side, for I
+was too hot to stir.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," he said, "isn't this what they call being in the
+tropics?"
+
+"Yes, Tom; this is the tropics."
+
+"Well, they're hot tropics, and no mistake--out-and-out hot uns.  It
+won't get any warmer than this, will it?"
+
+"Warmer, my lad?" said one of the sailors; "why, this is nothing to what
+it is sometimes.  I've known it so hot that the fellows have been
+half-roasted, and when the skipper's piped all hands to bathe in a
+lugsail overboard, to keep away the sharks, you've heard the lads sizzle
+as they jumped into the water."
+
+"They got quite red-hot, then?" said Tom quietly.
+
+"Well, hardly red-hot, though they were mostly very red--more brown-hot,
+I should say."
+
+"Thanky," said Tom.  "Much obliged;" and the sailor went away chuckling.
+
+"He thinks I believe him, Mas'r Harry," said Tom quietly; "but I'm not
+quite such a fool as all that."
+
+"Oh! never mind their nonsense, Tom," I said; "there are too many
+beautiful things to see, for us to pay heed to all that these fellows
+say."
+
+"Ah! you're about right there, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "but somehow I am
+a bit disappointed."
+
+"Why?"  I asked.
+
+"At not getting ashore.  Only think of it, Mas'r Harry! having a gun
+apiece, and going wandering up the country somewhere, seeing all there
+is in one of these islands."
+
+"Have patience, Tom," I replied; "and I daresay you'll get as much
+adventure as you'll care to have."
+
+I did not know how true a prophet I was then.  In fact, perhaps if I
+could have foreseen all we should have to go through, I might have
+shrunk back from my undertaking.
+
+Farther and farther every day now we went on and on, putting in at first
+one island port and then another, but never having time to do more than
+just go ashore.  A visit up the country was quite out of the question.
+
+"It's a rum un, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, on our first landing; and his
+broad countrified face expanded into a grin as he stopped opposite a
+stout old negro woman who was selling fruit.  No sooner did she see Tom
+displaying his white teeth than she showed hers--two long rows like
+ivory--and these two stood smiling one at the other till Tom recovered
+himself, and invested sixpence in plantains and oranges.
+
+"They're black enough out here, and no mistake, Mas'r Harry," said Tom;
+"and oh, I say, just you taste these--they're splendid."
+
+The waving cocoa palms and the beautiful flowers that we saw brought
+into the bright little market made me feel, like Tom, that I should like
+to go farther afield; but I comforted myself with the recollection that
+we should soon be at our destination, and that then there would be
+plenty to see and do.
+
+Back on board once more, we spent our time basking in the sunshine,
+drinking it in as it were, for it seemed so delightful in spite of its
+heat after our dull, cheerless, hazy home in the winter season.
+
+I took no note of how the time went, and this part of the voyage, though
+in a slow clumsy boat, seemed far the quickest portion of the journey,
+so that I was quite surprised when one morning I came on deck, and found
+not only that we were in sight of land, but in sight of port--my landing
+port--the end of my sea journey, for we were right across the Gulf of
+Mexico, abreast of La Guayra, where the orders were given, and anchor
+was dropped in the open roadstead, where, calm as it was, we could still
+feel the great swell that came softly sweeping in, making the great
+steamer rock and roll first to this side then to that, till, heavily
+laden though she was, she careened over so that her copper glistened in
+the sun.
+
+I was beginning to feast my eyes upon the beauty of the place, when Tom,
+who was right forward, shouted to me to come, and as I glanced at him I
+saw that he was waving his hands so excitedly that there must be
+something worth seeing, and I ran forward.
+
+"Here's something for you to have a look at, Mas'r Harry," he cried.
+"You recollect that big pike the sea-serpent sailor told us about--ugh!
+four feet long didn't he say?"
+
+"Yes, Tom; but there are no pike here."
+
+"No pike, Mas'r Harry!  Why, here's a couple of 'em cruising about just
+under the bows here, and you can see 'em as plain as plain, and they're
+twelve or fourteen foot long at least."
+
+"Yes, Tom," I said, as I climbed on to the bulwark, and sheltering my
+eyes gazed down into the beautiful water, where the bottom was plainly
+visible many feet below.  "Yes, Tom," I said, "they're twelve or
+fourteen feet long at least, but they are not pike."
+
+"Not pike, Mas'r Harry!  What are they then?"
+
+"Sharks, my lad," I replied.  "Sharks."
+
+"What, them?" he cried excitedly as he stared down.  "So they're sharks
+are they?  Well, I'm glad I've seen 'em anyhow; but I shouldn't have
+known that they were sharks.  Mustn't bathe here then," he continued;
+"that is if all they say about sharks is true."
+
+"I believe it's true enough, Tom," I said.
+
+"Let's try 'em, Mas'r Harry," said Tom eagerly.
+
+"Try them!  What, bathe?  Why, Tom, you must be mad!"
+
+"I never said a word about bathing, Mas'r Harry," he responded rather
+grumpily.  "I said, Let's try 'em.  I say if we had a big hook and line,
+Mas'r Harry," he continued, with a broadly comical grin, "and baited
+with nice fat little niggers, what sport we should have."
+
+"Nice fun for the little niggers as you call them, Tom," I said.
+
+"Yes, it wouldn't be very nice for them, Mas'r Harry.  But I say, let's
+see if they'd go at a bait."
+
+"How?"  I cried.
+
+"Stop a moment, and I'll show you," he said; and running to where one of
+the firemen was having a quiet pipe on deck, I saw Tom accost him, and
+then go down into the stoke-hole, to come up again directly with a big
+lump of slaty coal, bearing which he joined me.
+
+"Let's drop this in gently," he said, "just over them; or, no, it would
+make such a splash some of the sailors would come to see.  I've got a
+bit of string in my pocket."
+
+Tom always had a bit of string in his pocket, and unrolling it he
+loosely tied it round the lump of coal, and then getting well on the
+bulwark raised the coal gently up and over the side, beginning to lower
+it down.
+
+"Take care you don't go over instead of the coal, Tom," I said with a
+grim smile.
+
+"Oh, I say, Mas'r Harry, don't talk like that!" he cried; "it's enough
+to give a chap the shudders.  It was only my fun about the little
+niggers.  Now, then, I think I can shake it out of the loop."
+
+The sharks were just below us, and eight or ten feet down, as Tom
+lowered the piece of coal right to the surface, without making any
+splash and disturbing the water so as to interrupt our view of what we
+hoped would take place.  Then giving the string a jerk he loosened the
+coal, which began to descend rapidly, its bright black surface flashing
+in the brilliant sunshine till it was half-way down, when there was a
+tremendous swirl in the water, which danced and flashed and obscured our
+vision, only that we caught sight of something--of two somethings--quite
+white, and then by degrees the water calmed down, and there were the two
+sharks still there, but turned round with their heads in a fresh
+direction.
+
+"Why, they took the coal, and one of 'em's swallowed it, Mas'r Harry,"
+cried Tom excitedly.
+
+"No, Tom: I think I can see it right down below there," I said; "but
+they did have a try at it."
+
+"What are you young fellows doing there?" said a voice; and, as we
+turned sharply round, there stood the captain.  "What! are you fishing?"
+
+"No, sir," said Tom; "I only dropped something over to see if the big
+fish there would take it."
+
+"Oh, I see!" he exclaimed.  "Sharks!  Yes, there are plenty of them, my
+lads.  No bathing here.  You should get the cook to give you a lump of
+bad pork, and hang that over by the string: that would fetch them."
+
+Tom took the hint, and running to the cook told him what the captain
+said, returning at the end of a minute to where I was still watching the
+two monsters, the captain having gone.
+
+"I'll tie this tight on, Mas'r Harry," cried Tom, suiting the action to
+the word.  "I say, don't I wish we had a hook!"
+
+The piece of meat was soon firmly secured, and twisting one end of the
+string round his hand, Tom took his old place beside me, chuckling and
+laughing, and began to lower down his bait.
+
+"I say, Mas'r Harry, I wish it was a bar o' soap.  If one of 'em
+swallowed it I wonder what he'd think of the taste."
+
+By this time Tom had his bait close to the water, and directly after he
+let it drop on the surface, where it made a little disturbance and then
+floated.
+
+Almost at the same moment it appeared as if, without the slightest
+movement, one of the sharks was growing bigger and closer.  It seemed to
+fascinate us, so cautiously did it rise nearer and nearer, till all of a
+sudden it rolled right over on its side, showing the creamy white of its
+under parts; there was a gleam of teeth, a swirl in the water, and the
+greasy lump of salt pork disappeared.
+
+As it did so I saw Tom's arm give a sudden jerk, and as he uttered a
+yell I realised what was wrong, flinging my arms round him, and threw
+myself inboard, so that I dragged him with me, and we fell together upon
+the deck.
+
+"Oh, my eye!" gasped Tom as we sat up on the deck; and he held up his
+hand, beginning to unwind the broken string from it, and showing how
+deeply it had cut into it before it gave way.
+
+"What an escape, Tom!"  I cried, and as I spoke I felt that I must be
+looking very white.
+
+"I should have gone overboard if you hadn't laid hold o' me, Mas'r
+Harry," he said, looking blankly in my face.  "How strong that string
+was, and how it cut!"
+
+"How stupid of you to tie it round your hand like that!"  I said.
+
+"Well, I s'pose it was, Mas'r Harry," he said ruefully; "but one didn't
+think of it then."
+
+"Well, let's have a look at the sharks," I said, as the horror of what
+might have happened passed off.
+
+"No, thankye, Mas'r Harry," said Tom sulkily.  "I've had enough shark
+for one day.  My hand's 'bout cut in two, and my arm's 'bout pulled
+outer the socket, and one of my legs was twissen under me when I come
+down, I've had enough shark to last me half a lifetime."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT.
+
+THE NEW LAND.
+
+As the shuddering feeling of what Tom had escaped passed off, we both
+thought it would be better to say nothing about it.  We knew that he had
+acted foolishly; and I felt that I ought to have known better, and then
+soon enough, boy like, we forgot it all.
+
+For there was a bright future spread before us, and I began to wonder
+how it was that with such lovely places on the face of the earth, people
+could be content to live in old England.  There, seen through the bright
+transparent atmosphere, were convent, cathedral, castle, and tower,
+grouped at the foot of a mountain, glistening with endless tints as it
+towered up nine thousand feet, wall and battlement running up the spurs
+of the great eminence.
+
+The scene was lovely, and I was in raptures then with all that lay
+before me, and again I asked myself how people could be content in
+chilly Europe; but I soon understood all that.
+
+Tom was walking by my side, and turning to him--
+
+"What do you think of it, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Well, 'taint so very bad, Mas'r Harry," he grumbled out.  "But ain't
+them sharkses?"
+
+I followed his pointing finger, and, to my horror, I could see, cleaving
+the blue and creamy-foamed water, close inshore, the black fins of one--
+two--three--half a score of sharks; while all the time, dashing and
+splashing in and out of the surf, busily unloading boats and larger
+vessels, were dozens of mulatto porters.
+
+I expected every moment to hear a shriek and to see the silver foam
+tinged with red.  My heart beat intermittently, and there was a strange
+dampness in my hands; but I soon learned that familiarity bred contempt,
+and that probably from the noise and splashing kept up, the sharks
+rarely ventured an attack.  But all the same, that one incident made me
+gaze down into the blue depths where we were at anchor with a shudder,
+and think that the waters were not so safe as those of home.
+
+I had yet to learn something of the land.
+
+"What's this place called, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom, interrupting my
+reverie.  "You did tell me, but I've forgotten."
+
+"La Guayra!"
+
+"Humph!" ejaculated Tom.  "Why can't they call places by some name in
+plain English?"
+
+But the various strange sights and sounds soon silenced Tom's tongue,
+and, tired out at last with a long walk, we went to the house that had
+been recommended to me, and after partaking of coffee--the best I ever
+remember to have drunk--I sought my room, Tom insisting upon sleeping on
+the floor in the same chamber, and my last waking recollections were of
+the pungent fumes of tobacco, and the tinkle, tinkle, twang of a guitar
+beneath my window.
+
+I must have been asleep about three hours, and I was dreaming of having
+found gold enough to load a vessel homeward bound, when I was wakened by
+some one shaking me violently, and as I started up I became aware of a
+deafening noise, a choking sensation, as of dust rising in a cloud, and
+the voice of Tom Bulk.
+
+"Mas'r Harry--Mas'r Harry!  Wacken up, will you?"
+
+"What's the matter?"  I gasped, springing out of bed, but only to reel
+and stagger about before falling heavily.
+
+"That's just how it served me," said Tom.  "Kneel down, Mas'r Harry,
+same as I do.  The house is as drunk as a fiddler, and the floor's going
+just like the deck of a ship."
+
+"Where are you?"  I cried, trying to collect my scattered faculties,
+for, awakened so suddenly from a deep sleep, I was terribly confused.
+
+"Oh, I'm here!" said Tom.  "Give's your hand.  But, I say, Mas'r Harry,
+what's it mean?  Do all the houses get dancing like this here every
+night, because, if so, I'll sleep in the fields.  There it goes again!
+Soap and soda! what a row!"
+
+Tom might well exclaim, for with the house rocking frightfully, now came
+from outside the peal as of a thousand thunders, accompanied by the
+clang of bell, the crash of falling walls, the sharp cracking and
+splitting of woodwork, and the yelling and shrieking of people running
+to and fro.
+
+"So this ere's a native storm, Mas'r Harry?" shouted Tom to me during a
+pause.
+
+"No!"  I shouted in answer, as with a shiver of dread I worded the
+fearful suspicion that had flashed across my brain.  "No, Tom, it's an
+earthquake!"
+
+"Is that all?" grumbled Tom.  "Well, it might have come in the daytime,
+and not when folks were tired.  But I thought earthquakes swallowed you
+up."
+
+"Here, for Heaven's sake help me at this door, Tom!"  I shouted, "or we
+shall be crushed to death.  Here, push--hard!"
+
+But our efforts were vain, for just then came another shock, and one
+side of the room split open from floor to ceiling.
+
+"The window--the window, Tom!"  I shrieked.  And then, thoroughly roused
+to our danger, we both made for the casement, reaching it just as, with
+a noise like thunder, down went the whole building, when it seemed to me
+that I had been struck a violent blow, and the next instant I was
+struggling amongst broken wood, dust, and plaster, fighting fiercely to
+escape; for there was a horrible dread upon me that at the next throe of
+the earthquake we should be buried alive far down in the bowels of the
+earth.
+
+I was at liberty, though, the next minute.
+
+"Tom--Tom!"  I shouted, feeling about, for the darkness was fearful.
+"Where are you?"
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," was the reply; "close beside you."
+
+"Here, give me your hand," I shouted, "and let's run down to the shore."
+
+For in my horror that was the first place that occurred to me.
+
+"Can't, sir," said Tom.  "I ain't got no legs.  Can't feel 'em about
+there anywheres; can you?"
+
+"What do you mean?"  I cried.  "This is no time for fooling!  Look
+sharp, or we shall lose our lives."
+
+"Well, so I am looking sharp," growled Tom.  "Ain't I looking for my
+legs?  I can't feel 'em nowheres.  Oh, here they are, Mas'r Harry, here
+they are!"
+
+By this time I had crawled to him over the ruins of the house, to find
+that he was jammed in amongst the rubbish, which rose to his knees; and,
+as he told me afterwards, the shock had produced a horrible sensation,
+just as if his legs had been taken off, a sensation heightened by the
+fact that he could feel down to his knees and no farther.
+
+"This is a pleasant spot to take a house on lease, Mas'r Harry," he
+said, as I tore at the woodwork.
+
+"Are you hurt?"  I exclaimed hastily.
+
+"Not as I knows on, Mas'r Harry, only my legs ain't got no feeling in
+'em.  Stop a minute, I think I can get that one out now."
+
+We worked so hard, that at the end of a few minutes Tom was at liberty,
+and after chafing his legs a little he was able to stand; but meanwhile
+the horrors around were increasing every instant, and, to my excited
+fancy, it seemed as if the earth was like some thick piece of carpet,
+which was being made to undulate and pass in waves from side to side.
+
+Dust everywhere--choking, palpable dust; and then as from afar off came
+a faint roar, increasing each moment, till, with a furious rush, a
+fierce wind came tearing through the ruins of the smitten town, sweeping
+all before it, so that we had to cower down and seek protection from the
+storm of earth, sand, dust, plaster, and fragments hurled against us by
+the hurricane.
+
+But the rush of wind was as brief as it was fierce, and it passed away;
+when, in the lull that followed, came shrieks and moans from all
+directions, and the sounds of hurrying, stumbling feet, and then, all at
+once, from out of the thick darkness a voice cried: "Quick--quick!  To
+the mountain--the sea is coming in!"
+
+Then came more wails and shrieks from out of the darkness, followed by a
+silence that was more awful than the noise.
+
+For full five minutes that silence lasted, broken only by the fall of
+some tottering beam.  Then came quickly, one after the other, short,
+sharp, shivering vibrations of the earth beneath our feet--a shuddering
+movement that was transferred to one's own frame; and then I began to
+understand the meaning of the cry we had heard respecting the sea, for
+from where I supposed it to be, now came a singular hissing, rushing
+noise, gradually increasing to a roar, as of mighty waves, and mingled
+with that roar there was the creaking and grinding together of shipping
+and the hoarse shouting of the crews for help.
+
+But gradually the noises ceased, save when a shuddering shock once more
+made the earth to tremble beneath our feet, and some scrap of wood or
+plaster to fall from riven wall or roof.  The tremendous choking dust,
+too, began to settle down as we groped our way along over the ruins that
+choked the streets.  Now we were lost--now, after a struggle, we
+regained the way, trying to join one of the hurrying bands of fugitives
+hastening from the place.
+
+I spoke to one man, asking him if there was any more danger, but his
+reply was in Spanish; and at last, led by Tom--who seemed by instinct to
+know his way--we went down to the shore, strewn with wreck, when,
+seizing a rope, and drawing a boat to the sand, Tom told me to enter,
+and we half lay there, rising and falling upon the wave--rocked gently,
+but wakeful ever, till the sun rose over the sea--bright, glorious, and
+peaceful, as if there had been no havoc and desolation during the night.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE.
+
+AN EARTHQUAKE ON FOUR LEGS.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry, you won't stop in this blessed place, will you?" said
+Tom, as, in the full light of day, we were, some hours after, busily
+helping in the town, extricating the dead and wounded, and assisting to
+bear them to the temporary hospital prepared for their reception.
+
+The house where we had slept was, like hundreds more of the
+lightly-built tenements, prostrate; and on visiting the scene our escape
+seemed wonderful; while everywhere the mischief done was appalling--
+houses toppled down, streets choked with ruins, towers split from top to
+bottom, and stones hurled from the unroofed buildings into the gaping
+cracks and fissures running down the streets.
+
+But now that the first fright was over, people seemed to take the matter
+very coolly, flocking back into the town, to sit and smoke and eat fruit
+amidst the ruins of their homes, while others quietly set to work to
+restore and repair damages.
+
+"Has there ever been an earthquake here before?"  I said to a merchant
+who spoke English.
+
+"Earthquakes, my dear senor?  Yes, they are common things here."
+
+"But will the inhabitants rebuild the town?"
+
+"Surely.  Why not?  The site is charming."
+
+I had my thoughts upon the subject, but I did not express them; so, too,
+had Tom, but he did express his as above.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry, you won't stop here, will you?"
+
+"No," I said; "we are going up the country."
+
+"Because this place ain't safe--there's a screw loose underground
+somewheres.  Not that I mind.  Earthquakes ain't so much account after
+all, if they'd come in the day; but all the same, I wouldn't stop here."
+
+I had had no intention of stopping, only just long enough to see the
+place and make arrangements for the prosecution of my journey; but this
+catastrophe hurried my departure, and at the end of three days we were
+both mounted on mules, travelling over hot, bare plains, with the sun
+pouring down until one's brain seemed scorched; and when at last water
+was reached, it was thick and muddy-looking, so that, but for our
+horrible thirst we could not have touched it.
+
+My ideas of South America had been undergoing a great change during the
+past few days, and, quite disappointed, in the midst of a long burning
+ride I made some remark to Tom about the heat.
+
+"Hot, Mas'r Harry!" he said.  "Pooh! this ain't hot, 'Tis a little
+warmer than the other place, because there is no sea-breeze, but I could
+stand a deal more than this.  These here--will you be quiet, then?--
+these here mules is the worst of it, though, sir.  They won't go like a
+horse, nor yet like a donkey; and as to kicking--"
+
+Tom stopped short, for he wanted his breath for other purposes, his
+steed having once more turned refractory, kicking, rearing, shaking
+itself in an effort to dislodge its rider, spinning round and round,
+laying its long ears flat upon its neck, tucking its tail close in
+between its legs, and then squeaking and squealing in the most
+outrageous manner imaginable.
+
+I have no doubt that it was most terribly unpleasant to the rider,
+painful, probably; but to a looker-on it was one of the most ludicrous
+of sights, and in spite of heat, weariness, and a tendency to low
+spirits, I laughed till the tears ran down my cheeks, while Tom grinned
+with pain and held on with both hands to the refractory beast.
+
+"Ah! would you?" cried Tom, as the brute lifted its heels higher than
+usual, nearly sending him over its head.  "There never was such a beast
+as this here, Mas'r Harry.  If I'd only got a thicker stick!"
+
+One could not pity him much, for at starting he had rejected three or
+four quiet-looking beasts as too slow, and chosen the animal he rode, or
+rather tried to ride, for, if the reader will pardon the Irishism, a
+great deal of Tom's riding was walking, and performed by leading his
+beast by its bridle.
+
+But really it was a deceptive beast, and to have seen it drooping its
+head and walking calmly and peacefully by its hirer's side, no one would
+have imagined that it possessed so much mischievous sagacity as it very
+soon displayed when anyone attempted to mount it.
+
+"I like 'em with some sperrit in 'em, Mas'r Harry," Tom had said.  "If
+it was a horse it would be different; but if one's to ride a donkey,
+let's have one with something in it."
+
+And verily Tom's donkey, as he called it, was not very long before it
+showed that it had, indeed, something in it, a great deal more, in fact,
+than Tom had bargained for.  We did not pass many trees by the track,
+but when we did come upon one Tom had certain information thereof, for
+the mule rubbed his rider's leg vigorously against the trunk.  The sight
+of a muddy pool of water was the signal for him to squeak, elevate his
+heels, and then go off at a sharp gallop, when, if his rider did not
+quickly slip off behind, he would be carried into the pool and bathed,
+for the mule would drink his fill and then indulge in a roll in the mud
+and water.  In short, I never before saw so many acts of cunning in an
+animal, one and all directed at dislodging the rider.
+
+At first I was in a state of tremor lest his vagaries should infect the
+beasts ridden by myself and the guide; but no, they were evidently
+elderly mules--bordering on a hundred they might have been, from their
+grey and mangy aspect.  They had sown their wild oats years before, and
+all that they did was to trudge solemnly on, quiet and sure-footed, if
+not swift.
+
+Tom's mishaps had their pleasant face, though; they served to make a
+horribly monotonous journey more bearable, and on an average he was in
+grief, some way or another, about every two hours.
+
+"Oh, senor," said the guide proudly, "the mule is perfect!  He is a
+magnificent beast, but he has his antipathies.  He used to be ridden by
+the padre, and he is a most holy and Christian mule.  He shows his
+dislike a little sometimes like that, because the senor who rides him is
+a heretic."
+
+"Oh!"  I said.
+
+"Yes, it is so, senor, I assure you," said the guide.  "Let your friend
+ride my beast and I will take his, and then you will see how peaceable
+he is."
+
+At first Tom did not seem disposed to agree, for he did not like being
+beaten; but I ordered him to dismount, his accidents tending so greatly
+to lengthen our journey.  So the exchange of mules was made, and on we
+went once more.
+
+"See, senor!" said the guide.  "He is a pattern mule, is Juan; he goes
+like a lamb.  It is a natural dislike that he has not learned to subdue.
+He does not know what good men and generous there are amongst the
+heretics."
+
+"Haw, haw, haw, haw!  Look at that, Mas'r Harry--there's a game!" roared
+Tom, for the guide had hardly done speaking, just as we were travelling
+pleasantly along, before Juan, the mule, stopped short, put his head
+between his legs, elevated his hind-quarters, and the next moment the
+guide was sitting amongst the stones staring up at us with a most
+comical expression of countenance.
+
+"The beast has been cursed!" he cried angrily as he rose.
+"Car-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-ambo! but you shall starve for this, Juan!"
+
+"Let me have another turn at him," cried Tom, as he started off to catch
+the mule, which had cantered off a few hundred yards, and was searching
+about with his nose amongst the sand and stones for a few succulent
+blades of grass where there was not so much as a thistle or a cactus to
+be seen.
+
+But Juan had no wish to be caught, and after leading his pursuer a
+tolerable race, he stopped short, and placed all four hoofs together, so
+as to turn easily as upon a pivot, presenting always his tail to the
+hand that caught at his bridle.
+
+"Poor fellow, then!  Come, then--come over," said Tom soothingly.
+
+But the only response he obtained was an occasional lift of the beast's
+heels, and an angry kick.
+
+"You ignorant brute, you can't understand plain English!" cried Tom
+angrily.
+
+"No, senor, he is a true Spanish mule," said the guide, coming up.
+
+Between them, Tom and he soon managed to catch Juan, when, holding
+tightly by the reins, the guide vented his displeasure and took his
+revenge by thoroughly drumming the poor brute's ribs with a stout stick,
+after which Tom mounted, and our journey for the next two hours was
+without incident.
+
+But we were not to get to the end of the day without mishap.  The sun
+had begun to descend, and we were panting along, longing for the sight
+of water to quench our burning throats, when Juan began to show that the
+pain from the guide's drubbing had evaporated.  First of all he indulged
+in a squeal or two, then he contrived to kick the mule I rode upon one
+of its legs, when, emboldened by the success of the manoeuvre, he waited
+his time, and then, sidling up to his companion ridden by the guide, he
+discharged a fierce kick at him, nearly catching the guide in the shin;
+but the result was a tremendous crack from a stick right upon Juan's
+back--a blow which made him shake his head with dissatisfaction till his
+ears rattled again.
+
+He had forgotten the pain, though, in ten minutes, and the first hint we
+had thereof was a squeal and feat of sleight of _heel_, in which, to all
+appearances, Juan stood perpendicularly upon his nose and fore-feet for
+half a minute, like a fleshly tripod, while his rider, or rather his
+late rider, rolled over and over, the centre of a cloud of impalpable
+dust, coughing and sneezing, and muttering fiercely.
+
+"There!" exclaimed Tom, as he jumped up and began beating the dust from
+his garments.  "That's four times that brute has had me off to-day.
+I've rid everything in my time, Mas'r Harry, from a pig up to a parish
+bull.  I've been on sheep and donkeys, and when I was at the
+blacksmith's I rode all sorts of restive beasts as come to be shod, but
+I never did get on such a brute as that; his skin don't fit him, and he
+slippers about between your legs all sorts of ways; but I mean to ride
+him yet.  Now just you try him half an hour, Mas'r Harry, to see what
+he's like."
+
+"Not I, thank you, Tom," was my reply.  "I'm very well content."
+
+"So am I, Mas'r Harry, only he makes me so sore; but I ain't bet yet, I
+can tell him.  Come over, then!"
+
+But the mule would not "come over, then!" and there ensued a fierce
+fight of kicks between Tom and his steed, Tom essaying to kick the mule
+for punishment in the ribs; the mule, nowise taken aback, returning the
+compliment, by essaying to kick his late rider anywhere, though without
+success.  It might have been imagined, to see the artful feints and
+moves, that the mule was endowed with human reason.  Tom was more than a
+match for him at last, though, for, slipping off his jacket, he threw it
+over the mule's head and held it there, confusing the poor beast, so
+that it could not avoid a couple of heartily given kicks in the ribs;
+and before it could recover from its surprise Tom was once more seated
+upon its back in triumph.
+
+"I can stand a wonderful sight of kicking off, Mas'r Harry, I can tell
+you!  I ain't bet yet!  Co-o-me on, will you!"
+
+Apparently cowed, now that the jacket was removed, the mule journeyed on
+very peaceably, till leaving the plain we began to ascend a precipitous
+mountain-side, the track each moment growing more and more sterile,--if
+it were possible--grand, and at the same time dangerous.  And now it was
+that we began to see the qualities of the mules in the cautious way they
+picked their steps, feeling each loose piece of path before trusting
+their weight to it, and doing much towards removing a strange sensation
+of tremor evoked by the fact that we were progressing along a shelf of
+rugged rock some two feet wide--the scarped mountain-side upon our
+right, a vast precipice on the left.
+
+More than once I was for getting down to walk, but the guide dissuaded
+me, as he declared that it was far better to trust to the mules, who
+were never known to slip.
+
+A couple of miles of such travelling served to somewhat reassure me--
+familiarity with danger breeding contempt; and I called out to Tom:
+
+"I hope your beast won't bear malice, Tom, for this would be an awkward
+place for him to try his capers."
+
+I said so thoughtlessly, just at a time when we were descending; Tom's
+beast, which was before me, walking along with the most rigorous care as
+to where he set his feet.
+
+"Oh!  I say, don't, Mas'r Harry," whined Tom, "don't!  It's no joke, you
+know, and this mule understands every word you say--leastwise he might,
+you know.  I ain't afraid, only he might--"
+
+Tom's sentence was not finished; for, in fact, just as if every word I
+had uttered had been comprehended, down went the beast's head, his heels
+were elevated, and the next moment, to my horror, poor Tom was over the
+side of the path, and rolling swiftly down to apparent destruction.
+
+He was brought up, though, the next moment by the reins, which he
+tightly grasped, and which fortunately did not give way, though they
+tightened with a jerk that must have nearly dislocated the mule's neck.
+The leather, fortunately, now strained and stretched, but held firm;
+while, planting its fore-feet close to the edge of the precipice, and
+throwing its body back against the scarped wall, the mule stood firm as
+the rock itself, but snorting loudly as with glaring eyeballs it stared
+down at Tom; who hung there, trying to obtain some rest for his feet,
+but uttering no sound, only gazing up at us with a wild look that said
+plainly as could be, "Don't leave me here to die!"
+
+It was no easy task to help him; for the guide and I had both to
+dismount on to a narrow ledge of rock, clinging the while to our mules;
+but we achieved that part of our task, and the next moment, one on each
+side of Juan, we were kneeling down and trying to reach Tom's hands.
+
+But our efforts were vain, for the mule was in the way, and there was
+not standing room for all three.  There was but one way of helping, and
+that looked too desperate to be attempted, and I hesitated to propose it
+as I knelt shivering there.
+
+The same thought, though, had occurred to Tom, and in a husky voice he
+said:
+
+"Take hold of the guide's hand, Mas'r Harry, and creep under the mule's
+legs to his side."
+
+It was no time to hesitate; and I did as I was told, the mule giving
+utterance to quite a shriek as I passed.
+
+"Now can you both reach the bridle?"  Tom whispered.
+
+"Yes, yes!" we both exclaimed.
+
+"Hold on tight then, while one of you cuts it through, and then the mule
+will be out of the way."
+
+We each took a good grip of the leathern thong, raising it so that we
+had Tom's full weight upon our muscles; and then crouching down so as
+not to be drawn over, I hastily drew out my knife, opened it with some
+difficulty by means of my teeth, and then tried to cut the bridle above
+our hands.
+
+But feeling himself partly relieved of his burden, the mule began to
+grow restless, stamping, whinnying, and trying to get free.  For a
+moment I thought we might utilise his power, and make him back and help
+draw Tom up; but the narrowness of the ledge forbade it, and he would
+only have been drawn sidewise till the rein broke.
+
+Twice I tried to cut the bridle, but twice the mule balked me, and I was
+glad to ease the fearful strain on one arm by catching at the hand that
+held the knife.
+
+"Try again, Mas'r Harry, please," whispered Tom.  "I can't hang much
+longer."
+
+With a desperate effort I cut at the rein, and divided it close to the
+mule's mouth.
+
+He started back a few inches, tightening the other rein; but now, once
+more, I was grasping the rein with both hands lest it should slip
+through my fingers, and at the same moment the knife fell, striking Tom
+on the cheek and making the blood spurt out, before flying down--down to
+a depth that was horrible to contemplate.
+
+It was a fearful time, and as I crouched there a cold sensation seemed
+to be creeping through the marrow of all my bones.  We could not raise
+Tom for the mule, I could not cut the rein, and upon asking I found that
+the guide had no knife, and, what was worse, it was evident that he was
+losing nerve.
+
+I dared not try to heave--it would have been madness, cumbered and
+crowded together as we were; and in those brief moments of agony it
+seemed to me that I was Tom's murderer, for, but on account of my wild
+thirst for coming abroad, he might have been safe at home.
+
+"Try--try again, Mas'r Harry, please," whispered the poor fellow
+imploringly; "I shouldn't like to die out here in these savage parts,
+nor yet this how.  Make one more try to get rid of that beast."
+
+As if to show that he was not all bad, just at the moment when it seemed
+that all chance of saving poor Tom was gone, when our arms felt to be
+dragging out of their sockets, and a something drawing me by a strange
+fascination, joined to the weight, over the side of the precipice--the
+mule gave a wild squeal, shook its head for an instant, seized the tight
+rein in its teeth, and bit it through.
+
+The next moment it gave a whinny of relief, planted its feet on my back
+as I half lay down, leaped over me, and was out of our way; while how we
+managed the next part I cannot say.  All I know is that there was a
+horrible struggle, a scrambling rush, the panting groans of those who
+fought with grim death, and then I lay half-fainting upon the shelf,
+with honest old Tom at my side.
+
+"Thank Heaven!"  I muttered.
+
+"Amen, Mas'r Harry!" said Tom in a whisper; and then for some time no
+one spoke.
+
+Half an hour after, very quiet and sober of mien, we were leading our
+mules down the shelf, unnerved and trembling, till once more the plain
+was reached, and with it rest for the night.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN.
+
+PLAYING AT HEROES.
+
+And so we journeyed on day after day, through heat and dust, and arid,
+stony lands; with my heart sinking lower and lower and the thought of
+home not being so very bad a place after all continually forcing itself
+upon me, till our guide suddenly announced our proximity to the place I
+had come these thousands of miles to seek.  And now it was that from
+where it had sunk my heart gave a great leap of exultation, and I sat
+for long enough upon my bony mule drinking in the scene before me.
+
+For the last three days our ride had been over stone and sand, with here
+and there a melancholy palm shooting up from the drab-hued desert, the
+sun beating down and being reflected up in a way that was almost
+unbearable; even Tom riding with his mouth open, panting like a dog, his
+face coated with perspiration and dust; while when at night we had
+stopped at some wretched makeshift of an inn--a hut generally where a
+grass hammock and a little lukewarm water was the total accommodation--a
+wash or bath of any kind had been quite out of the question.  But now,
+as we were descending a steep mountain-side, it seemed as if we had
+suddenly dropped into one of the most lovely spots on earth, riding at
+once right in beneath the shade of a huge forest, with a sea of green
+leaves spreading out before us in every direction.
+
+By comparison the coolness was delightful, and we rode through a vast
+arcade over a golden net-work spread by the sun upon the grassy
+undergrowth; whilst from afar off came that sweetest of sounds to a
+parched and thirsty traveller, the murmuring of falling water, now soft
+and gentle, now increasing to a roar.
+
+"Great river, senors," said our guide, pointing forward.  "Senor Don
+Reuben Landell on other side."
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," said Tom just then, "they ain't sure where the
+Garden of Eden was, are they?  I'm blest if I don't think we've found
+the very spot, and if--There she goes!"
+
+I can't say whether Tom's mind was running just then upon Eve, but as a
+light figure seemed to flit into our sight and stand gazing at us with
+bright and wondering eyes, mine did; and for a few minutes after she had
+disappeared amongst the trees I sat in my saddle without speaking.
+
+But the glorious verdure around soon made me forget the fair vision; and
+now, riding on a few paces, now halting at an opening in the forest, I
+sat drinking in the scene with the feelings of one in a dream.
+
+Then we rode on a hundred yards up an ascent, with the sun full upon us
+once more, to descend a precipitous path, holding on tightly by the
+mule, which one expected to slip and hurl one down a gulf at the side;
+but the descent was safely made, and then we stood gazing at a belt of
+cultivated ground--the forest and river lying off to our right.
+
+"There is the river path, senors," said our guide, "straight down.  The
+ground is soft and bad for the mules, and I go back.  You will find a
+gentleman to take you over the great river; but I would look about me;
+there are little snakes, the great water-boa, and the crocodiles of the
+river."
+
+Then saluting us with his half-bred Spanish politeness, our guide stood
+while we possessed ourselves of our light luggage, and then led off his
+mules, leaving us to follow the pointed-out direction, which took us
+down to the swampy bank of a great muddy river flowing gently by us,
+cutting its way, as it were, through a forest of mighty trees, whose
+tall stems shot up from the water's edge.  There was a small canoe
+tethered to a sapling where the path ceased, but no sign of its owner;
+while half a mile in front, across the river, was an opening in the
+trees similar to that in which we stood, which was, doubtless, the path
+we were to pursue.
+
+We stood in deep shadow; but the sun was flashing from the breast of the
+river as it rolled slowly on, its even surface unbroken save here and
+there by some water-bird; while in several places what seemed to be
+rough tree-trunks were floating slowly down with the stream.  The great
+trees were wreathed and festooned to the water's edge with parasites and
+vines; and now and then the shrill cry of some parrot rang out, the bird
+flashing into sight for an instant, and then disappearing amidst the
+glorious verdure.
+
+"Well, Tom," I said, "this is different from the old country."
+
+But he did not reply; and turning, I found him gazing fixedly amongst
+the swamp herbage, through which was a wet, muddy track, when, following
+the direction of his gaze and peering into the shade, I became aware of
+a pair of the most hideous, hateful eyes fixed upon me that I had ever
+seen.  I was heated with walking over the wet ground, and there was a
+warm, steamy exhalation rising around; but in a moment my tongue became
+dry and a cold perspiration bedewed my limbs, as, fascinated almost, I
+stood gazing within six feet of the monster, which now began slowly a
+retrograde motion till the herbage hid it from our sight.  Then there
+was a loud rustling rush, a splash in the water, and wave after wave
+proclaimed the size of the beast that had, fortunately for us, declined
+to attack.
+
+"Whurra!" exclaimed Tom with a shudder.  "Say, Mas'r Harry, do newts
+grow as big as that out here?"
+
+"It was a crocodile, Tom," I said with a shiver.  "And look--look!  Why,
+the river swarms with them!"
+
+"So it does, seemin'ly," exclaimed Tom as I pointed out the slimy backs
+of half-a-score of them floating down the stream; for I could see now
+that they were no trees, while here and there on the muddy bank we could
+make out a solitary monster basking, open-mouthed, in the sun.
+
+"Come along," I said, "let's get over."
+
+"But will they touch the boat, Mas'r Harry?  I ain't afraid, you know,
+only they are queersome beasts as ever I did see."
+
+"I don't think there's any fear of that," I said; "but at any rate we
+must get over."
+
+Stepping close to the water's edge I drew the light canoe up by its bark
+rope, disturbing either a small reptile or some great fish as I did so,
+for there was a rushing swirl in the water and the frail vessel rocked
+to and fro.
+
+In spite of Tom's declarations to the effect that such a pea-shuck would
+sink with us, I stepped in and he followed; when, taking the paddles, we
+pushed off and began to make our way out into the stream, Tom's eyes
+glancing around as he dipped in his paddle cautiously, expecting every
+moment that it would touch a crocodile; but using our paddles--clumsily
+enough, as may be supposed--we made some way, and then paused to
+consider whether we should go forward or backward, for we had at one and
+the same time arrived at the knowledge that the strong stream was our
+master, and that until we had attained to some skill in the use of the
+paddles any progress upstream towards the landing-place was out of the
+question.
+
+"We must get across lower down, Tom," I said, "and then walk back."
+
+"What! through the wood, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Yes, through the wood."
+
+"Lor'!  No, don't do that, Mas'r Harry.  We shall be eat up alive!  Them
+there woods swarms with snakes--I know they do.  And just look there!"
+he cried, splashing fiercely with his paddle to frighten a huge reptile,
+but without effect; for the great beast came slowly floating down in all
+its native hideousness, its rugged bark-like back and the rough
+prominences above its eyes out of the muddy water, one eye peering at us
+with the baleful look peculiar to this fearful beast.
+
+The next minute it had passed us, and we were once more paddling slowly
+on, the river having swept us quite out of sight of the landing-place.
+But the sights around were so novel that I rather enjoyed our passage.
+In spite of Tom's anxiety, every now and then I ceased paddling to gaze
+at some bright-plumaged bird flitting from tree to tree overhanging the
+stream.  Once I made sure that the great bare vine which swung between
+two boughs must be a serpent, till, passing by, we made out its real
+character.
+
+At last, though, I awoke to the fact that it was time to be up and
+doing, for the current had swept us round a great bend of the river, and
+below us I saw that for a wide stretch of quite a couple of miles the
+river was broken up by rapids.  Great masses of rock thrust their bare
+heads out of the water like river monsters, and round them the muddy
+tide bubbled, and foamed, and eddied.
+
+It was plain enough that we were approaching a dangerous part, and had
+not our sense warned us of the peril we had ample warning in the
+increased swiftness and troubled state of the stream.  I saw at a glance
+that a boat would have but a poor chance of existing amongst the rocky
+way if it should be swept there, and I had taken a firm grip of my
+paddle when--
+
+"Look, Tom!"  I cried.
+
+And for a moment our attention was taken up by one of those glorious
+golden-green and scarlet birds--the trogons--flitting close by us, its
+emerald crest and gorgeous yard-long tail-feathers flashing in the sun,
+while its brilliant scarlet breast was for a moment reflected in the
+water.
+
+"Oh, you beauty!" cried Tom.  "If I only had my old gun!  But, I say,
+Mas'r Harry, paddle away!"
+
+Already somewhat more used to the propellers, we began to force the boat
+towards the opposite bank, hoping to get into an eddy that should help
+us along; but we had dallied with our task, and the stream now ran more
+swiftly than ever.  Still we made some progress, and were contriving to
+dip together, when I almost let my paddle pass from my hands, for a
+strange, wild cry rang along the surface of the water.
+
+"What's that?"  I exclaimed.
+
+"I should say it was one of them pleasant brutes out for a holiday--one
+of them tiger or leopard things, like what we used to see in Wombwell's
+show, like great tomcats.  I'll lay a wager this is the spot where they
+live when they're at home and go yowling about."
+
+"There it is again!"  I exclaimed excitedly.  "Why, it was a cry for
+help.  There is some one in the river!"
+
+"Then he'd better hold his tongue," said Tom, "and not get shouting, or
+he'll have all these great beasts come rushing at him, same as they did
+in the ponds at home when we used to throw in a worm upon a bent pin and
+fish for the little newts.  There, Mas'r Harry, look at that chap!"
+
+As he spoke Tom pointed with his paddle at a great uncouth monster, some
+twelve feet long and tremendously thick, which had raised its head from
+the slime in which it wallowed upon the edge of the river, and was
+slowly turning itself, first in one and then in another direction,
+before splashing a little and then shooting itself off into deep water
+with one stroke of its powerful tail.
+
+"Ugh, the brutes!" ejaculated Tom.  "They'd make short work of a fellow
+if he was thrown in for live bait.  But, I say, that is some one
+shouting, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"Paddle down closer towards the rapids, Tom," I said excitedly.
+
+Then, for a moment we forgot our own danger as with a sharp stroke or
+two we sent the canoe out in full stream, so that it swept down swiftly.
+
+"You're right, Mas'r Harry--you're right!" said Tom, eager now as I was
+myself.  "Look--look, there's a canoe upset!"
+
+"Paddle away!"  I cried as another shout came ringing towards us, just
+as I obtained a good view of what was taking place below.
+
+"But we shall be over too, Mas'r Harry, if you row like that.  Lord help
+them, though, if there ain't a woman in the water!"  Tom cried, working
+his paddle furiously--an example I had set him.
+
+Swaying about, the little vessel raced almost through the troubled
+waters, which each moment grew more rough, leaping and dancing, and
+threatening at times to splash right into our frail boat.
+
+Our excitement was pardonable, for right in front of us, and about two
+hundred yards down the river, there was a sight which made my nerves
+tingle, and the paddle in my hands to feel like a straw.  A canoe of
+about double the size of our own had been overset in the rapids, and,
+with four figures clinging to it, was rapidly floating down stream
+amidst the boiling waters, which leaped and seethed round them.  Now we
+could see that two of the figures were making efforts to turn the canoe;
+but it was evident that in the rough water, and with the others clinging
+to it, this was impossible; and, evidently half-strangled and bewildered
+in the fierce rush, they had given up the next minute, and were clinging
+to the vessel's sides.
+
+Now it was hurried down a rapid with a tremendous rush, to be tossing
+the next moment in the deep below, whirling round and round, now half
+under, now by its buoyancy rising again with its clinging freight, to be
+swept into an eddy where the water was comparatively calm, but only to
+be slowly driven back again into the swift current hastening down the
+rocky slope; and a groan of dismay burst from my breast as I saw the
+boat dashed against a great black jagged mass of rock right in its way.
+But the next instant the party had glided round it, and were again being
+swept downwards where the river was one mass of creamy foam.
+
+How we went down I cannot tell you, for it was due to no skill on our
+part; the wonder is that we were not overset a score of times; but
+somehow, almost miraculously, we seemed to avoid rock after rock that
+was scattered in our way, the little canoe bounding along in a mad race
+as we plied our paddles with all the energy at our command.  I have
+often thought since that our rough action and chance-work way of running
+the gauntlet amidst the rocks was the reason of our success, where
+skilled managers of a canoe would have come to grief; but, be that as it
+may, in a wild exciting race we dashed on and on down the gradual watery
+slope, the noise of many waters thundering in our ears, while, with what
+I believe is the true generous spirit of an Englishman pervading us, we
+forgot our own danger in the sight of that incurred by the party in the
+rapids.
+
+"Go it, Mas'r Harry!"  Tom roared, mad almost with excitement, as he
+scooped away with his paddle.  "Hurraw!  Who's afraid?  That's a good
+un!  Now again!  Brayvo! lay into it, my hearty!"
+
+We gained upon the upset boat swiftly, when, as the clinging party were
+swept into a tolerably smooth reach that intervened between a fierce
+race of water and the next dangerous spot, I saw one of the men leave
+the canoe and strike boldly out for the shore, followed directly after
+by two more, whose dusky skin proclaimed them of Indian blood.
+
+"Why, only look there--three men and one woman!" cried Tom.  "And if
+they haven't gone away and left her!  This ain't old England, Mas'r
+Harry; we don't do things that how at home.  Paddle away!  Mind, sir, or
+you'll have us over!  Only wish I had a couple of tallow staves instead
+of this wooden spoon.  Paddle away, sir!  Cowardly warmint!  That's it,
+sir; this boat's as light as a cork, but don't have us over.  We shall
+soon reach her now--mind, steady, for I'm scared to death of the water,
+and I wouldn't swim as they do, not for a thousand pounds--not but what
+I could if I liked.  That's it, sir, only another thirty yards--long
+strokes and steady ones, and--hold on, my dear, we're coming."
+
+"Push on, Tom--push on, and save your breath," I cried, "for Heaven's
+sake!  Ah!--"
+
+I could not restrain that cry--it burst from my lips, for just at that
+moment I saw the female figure, yet clinging to the overturned canoe,
+glide from her hold, as if drawn away by some invisible agency down,
+down, gradually beneath the swift tide.
+
+"It's one of them great wild beasts got her!" cried Tom, giving vent to
+the thought that had flashed across my brain.  "Oh! don't--pray, pray
+don't, Mas'r Harry!"  I heard him shriek.  "I'm scared to death of these
+waters, and if you go I must too, for I swore I'd stick to you like a--
+Oh, Mas'r Harry!"
+
+With Tom's voice ringing in my ears, but having no more effect than they
+would have had in staying the swift rush of the rapids, I had in one and
+the same moment recognised the drowning face, and, paddle in hand,
+leaped from the frail canoe into the foaming river.
+
+That was a wild and thrilling moment, when, nerving myself to the
+encounter, I battled with the fierce water, trying to put into practice
+every feint and feat that I had learned in old bathing times at home,
+when sporting in the summer evenings in our little river.  Speed,
+though, and skill in swimming seemed unavailing here, as I felt the
+waters wreathe round me, strangling me, as it were, in a cold embrace;
+then seizing me to drag me here, to drag me there; dashing me against
+this rock, against that, and directly after sending a cold chill of
+horror through every nerve, as a recollection of the hideous reptiles
+abounding in the river flashed upon me, when I felt myself sucked down
+lower and lower in the vortex of some eddy between the rocks.  It was
+like dreaming of swimming in some horrible nightmare, my every effort
+being checked when I strove to reach the drowning girl; and again and
+again, when just on the point of clutching her light garments, I was
+swept away, to begin once more fighting towards her with the energy of
+despair.
+
+At last, however, my arm was round her, and two little hands closed upon
+my shoulders, clinging to me with a despairing grip, as I fought hard to
+keep on the surface; but only to be swept here and there, helpless as a
+fragment of wood, the muddy water the while thundering in my ears and
+bubbling angrily at my lips.
+
+Now up, now down--over, and over, and over, rolling along a shallow
+smooth platform of rock, and then into deeper water again.  I began to
+feel that I was fighting my last fight, and that the enemy was too
+strong.
+
+But still I fought on--more feebly, 'tis true, but still with the
+stubborn determination of an unworthy representative of that nation
+which was said by a great general not to know when they were beaten.
+
+Then came a respite, as I was swept into still water; but I was too weak
+now to take advantage of it before I was borne into the next rapid,
+foaming to receive me with my burden.
+
+The river was here like a series of long rugged steps, with here fierce
+tumbling waters, there a smooth interval, but only to be succeeded again
+and again by broken water, into another foaming chaos of which I was
+swept.
+
+It was now one wild confusion of struggling wave and roaring, foaming
+surf; then came a dim sense that I was half stunned by a fierce blow--
+that I was growing weaker--that I was drowning fast; and for an instant
+a pang shot through me as I seemed to see vividly a portion of my past
+life, and thought of how hard it was to die so young.
+
+I was again swept into the still water, and my arm struck out
+involuntarily as, my lips well above water, I drew in a long breath--a
+long invigorating draught of the breath of life; but my efforts were
+feeble, and my mind was misty and confused, but only for a few moments.
+In a flash, as it were of light, the horror of my position came upon me,
+and I gave utterance to a cry of terror, for suddenly there was a fierce
+rushing swirl in the water.  I felt something strike me obliquely; then
+the light figure I had striven so hard to save was almost jerked from my
+arm, and the next instant we were being borne swiftly along through the
+water upstream and towards the shore.
+
+Jerk, jerk, jerk! and I gazed with horror upon the pale face close to
+mine, fortunately insensible; my eyes seemed ready to start from their
+sockets with horror; there was a sensation as of a ghostly hand stirring
+my wet hair; and then once more I gave utterance to a strange hoarse cry
+that startled even me; for as--in spite of my weakness--my mental
+energies grew momentarily clearer I thoroughly realised the horror of
+our position, and that we were being dragged rapidly away by one of the
+ravenous reptiles of the river.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN.
+
+IN THE WOODS.
+
+Death, we are told, has been met by the brave-hearted again and again
+unflinchingly; but such a death as was now threatening me and the poor
+girl I was trying to save must have made the stoutest blench.  For my
+part, a chill of horror seemed to pass through every limb, thoroughly
+unnerving me, so that my efforts were but feeble as I felt myself
+sweeping through the water towards the bank, where the stream ran
+swiftly, but free of rocks, while its eddies and whirlpools showed that
+there were holes and places worn in beneath the banks, to one of which
+it seemed evident the monster was making.
+
+I made one desperate struggle, as, nearing the bank, the water
+shallowed; but the slight figure was still dragged swiftly onward, while
+twice over I felt the rough slimy body of the monster in contact with my
+legs.  All defence or attack--all prospect of escape, seemed out of the
+question, and by the action of the water I was turned over helplessly
+upon my back, the muddy stream flowing over my face half-strangling me.
+I had during the last few moments been fast approaching to a dreamy
+state, which dulled the acute horror of my position, and I believe that
+a few more moments would have produced insensibility, when I was
+galvanised, as it were, back into vigorous action by a sound as
+something grazed my shoulder.
+
+"Now, then, hold fast by the side--hold fast!" was shrieked in my ears
+as a hand grasped mine, guiding it to the edge of the canoe, to which I
+clung with renewed energy as we were racing through the shallows at a
+tremendous rate.  Then came a shouting, and the vigorous beating of the
+water with a paddle, a tremendous rushing swirl, which nearly overset
+the canoe, and our locomotion was at an end, the vessel floating lightly
+in a deep pool beneath the trees.  A few strokes of the paddle and the
+prow struck the muddy bank; and before I could recover from the
+prostration I felt myself dragged on to the grass, and my arm roughly
+torn from the waist it so tightly encircled; but not before I had seen
+that the clinging garments were torn--rent down one side, evidently
+where the huge beast had seized its prey; and then there was the
+muttering of voices, the rustling of the undergrowth as a passage was
+forced through it, and we were alone.
+
+"I'd have said thanky for a good deal less than that, if it had been
+me," said Tom gruffly, as he stood gazing after the retreating party.
+"They're a nice lot, Mas'r Harry--swam off like a set of copper-skinned
+varmints, and left the gal to drownd; and when some one else has the
+pluck to save her, they look savage and disappointed, and snatch her
+away just as if they were recovering stolen goods.  My eye, though,
+Mas'r Harry, it was a narrer escape--worse than swinging under that old
+donkey's nose!"
+
+My only reply was a shudder.
+
+"I didn't think it so precious bad, Mas'r Harry, when we was up at that
+landing-place in the ship; but I do think now as we're getting it rather
+warm: only ashore here a few days, and we've had our lodging shook about
+our ears; I've been pitched over a precipice like the side of a house;
+and you've been a'most swallowed and drowned by a great newt.  I'll give
+in.  It is a trifle hotter than it was at home.  But say, Mas'r Harry,
+it ain't going to be all in this style, is it?  Why it's like being
+heroes in a book--Robinson Crusoe and Man Friday, and all on in that
+tune, and us not knowing how much hotter we're going to have it!"
+
+"Matter of chance, Tom," I said, wringing the water from my clothes as I
+stood in the hot sun.  "We may be here for years and have no more
+adventures.  Perhaps, after so rough a welcome, matters may turn out
+gloriously."
+
+Tom began to whistle and pick leaves to chew and spit out again, till I
+pronounced my readiness to proceed.
+
+"Paddles are both in the boat," said Tom, then, as he secured the canoe
+by its bark rope to a tree, "we've got over the river, Mas'r Harry,
+that's one thing; but how far we are down below the landing-place I
+dunno, I'm sure."
+
+We proved to be much farther below than I thought for, enough time
+elapsing for my clothes to get nearly dry in the patches of hot sun we
+passed as we wound our way through the forest, the rushing noise of the
+river on our right guiding us in our efforts to keep within range of the
+bank, which we avoided on account of the huge beasts we had seen basking
+there.
+
+"This is a rum sort of country and no mistake, Mas'r Harry," said Tom at
+last, as he stood mopping the perspiration from his face; "but, somehow
+or other, one feels just the same here as one did in the old place, and
+I'm as hungry now as if I hadn't had a morsel to eat for a week.  Is it
+much farther, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"I don't know how many miles we've come," I replied.
+
+But his words had fully accounted for a strange sensation of faintness
+that troubled me.  A little more perseverance, though, brought us to the
+track--one that we might have reached in a quarter of the time had we
+known the way.
+
+A short walk showed us that we were correct, for we went along the track
+to the river, so as to make sure of this being the one we sought--for
+being lost in these wilds was something not to be thought of for a
+minute.  There, though, on the other side of the stream, was the
+landing-place from which we had started, only to reach our present
+position after a roundabout eventful journey.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry--come along," said Tom, turning.
+
+And now, pursuing the track, we found that we were gradually mounting a
+slope, till the trees were left behind and we stood upon an eminence
+looking down upon my uncle's house.
+
+All that we had seen beautiful before seemed to fail before the picture
+upon which we now gazed, where all that was lavish in nature had been
+aided by the hand of man, cultivation subduing and enriching, till the
+region below us blushed in beauty; for we were looking down upon a
+lightly-built, pleasantly-shaded house, with its green jalousie-covered
+windows, and great creeper-burdened verandah, gaily-painted, and running
+right round the house.
+
+The place stood in the midst of a grove of verdure of the most glorious
+golden-green, rich with the great crimson, coral-like blossoms of what
+is there called _madre del cacao_--the cocoa's mother--tall, regularly
+planted trees, cultivated for the protection and shade they give to the
+plants beneath, great bananas loaded with fruit, bright green coffee
+bushes, and the cocoa with its pods, green, yellow, blood-red, and
+purple.  The roughly erected fences were, so to speak, smothered with
+glorious trumpet-blossomed convolvuli, whose bright hues were peering
+ever from a bed of heart and spear shaped richly green leaves.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE.
+
+THE HACIENDA.
+
+Clear and bright was the sky, and wherever the rays of the sun
+penetrated it was for them to fall in a shower of golden arrows, and
+form tracery upon the green carpet beneath the trees, amid whose
+branches, screaming, chattering, climbing, and hanging head downwards,
+or fluttering from bough to bough, were hundreds of rainbow-hued
+parrots, beautiful as Nature's dyes could paint.
+
+It was a scene of exceeding beauty, and was not lost even upon blunt,
+hungry Tom.
+
+"Well," he exclaimed, "if this don't pay for coming out, may I never
+again wire out a bar of best mottled.  It's a rum sort of country
+though; one time frightening you to death, and the next minute coaxing
+you into staying.  S'pose, Mas'r Harry, that there's a sort of foreign
+market-garden?"
+
+"If I'm not mistaken, Tom, that's my uncle's plantation."
+
+"With all my heart, Mas'r Harry; but choked as I am with thirst I should
+like one of them pumpkins or some of the other outlandish fruits.  Let's
+have a pen'orth, sir.  My! what a sight though!  I hope this is the
+spot.  But there, only look, Mas'r Harry, did you ever see such
+sparrows?  Look at the colour of 'em!  If I don't take home a cageful,
+and one of them red and yaller poll-parrots, I don't stand here now.
+But are you sure your uncle Reuben lives here, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"I think this must be the spot, Tom," I said, "according to the guide's
+description."
+
+"Why, he must be quite a lord, sir.  He's never touched taller or soap
+in his life, I'll bet.  But, say, Mas'r Harry, we look rough uns to go
+and see him, don't us?"
+
+I laughed and then led the way, Tom following close behind, till we
+entered a sort of court-yard surrounded by sheds, with men and women
+busily at work at what I afterwards learned was the preparation of the
+cocoa.
+
+"And you're Harry Grant then, are you?" said a tall, brown-skinned man,
+who was pointed out to me as the owner of the place, and who, upon my
+introducing myself, received me with a hearty English grip of the hand.
+"Hang it, my lad, it brings old times back to see a face fresh from
+home!  You're your mother's boy plain enough.  But come in, and welcome,
+my lad, though we have been in a bit of a stew; my girl upset in a canoe
+and half drowned; but the gentleman with her saved her.  She's not much
+the worse for it, though."
+
+I turned round hastily and just in time to stop Tom, who was about to
+blurt out the whole affair, for I thought it better to be silent, I
+hardly knew why, my mind being just then in a state of confusion, it
+being rather startling to find that I had probably been the means of
+saving the life of my own cousin; though why the gentleman who was with
+her--whoever he might be--should have the credit of what Tom and I had
+done, I did not know.  Anyhow, I was to be beneath the same roof, and I
+thought matters would come right in the end.
+
+My uncle led the way into a cool half-darkened room, where I was
+introduced to an aunt, of whose existence I was not aware, inasmuch as
+she was the lately married widow of a neighbouring planter.  Then I
+heard my uncle say:
+
+"Not lying down, Lill?  All right again?  Glad of it!  Well, this is a
+cousin for you, and I hope you will be good friends."
+
+I hardly know what I did or said just then; for timidly coming forward
+out of the shade, I saw the fair vision of the morning, but now deadly
+pale--the maiden whom a couple of hours before I had rescued from so
+horrible a death.  She was dressed in a simple muslin, and her long fair
+hair, yet clammy and damp, was tied with a piece of blue ribbon, and
+hung down her shoulders.  It was the same sweet English face that might
+be seen in many a country home far away in our northern islands; but out
+there, in that tropic land, with its grand scenery and majestic
+vegetation, she seemed to me, in spite of her pallor, to be fairy-like
+and ethereal; and for a while, as I thought of the events of a short
+time before--events in which she was unconscious that I had played a
+somewhat important part--I was blundering and awkward, and unable to say
+more than a few of the commonest words of greeting.
+
+I have no doubt that they all thought me an awkward clumsy oaf, and I
+must have looked it; but I was suddenly brought to myself by my uncle's
+voice and the sight of a pair of eyes.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, performing the ceremony of introduction,
+"Mr--(I beg his pardon) Don--Don Pablo Garcia, a neighbour of mine--the
+gentleman who just saved Lilla's life.  Garcia, my nephew--my sister's
+son--from old England."
+
+Instinctively I held out my hand, and the next moment it was clasping
+something cold and damp and fishlike.  A few words in English passed,
+but they were muttered mechanically, and for a few moments, each
+apparently unable to withdraw his hand, we two stood looking in each
+other's eyes, my expression--if it was a true index of my heart--being
+that of wonder and distrust; for I seemed again, for the first time in
+my life, to be undergoing a new series of sensations.  I knew in that
+instant of time that I was gazing into the eyes of a deadly enemy--of a
+man who, for self-glorification, had arrogated to himself the honour of
+having saved Lilla's life, probably under the impression that we, being
+strangers, were bound down the river, and would never again turn up to
+contradict him.  What he had said, how much he had taken upon himself,
+or how much had been laid upon him through the lying adulations of his
+Indian servants, I do not know; but I was conscious of an intense look
+of hatred and dislike--one that was returned by a glance of contempt
+which made his teeth slightly grate together, though he tried to conceal
+all by a snake-like smile as he recovered himself, and, seeking a way
+out of his difficulty, exclaimed:
+
+"The senor and I have met before: he helped me to save our woodland
+flower from the river."
+
+"Indeed! my dear Harry!" exclaimed my uncle, catching my disengaged hand
+in his, while by an effort I dragged the other away from Garcia's cold
+clutch, his eyes fixing mine the while, and seeming to say, "Be careful,
+or I'll have your life!"--mine, if they could speak a language that he
+could interpret, plainly saying, "You cowardly hound, you left her to
+perish!"
+
+"It was nothing on my part, Uncle," I said quietly.  "Nothing but what
+any fellow from the old country would have done."
+
+The next moment Mrs Landell, my new aunt, had thrown her arms round my
+neck.  Formality of greeting was at an end, and, with tears in her eyes,
+she thanked me and welcomed me to the hacienda.
+
+I was longing for the scene to be at an end, for I was growing troubled
+and confused, when once more the tell-tale blood swept into my face, as
+I blushed like a great girl; for Lilla came up, and with the colour
+mantling, too, in her pale cheeks, thanked me for what I had done.
+
+It was some few minutes before I was sufficiently cool and collected to
+have a good look at Garcia, when I found him to be a tall, well-shaped,
+and swarthy young fellow, about five years my senior.  He was handsome,
+but there was a sinister look about his dark eyes, and, in spite of his
+effeminacy, his lithe limbs betokened great strength.  An instinctive
+feeling of dislike, though, kept growing upon me, although there was a
+pleasant smile, and a display of regular white teeth, which he turned
+upon me every time he encountered my eyes, as he lounged about smoking a
+cigar, whose fragrance betokened its origin.  He was easy of mien,
+well-dressed, and evidently at home there; while by contrast I was
+shabby, travel-stained, and awkward.
+
+I disliked him at first, because I knew him to be a cur and a liar; but
+soon--ay, before ten minutes had elapsed--I knew why my instinctive
+dislike was increasing every moment we were together.  I learned why we
+were to be enemies to the end; for after smoking some time in silence,
+listening the while with smiling face to my uncle's questions concerning
+home--questions which I answered clumsily, growing each moment more put
+out and annoyed; for it seemed to me that Garcia's smiles were pitying,
+and that he was comparing his grace with my awkwardness--he rose,
+crossed over to Lilla, who was seated, took her hand in his as if it
+belonged to him of right, raised it to his lips, and then, with a
+smiling farewell to all present, he whispered a few words to my cousin,
+gave me--his lips smiling the while--a sharp meaning look from between
+his half-closed eyelids, and then his figure darkened for an instant the
+sunshine streaming in at the door, and he was gone.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
+
+ALL IS NOT GOLD THAT GLITTERS.
+
+"Well, lad," said my uncle, when, refreshed by a pleasant bath and a
+glass or two of goodly wine with the meal spread for me, I sat with him
+in the shaded room, my aunt--a pleasant, comely, Englishwoman--seated
+with her daughter, working by one of the open windows--"well, lad,
+people don't come a four or five thousand miles' journey on purpose to
+pay visits.  What have you got in your eye?"
+
+"Frankly, Uncle," I said, "I don't know.  I could not rest at home, and
+felt that I must go abroad; and now I must say that I am glad of my
+resolution."
+
+I thought at first, as I was speaking, of the beautiful scenery, but in
+the latter part of my speech I was looking towards Lilla, and for a
+moment our eyes met.
+
+My uncle shook his head as I finished speaking.
+
+"Soap-boiling isn't a pleasant trade, Harry," he said; "but as the old
+saying goes, `Dirty work brings clean money.'  There's always been a
+comfortable home for you, hasn't there?"
+
+"Yes, Uncle," I said impatiently.
+
+"And plenty to eat, and drink, and wear?"
+
+"Yes, Uncle."
+
+"And your father kept you at good schools till you were seventeen or
+eighteen?"
+
+"Yes, Uncle."
+
+"Then--it's plain speaking, but I must give it to you, Harry--you were a
+young fool to leave it all.  You were like the dog with the shadow,
+you've dropped a good mouthful of meat to grasp at nothing.  You'd have
+done better sticking to the soap."
+
+"I couldn't, Uncle," I exclaimed.
+
+"Ah! that's what all you young donkeys say.  Only to think of it--
+throwing up the chance of a good, sure trade!"
+
+"But, my dear uncle, I was so unsuited for it, though I am ready enough
+to work.  If you can give me employment, pray do so, for do not think I
+have come to be a burden to you."
+
+"My dear boy," he said gravely, "I don't think anything of the sort.
+You are welcome here; and we owe you, it seems, the life of our dear
+child, though what your share was in saving her I don't know.  Don't
+think, though, that we are not glad to see you.  There," he said,
+laughing, "there's your aunt ready again to throw her arms around your
+neck, you see."
+
+Mrs Landell had dropped her work and crossed over to lay her hand upon
+my shoulder, while there was a tear--one bright, gem-like tear of
+gratitude--sparkling in Lilla's eye as she looked up timidly from her
+work, and that stupid young heart of mine gave a tremendous thump
+against my chest.
+
+There was a pause then for a few minutes, when, in a thick, husky voice,
+I once more tried to speak.
+
+"I'm sure," I said, "your welcome is warmer than I deserve; and indeed,
+Uncle, I wish to be no burden to you.  If you would rather not employ
+me, say so frankly; but perhaps you might, all the same, put me in the
+way of getting on as you have done."
+
+"As I have done!" he said laughing.  "I see, my dear boy, you look at
+things with just the same eyes that I did when I came over years ago.
+It's a lovely country, isn't it, Harry?"
+
+"Glorious!"  I cried excitedly.
+
+"Yes," he said sadly; "glorious as the gilded frame of a mirror, all
+lustre and brightness, while underneath it is composition, and wood, and
+ill-smelling glue.  Why, my dear boy, I am only living from hand to
+mouth.  This looks, of course, all very bright and beautiful to you, and
+a wonderful contrast to hazy, foggy, cold old England--Heaven bless it!
+But fire-flies, and humming-birds, and golden sunshine, and
+gaily-painted blossoms are not victuals and drink, Harry; and, besides,
+when you set to and earn your victuals and drink, you don't know but
+what they will all be taken away from you.  We've no laws here, my lad,
+worth a rush.  We're a patriotic people here, with a great love of our
+country--we Spanish, half-bred republican heroes," he said bitterly,
+"and we love that country so well, Harry, that we are always murdering
+and enriching it with the blood of its best men.  It might be a glorious
+place, but man curses it, and we are always having republican struggles,
+and bloodshed, and misery.  We are continually having new presidents,
+here, my lad; and after being ruined three times, burned out twice, and
+saving my life by the skin of my teeth, the bright flowers and great
+green leaves seem to be powdered with ashes, and I'd gladly, any day,
+change this beautiful place, with its rich plantations, for fifty acres
+of land in one of the shires at home."
+
+"But don't you take rather a gloomy view of it all, Uncle?"  I said, as
+I looked at him curiously.
+
+But to my great discomfiture he burst out laughing, for he had read my
+thoughts exactly.
+
+"My liver is as sound as yours, Harry, my boy," he said; "and I don't
+believe that there's a heartier man within fifty miles.  No, my lad, I'm
+not jaundiced.  There's no real prosperity here.  The people are a lazy,
+loafing set, and never happy but when they are in hot water.  There's
+the old, proud hidalgo blood mixed up in their veins; they are too grand
+to work--too lazy to wash themselves.  There isn't a decent fellow in
+the neighbourhood, except one, and his name is Garcia--eh, Lill?" he
+said, laughing.
+
+Lilla's face crimsoned as she bent over her work, while a few minutes
+after she rose and whispered to Mrs Landell.
+
+"You must excuse me, Harry," said my aunt, rising.  "Lilla is unwell;
+the shock has been too much for her."
+
+The next moment I was alone with my uncle, who proceeded in the same
+bitter strain:
+
+"Yes, my lad, commerce is all nohow here--everything's sluggish, and I
+cannot see how matters are to mend.  I'm glad to see you--heartily glad
+you have come.  Stay with us a few months if you are determined upon a
+colonial life; see all you can of the country and judge for yourself;
+but Heaven forbid that I should counsel my sister's child to settle in
+such a revolutionary place!"
+
+I was not long in finding out the truth of my uncle's words.  The place
+was volcanic, and earthquakes of no uncommon occurrence; but Nature in
+the soil was not one half as bad as Nature in the human race--Spanish
+half-blood and Indian--with which she had peopled the region, for they
+were, to a man, stuffed with explosive material, which the spark of some
+speaker's language was always liable to explode.
+
+But I was delighted with the climate, in spite of the heat; and during
+the calm, cool evenings, when the moon was glancing through the trees,
+bright, pure, and silvery, again and again I thought of how happy I
+could be there but for one thing.
+
+That one thing was not the nature of the people nor their revolutionary
+outbursts, for I may as well own that commerce or property had little
+hold upon my thoughts until I found how necessary the latter was for my
+success.  My sole thought in those early days, and the one thing that
+troubled me, was the constant presence of my uncle's wealthy neighbour,
+Pablo Garcia.
+
+It was plain enough that he had been for months past a visitor, and that
+he had been looked upon as a suitor for Lilla's hand; but I could not
+discover whether she favoured him or no, for after meeting him a few
+times his very presence, with his calm, supercilious treatment of one
+whom he evidently hated from the bottom of his soul, was so galling to
+me, that upon his appearance I used to go out and ramble away for hours
+together, seeking the wilder wooded parts, and the precipitous spurs of
+the mountains, climbing higher and higher, till more than once in some
+lonely spot I came upon some trace of a bygone civilisation--ruined
+temple, or palace of grand proportions, but now overthrown and crumbling
+into dust, with the dense vegetation of the region springing up around,
+and in many places so covering it that it was only by accident that I
+discovered, in the darkened twilight of the leafy shade, column or
+mouldering wall, and then sat down to wonder and try and think out of
+the histories of the past who were the people that had left these traces
+of a former grandeur, and then over some carven stone light would spring
+to my understanding--a light that brought with it a thrill of hope.
+Then I would return, as night threatened to hide the track, back to my
+uncle's, to be treated coldly, as I thought, by Lilla, while more than
+once it seemed that my uncle gazed upon me in a troubled way.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN.
+
+TOM SPEAKS HIS MIND.
+
+A couple of months soon glided away--a time of mingled misery and
+pleasure.  At one time I was light-hearted and happy, at another
+low-spirited and depressed; for I could not see that there was the
+slightest prospect of my hopes ever bearing fruit.  I was growing
+nervous, too, about Garcia; not that I feared him, but his manner now
+betokened that he bore me ill-will of the most intense character.
+
+As for Lilla, the longer I was at the hacienda the more plain it became
+that she feared him, shuddering at times when he approached--tokens of
+dislike that made his eyes flash, and for which it was very evident that
+he blamed me.
+
+But his blame was unjust; he had credited me with having made known the
+cowardly part he had played on the river; but though my uncle and aunt
+were ignorant of it, the news reached Lilla's ears, the medium being Tom
+Bulk.
+
+Tom had settled down very comfortably at the hacienda, taking to smoking
+and hanging about the plantation sheds, and doing a little here or there
+as it pleased him, but none the less working very hard; and many a time
+I had come across him glistening with perspiration as he tugged at some
+heavy bag with all an Englishman's energy when all around were
+sluggishly looking on.  He studiously avoided the woods, though, save
+when he saw me off upon a ramble; and it was one day when I was standing
+by Lilla's side at an open window, previous to taking a long walk, that
+our attention was taken up by high words in the yard close at hand.
+
+That Tom was one of the actors was plain enough, for his words came
+loud, clear, and angry to where we stood; and it was evident that he was
+taking the part of one of the Indian girls, who was weeping, probably
+from blows inflicted by one of her countrymen, whose gallantry is not
+proverbial.
+
+"You red varmint," cried Tom fiercely, "I'll let you know what's what!
+We don't strike women in our country--no, not even if they hit us."
+
+Interested as I was, the recollection of a sharp slap I had heard at
+home would come to my memory.
+
+"And I tell you what, if you touch her again I'll make that face of
+yours a prettier colour than it is now."
+
+"Pray go and tell my father," whispered Lilla anxiously.  "Quarrels here
+are very serious sometimes, and end in loss of life."
+
+Crack!  There was the sound of a blow followed by a woman's shriek of
+pain.
+
+"Why, you cowardly hound!"  I heard Tom shout.  "You dare hit _her_,
+then--you who sneaked off along with your grand Spanish Don when the
+boat was upset, and left young miss to drown!  You're a brave one, you
+are, and then you all go and take the credit, when it was my Mas'r Harry
+who saved her.  Take that, you beggar, and that--and that!"
+
+Tom's words were accompanied by the sounds of heavy blows; and on
+leaping out of the window I came upon him, squaring away, and delivering
+no meanly-planted blows upon the chests and faces of a couple of
+Indians, while a woman crouched, trembling and weeping, and writhing
+with pain, upon the ground.
+
+"That's a settler for you anyhow!" said Tom, as he sent one of his
+adversaries staggering back for a few yards, to fall heavily, when the
+other retreated, but only for both to out with a knife each, and again
+come forward to the attack.
+
+But my appearance upon the scene stayed them, and they slunk scowling
+away.
+
+"I'll knock the wind out of some on 'em, Mas'r Harry, spite of their
+knives," cried Tom excitedly.  "I'll let 'em know how an Englishman
+serves them that knocks women about.  Hit her with a great thick stick,
+he did--cuss him!  I'll let him know!"
+
+"Be quiet, Tom!  Are you mad?"  I said, catching him by the collar, for
+he was squaring away at the Indians, who were a couple of dozen yards
+away.
+
+"What did he go knocking her about for?  Yah!  Mas'r Harry, they're a
+rotten lot out here, and the country's a thousand times too good for
+them!"
+
+By degrees I got Tom cooled down, and into the house, and on returning I
+found Lilla standing watching for me at the window, but only to gaze at
+me with a strange, troubled look, half pain, half pleasure, and before I
+could speak she had fled.
+
+But an hour had not passed before I came upon her again, speaking
+anxiously to Tom.  They did not see me approach, and as I was close up I
+was just in time to hear Tom exclaim:
+
+"But he did, Miss, and stuck to you when all the rest had got ashore--
+the Don and all."
+
+Lilla gave a faint shriek as I spoke; and then darting at me a look of
+reproach, she hurried away, leaving me excited and troubled; for she had
+learned a secret that I had intended should not come to her ears.
+
+"How dare you go chattering about like that?"  I cried fiercely to Tom,
+for I was anxious to have some one to blame.
+
+"Don't care, Mas'r Harry," he said sulkily.  "Miss Lilla asked me, and I
+never told her only the truth.  They are a cowardly set of hounds, the
+whole lot of 'em; and I'll take any couple of 'em, one down and t'other
+come on, with a hand tied behind me."
+
+"We shall have to go, Tom," I said bitterly.  "What with your brawls and
+the mischief you have made, this will be no place for us."
+
+I spoke with gloomy forebodings in my mind, for I could not but think
+that trouble was to be our lot.  Poor and without prospects, and with a
+rich and favoured rival, what was I to hope for?  Indeed I felt ready to
+despair.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," said Tom penitently, "'tain't so bad as that, is
+it?"
+
+"Bad!  Yes, Tom," I said gloomily, and I turned and left him.
+
+It was a day or two after.  I had only seen Lilla at meals, to find her
+shy and _distraite_.  She hardly seemed to notice me, but I had the
+satisfaction of seeing that Garcia fared no better.
+
+But he smiled pleasantly, evidently to conceal the rage that burned
+within him, and more than once there was a hateful glare in his eye that
+evidently boded no good to those who crossed his path; and it seemed as
+if I had not only crossed his path, but now stood right in his way.
+
+We had just finished the mid-day meal.  Garcia had been with us, and on
+Lilla rising he had followed her to the door; but she had turned from
+him with a look of contempt, when, white with passion, he had been
+unable to control himself, but dashed out of the place, muttering
+fiercely.
+
+My uncle had seen all, and his countenance lowered, but for a while he
+did not speak.  He walked to a closet, took out a cigar, and sat smoking
+till Mrs Landell had left the room, when, beckoning me to him, he
+pointed to a chair, and then, as soon as I was seated, he gave utterance
+to what was in his mind.
+
+"Harry, my lad," he said, "I am a plain, straightforward fellow, and I
+like frankness.  I'm going now to speak very plainly to you, for I'm not
+blind.  You've taken a fancy to little Lill."
+
+I rose, holding by the back of my chair, blushed, blundered, and then
+stood without a word.
+
+"I see I am right," he said coolly.  "But look here, Hal.  I can't call
+to mind a single dishonourable act committed by a member of either of
+the families from which you sprang.  Now listen to me: have you ever
+said a word--you know what I mean--to Lilla?"
+
+"Oh, no, Uncle!"  I exclaimed warmly.
+
+"Quite right, my lad--quite right, for it would not do.  You see, Hal,
+she has money in her own right, and you are not worth twopence.  The
+girl is in my care.  I hold her from her relations, as it were, in
+trust; and it seems to me that it would be like taking advantage of my
+position if I encouraged anything between her and a poor relative of my
+own.  You'll have to go away, Harry, unless you can make me a promise,
+and keep to it."
+
+"What am I to promise?"  I said gloomily; for he had ceased speaking;
+and I began to realise what going away meant.  "What am I to promise?"
+I said again.
+
+"Promise me, as a man of honour, that you will not in any way take
+advantage of your position here."
+
+"Is it likely," I said bitterly, "when I am not worth twopence, and
+there is some one else in the field?"
+
+"Don't be spiteful, lad, because things don't go as you wish.  We all
+have to bear crosses in our time.  But, as you say, there's some one
+else in the field.  Garcia is an old lover, and I am under obligations
+to him.  You must not in any way cross his path, Hal, for he is rich,
+and possesses a good deal of power over the Indians about here.  I
+should say, Hal, that in this lawless country that man's life would not
+be safe who stood between him and his wishes.  Don't offend him, Hal--
+don't offend him, Hal.  He's a good fellow, but, like all those
+half-bloods, very susceptible."
+
+"I'll promise you anything you like," I said gloomily, "but don't send
+me away.  Let me stay and do something so as not to be an encumbrance to
+you, but don't send me away."
+
+"No one wants to send you away, Hal," said my uncle kindly.  "Look about
+you and see the country; shoot and fish a little, too.  I need not say,
+beware of the caymen--the river swarms with them.  See all you can of
+the place, and then you'll have to try somewhere else.  Texas or one of
+the States--those are the places for a young fellow like you."
+
+I sighed to myself, for it seemed to me now that there was no place on
+earth bearable but the one where Lilla dwelt; and then, clapping me on
+the shoulder, my uncle rose and went out.
+
+I followed him at the end of a few minutes; and, so as to be alone, I
+wandered away from the house and heedlessly took one of the paths that
+led down to the river bank.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN.
+
+UNDER FASCINATION.
+
+It was very hot, but I did not notice it as I walked slowly and
+thoughtfully on.  The sun was kept from beating down upon me by the
+dense foliage, but there was a steamy heat arising that at another time
+I should have felt oppressive.  The country was so completely in a state
+of nature all around that half a mile from the hacienda one almost
+seemed to be traversing places where the foot of man had never trod.
+But nothing seemed then to take my attention, for I was forcing myself
+to remember that I was to think no more about Lilla; and at last I had
+worked myself round to believe that I should respect the promise given
+to my uncle, while I devoted myself to a project that had fixed itself
+in my mind--a project full of romance and imagination, one that might
+make me wealthy--in a position wherein I could laugh at Garcia's
+pretensions and boldly ask my uncle's consent, for I was hopeful of
+obtaining Lilla's.  I was poor now, but need not remain so.  Suppose by
+one grand stroke I could possess myself of the riches of a prince--how
+then?
+
+The thought of it all was so exciting that I strode on, rapt in the
+golden vision, till reason pointed out two obstacles: I might not
+succeed; and even if I did succeed, I might be too late and find that
+Garcia had won the prize we both had coveted.
+
+"I'll try, though," I muttered.
+
+And then I laughed bitterly as I thought of my uncle's warning.  I was
+not afraid of Garcia, for he was at heart, I knew, a coward; but until I
+was in a position to come forward I felt sadly that my duty was to avoid
+Lilla--to leave all to the future; for, with the chances of failure so
+strongly opposed to me, it would not have been fair to have asked her to
+wait for what might never come to pass; and then, with the recollection
+of my beggarly position taunting me, I told myself bitterly that I might
+as well go back home and turn soap-boiler, and not stay out there
+indulging in golden dreams.
+
+It was a scene almost of enchantment where I stood musing, but the
+beauties around had no charms for me.  I was too much engrossed with the
+thoughts of old readings respecting the region in which I then was.  I
+was recalling its history and the assertions of old writers respecting
+its wealth in gems and the precious metals.  I did not see that now and
+then a timid deer had gazed at me for a moment and then bounded away
+through the brake; neither that again and again a deadly cascabel had
+glided, worm-like, almost from beneath my feet, uttering a low, ominous
+hiss as it wriggled away through the tall grass.  Gorgeously-painted
+butterflies, grand in size, fluttered before me, to settle here and
+there upon some blossom bright as themselves, and then flit away again
+through the shadowy, golden-rayed forest arcades.  Gem-like
+humming-birds darted here and there, while hardly less bright parroquets
+of many a hue shrieked, whistled, and climbed in restless fashion
+around.  Once there was a heavy, scuffling noise, and a small alligator
+dashed away towards a creek; but I could see nothing but gold--gold that
+should make me rich and win for me Lilla's love--a love that I dared to
+hope was mine already, even though I was but a beggarly adventurer.
+
+Gold--always gold--everything was gilded; and through the golden haze
+that seemed to glow around me I saw a golden future of brightness, and
+happiness, and love.  I grew more and more excited with the thoughts
+that pressed upon me, and at last, with a sensation of triumph, I
+exclaimed aloud:
+
+"History shall be my divining-rod and the earth shall yield up her
+treasures!  I shall not be the first adventurer to the golden mines who
+has brought home treasures; only that, if I win, I shall also gain a
+treasure greater far than those of old, for Lilla will also be my
+prize."
+
+This was the kind of mental stilt-talking I indulged in that day, seeing
+only the golden side.  No doubt it seems very romantic and silly to the
+reader; but I have known young men, taken badly with that distemper
+called first love, just as romantic and excitable.  In fact, many of us
+as we grow older recall our sensations, acts, and deeds, felt and
+performed during that strange delirium, with something like a smile upon
+our lips, though at the time every reader will agree with me I was
+somewhat of a goose.
+
+I was romantic enough, and could only see the golden side; but there was
+a future before me such as I could not dream of--a reverse, terrible,
+thrilling, and enough, could I have penetrated the unknown, to have made
+me turn shuddering away, daring not, for the sake of others, to
+prosecute searches whose results would have been too terrible to
+contemplate.
+
+Rousing myself from my reverie, with my mind fully made up as to my
+future proceedings, I looked round, to find that I was but a very short
+distance from the hacienda, in a beautiful part of the forest that my
+uncle had as yet spared, but which he talked of, before long, clearing
+and adding to the plantation which it bounded.
+
+I walked on for a dozen yards, parting the undergrowth as I went,
+walking cautiously now, for I had suddenly awakened to the fact that
+there might be danger in every bush or tuft of luxuriant, reedy grass;
+but there was, I knew, a beaten track a little farther on which led to
+the plantation, through which I meant to return.
+
+And then, fifty yards through the dense vegetation, I came upon a
+creek--a mere ditch--leading to the river, half full of marshy growth,
+when, walking back a few yards for impetus, I ran from the bank, and was
+in the act of leaping the creek when every nerve seemed to thrill with a
+horrible sense of chilling dread, as beneath my feet there was a rushing
+rustling noise, mingled with the splashing of mud and water, the reedy
+grass bent and waved in different directions, and, though invisible to
+me, it was evident that some hideous beast--reptile, or whether serpent
+or cayman I could not tell--was retreating towards the river, perhaps
+only to turn upon me the next moment.
+
+The danger was not visible; but unseen perils are sometimes more
+dreadful than those we meet face to face, when the imagination does not
+magnify the horror.
+
+At any rate, with my heart beating heavily I alighted amongst the grass
+on the other side, dashed on, and a few minutes after was in the track,
+down which I turned, but only to stop spell-bound the next minute, as I
+reached a flowery opening across which lay the decaying huge trunk of a
+large fallen tree.
+
+The place was a dense thicket all around of bright-hued blossoms, with
+their attendant train of bird and gorgeous insect.  Huge trees threw
+their sheltering arms across, to break up the sun's rays into golden
+showers, which flecked and danced upon every verdant spot; but the great
+beauty of the scene which held me there was the sight of Lilla seated
+upon the fallen trunk, her little straw hat hanging from one
+muslin-covered arm by the knotted strings, and a little basket filled to
+overflowing with bright-hued flowers fallen at her feet.
+
+I could not move nor speak for a few minutes, and then I was hesitating
+as to what I should do: avoid every meeting such as this out of respect
+to my promise, or warn her that but a short distance back I had come
+upon some hidden danger.
+
+"She will laugh at me," I thought.  "She is so used to hear of the
+forest inhabitants; and besides, after all, I did not see anything; it
+may only have been some timid animal escaping.  I will go back another
+way."
+
+In spite of myself a sigh escaped me as I gazed at the graceful form;
+and then, as I leaned forward it seemed to me that her attitude was
+unnatural and strained--that she was gazing intently upwards, as if at
+something a short distance above her head.  I took a step forward--
+another and another, but she did not move; when, following the direction
+of her gaze, I found her eyes were fixed with a strange fascination at
+the great bough above her--a huge gnarled and knotted bough, with here
+and there a tuft of foliage upon it, while its great thick bark was
+tinted and shady with rich brown and umber mosses, and--
+
+"Good heavens!"  I ejaculated, and then I was speechless.  A sense of
+horror was constricting my heart.  I was, as it were, fixed to the
+ground where I stood, hardly able to breathe, for as I had gazed at the
+rich marking on the great knotted limb a strange shuddering vibration
+had passed through it--it was in motion for many feet along its thickest
+part, and the umber markings glistened; for they were upon the scaly
+skin of a huge serpent, lying in many a fold and convolution upon the
+mighty bough.
+
+What did it mean--what was going to happen?
+
+I could not tell; but a deadly sickness came over me--a cold clammy
+perspiration bedewed my limbs.  I could only see as through a mist, but
+plainly enough I could make out that fold was gliding over fold in a
+horrible lacing and enlacing of gigantic knots, till slowly the
+reptile's head was thrust forward, with a gentle waving motion, rising
+from amidst a tuft of leaves; and then, as the gliding of the folds
+continued, the head descended in a slow, waving, swinging fashion, foot
+after foot nearer and nearer to Lilla, a forked tongue flashing and
+playing about the frightful jaws, and the hideous eyes fascinating the
+poor girl, so that I saw her gradually moving towards it.
+
+Slowly, and ever rising and falling, the huge serpent's head was lowered
+foot after foot of its vast length while fold after fold was gliding
+over the bough, and all this while I stood fixed to the earth as in the
+nightmare of a horrible dream.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIXTEEN.
+
+WHAT FOLLOWED THE ESCAPE.
+
+I said at the end of the last chapter that it was like being in the
+nightmare of some horrible dream.  I repeat that assertion; for as I
+recall my sensations I see again the horrible swaying head playing
+gently up and down, nearer and nearer, the sun glistening on the
+burnished coils, while others were hidden, to have their presence
+revealed by the quivering of twig and trembling of leaf, as they passed
+fold over fold, the monstrous reptile playing, as it were, with its
+victim, and approaching in a slow leisurely manner; but it was with the
+sense that in an instant it could fling itself upon its prey with the
+speed, force, and certainty of a well-cast lasso.  It was the play of
+the cat tribe with prey; for I knew the mighty strength and elasticity
+of the coils--how they could dart, plunge, and then be rolled one upon
+the other round a helpless body in a hideous knot--how the knot would
+tighten till bones cracked and splintered, and the victim was reduced to
+a shapeless mass, ready to receive the horrible saliva of the monster
+previous to deglutition.
+
+I could only stand with tottering knees, parted lips, staring eyes, and
+painfully drawn breath, longing to engage in the unequal fight, or to,
+at least, make some noise to divert the horrible beast; but my mouth and
+throat were dry--I could not utter a sound.  I was numbed in body, but
+the mental anguish was fearful, for all activity seemed to have fled to
+the seat of thought and in imagination I saw all that was to follow.
+
+And all this time--a time whose duration seemed to me hours--Lilla did
+not move.  At first, while being drawn under the loathsome reptile's
+fascination, she had gradually leaned towards it, till, fixed of eye,
+she had stopped perfectly motionless, as inch after inch her intended
+murderer approached.
+
+I would gladly have closed my eyes, but I could not, any more than I
+could afford help.  And now, unwilling witness that I was, I saw that
+the moment of extreme horror was approaching, for the serpent had drawn
+its folds on to a portion of the branch free from foliage; the coils
+were bent as if ready for a spring, the head was drawn back, the jaws
+distended; and at last I gave utterance to a hoarse cry and sprang
+forward, the spell that had held me was broken, and the next instant
+Lilla was in my arms, just as I heard a rustle; then there was a rush,
+and I was dashed violently to the ground.
+
+But there were no coils round either of us, lashing us in a horrible
+embrace--no fangs were fixed in my shoulder; but lashing, darting, and
+whipping itself, as it were, in every direction, beating down tall grass
+and bushy growth, its horrible eyes flashing with pain and rage, the
+serpent was close at hand, while the next instant its coils were wrapt
+round a large jaguar, whose teeth and claws were fixed in the thickest
+part of the reptile, the creature holding on with all its might, at the
+same time that, cat-like in its every act, it tore and ripped away at
+its enemy's body with the great talons of its hinder paws.
+
+There was a fierce, savage, worrying growl, the snapping and rustling of
+tree and shrub, the lashing about of the serpent's body, as, now coiled
+round its assailant, now forced by agony to unwind, the two terrors of
+the South American forest continued their struggle.  Now they were
+half-hidden by the undergrowth, whose disturbance only showed the
+changes in the savage warfare; now they struggled into sight, and it was
+very evident that the serpent was being worsted in the encounter, the
+jaguar having in the first strokes of its powerfully-armed hind paws
+inflicted terrible wounds, which incapacitated the reptile from using
+its potent weapon--the crushing power of its folds.
+
+For a few minutes I could hardly believe in our escape from so horrible
+a peril; but, so far, we were undoubtedly safe, the tide of war now
+beginning, indeed, to roll away, it being evident that the jaguar was
+thoroughly worsting its enemy.  At last I saw the huge tail of the
+serpent rise above the long grass, to vibrate and quiver in the air,
+twisting as if the horrible beast were in extreme agony; then it
+disappeared, and I prepared to try and bear Lilla away, for it was plain
+that the long-continued struggle was bringing the combatants back
+towards where we crouched.
+
+But they only came near enough for me to catch, amidst the rapid
+evolutions, two or three glimpses of the jaguar's glistening, spotted
+coat, as he clung, still apparently unharmed, to his long lithe
+adversary, whose head was darting here, there, everywhere, in search of
+an avenue for escape.  Then, again, came a series of writhing
+contortions, as the serpent twined itself in its agony round the
+quadruped; and over and over, with the foliage crackling and snapping,
+they rolled, but ever now farther and farther away, till it was with a
+feeling of extreme thankfulness that I knelt there, holding the fainting
+girl in my arms, gazing eagerly in her pale face, and thinking of the
+fearful fate she had escaped.
+
+Her eyes unclosed the next moment, to gaze in mine with a wild horrified
+aspect, till, awaking fully to the fact that she was saved, she flung
+her arms tightly round my neck, clinging to me, and then buried her
+face, sobbing vehemently, in my bosom.
+
+Lilla had just raised her blushing face to mine, as she tried now,
+feebly, to free herself from my protecting arms; and then I started
+angrily up, for from close behind came the words:
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry, is that there the custom of the country?"
+
+"You impertinent dog, how dare you?"  I exclaimed angrily.  "What do you
+mean by spying there, and then asking such a question?"
+
+"Only wanted to know, Mas'r Harry; because if it is the custom it's all
+right; if it ain't the custom it's all wrong, and Master Landell and the
+Don, who are close behind, might think it queer."
+
+"We've just had a narrow escape from a most horrible death, Tom," I
+exclaimed hastily.  "Thank you for your warning."
+
+The next moment voices were audible.  There was the rustling of the
+foliage, and as Lilla stood pale and leaning heavily upon my arm, my
+uncle and Garcia came hastily into sight.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN.
+
+TROPHIES.
+
+I have seen some villainous-looking countenances in my time, but none
+more abhorrent of aspect than was that of Pablo Garcia, as, distorted
+with rage, he started on seeing Lilla resting half supported by me.  The
+handsome regularity of his features seemed then to have the effect of
+making the distortion more striking.  There was an angry frown, too,
+upon my uncle's face as he strode up; and, almost roughly taking Lilla
+from me, he exclaimed hoarsely:
+
+"Harry, after what I said I did not expect this."
+
+"It was quite by accident we met, Uncle.  Lilla has had a terrible
+shock," I exclaimed hastily.  "A hideous serpent--terrible conflict--"
+
+I stopped short, for there was a sneering grin of disbelief on Garcia's
+countenance, which made me want to dash my fist in his face, as he said:
+
+"Very terrible conflict--a very dragon attacking the maiden, and this
+new Saint George of England coming to her rescue.  I don't see any blood
+about."
+
+"I should like to make some come from his nose," muttered Tom.
+
+"What has happened?" said my uncle frowning; for he did not seem to like
+Garcia's allusion.
+
+Lilla spoke in faint trembling tones:
+
+"I was resting after gathering those flowers, when a rustling overhead
+took my attention, and--ah!--"
+
+She shuddered, turned pale, and covered her face with her hands, quite
+unable to proceed; when my uncle turned to me, and I explained what I
+had seen, in proof of which I turned to the beaten-down foliage, upon
+which lay thickly, in spite of Garcia's words, fast-drying spots and
+gouts of blood, which we traced right down to the river's bank, in a
+dense bed of reeds, where they ceased, and it was not thought advisable
+to search farther.
+
+"Let us get back, my child," said my uncle tenderly to Lilla.  "You must
+come alone into the woods no more."
+
+There was a troubled and meaning tone in my uncle's words, and more than
+once I caught his eye directed at me.  But directly after he moved off
+towards the hacienda, closely followed by Garcia, while I hung back
+undecided how to act; for I was suffering from a troubled conscience, as
+I thought of the promise I had so lately given.
+
+My reverie was interrupted by Tom, who had been standing unnoticed.
+
+"Did you see Muster Garshar, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "how he showed you
+the whole of his teeth, just like a mad dog going to bite?"
+
+"No, Tom; I did not take particular notice of him," I said.
+
+"Well, I did, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "and if you take my advice you'll
+look out; for they're a rum lot here, as you know.  They don't hit with
+the fist, only when that there fist has got an ugly-looking knife in it,
+sharp as a razor; and when they hit a poor fellow with it, and he dies
+afterwards, they don't call it murder--they call it fighting--a set of
+uncultivated, ignorant savages!  I only wish I had the teaching of them!
+But look here, Mas'r Harry, you'll take care, won't you?"
+
+"Why, Tom?"  I said dreamily.
+
+"Why, Mas'r Harry?  Why? because Muster Garshar don't like you--not a
+bit.  That's all."
+
+I shrugged my shoulders.
+
+"Ah! you may hyste your shoulders till you skretches your ears with
+them, Mas'r Harry; but that don't make no better of it.  I promised your
+mother as I'd take care of you and stick to you; but how am I to do that
+if you get yourself spoiled somehow or other?  But, say, Mas'r Harry,
+was it such a werry big un?"
+
+"Was what a very big one?"  I said wonderingly.
+
+"Why, the sarpint--it might have been a sea-sarpint, for nobody seemed
+to believe in it."
+
+"Yes," I said moodily, "an enormous beast."
+
+"And he got it pretty hot from the tiger thing?"
+
+"You saw the blood about, and now hold your tongue."
+
+"But I ain't done yet, Mas'r Harry," said Tom eagerly.  "That there Don
+wouldn't believe in it, and we knowed that it went into that brake.
+What do you say to going up to the house, getting the guns, and then
+shooting the beast and skinning him; so as to show them that English
+lads don't go bouncing and swelling about without they've got something
+to bounce and swell about?"
+
+There was something in Tom's project that interested me, and I turned to
+him with eagerness.  Adventure--something to prove that I had been no
+boaster, something to divert the current of my thoughts; it was the very
+thing, but I said gloomily the next minute:
+
+"We should be too late, Tom; the beast must have taken to the river."
+
+"All wounded beasts make to the water, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "but we
+don't know that we should be too late.  What I say is--Let's try."
+
+"Come along then," I cried.
+
+We walked up to the hacienda, encountering Garcia on the portal, ready
+to bestow upon us both a sneering grin as we again issued forth, each
+carrying a double gun loaded with buck-shot.
+
+I don't think we, either of us, stopped to consider whether it was
+prudent to run the risk before us, with a very problematic chance of
+success; but hurrying back regardless of the sun, we soon stood once
+more by the fallen tree, and began to follow the beaten track left by
+the contending enemies till we reached the great brake by the
+river-side, when for the first time we turned and looked at each other.
+
+"Oh! it's all right, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "and if he's in here we'll
+soon rouse him out."  For it was evident that he had interpreted the
+doubt that had found a home in my mind.
+
+"You think it will be here still?"  I said.
+
+"Sartain, Mas'r Harry; and--hist! don't speak above a whisper.  He's in
+there, sure enough; for look yonder at those monkeys, they ain't
+chattering and swinging about there for nothing."
+
+In effect a family of monkeys were aloft howling and making a deafening
+din, and I could not help thinking with Tom that it meant the presence
+of enemies.
+
+"Look out!"  I shouted the next minute to Tom; for a huge crocodile that
+we had passed unseen, sleeping amongst the dank herbage, had apparently
+awakened to the belief that we were trying to cut off its retreat and
+charging down straight at Tom in order to reach the river, it was only
+by a grand display of activity that might have been learned of the
+monkeys above us that he avoided the onslaught, and the next minute the
+hideous reptile had disappeared from sight; but we could hear its
+rustling onward progress, followed by a heavy splash, one or two ominous
+growls, and the increased activity of the monkeys, showing that our
+ideas with respect to these latter were not without basis.
+
+"I tell you what, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, as he stood mopping the
+perspiration from his face, "them ugly beasts have got a spite against
+me, I know they have; and if I'm lost, mind this, I'm swallowed down by
+one of them crocks, I know I am, so mind that; and if you do go home
+without me tell Sally Smith that I was swallowed by a crockeydile, and
+all for love of she.  Now, Mas'r Harry, I'm ready if you are?  Let's
+both keep together, tread softly, and take good steady aim before we
+fire; for this ain't like putting a handful of oats in the snow in our
+yard and then shooting at cock-sparrers.  If we hit what we've come
+after, mind 'twill be something to put in the bag!"
+
+I was now as excited as Tom, and together we stepped slowly on through
+the dense brake, parting the heavy growth with the barrels of our guns
+as we trod lightly over the swampy ground, which sent up a hot,
+stifling, steamy exhalation.
+
+Yard after yard we pressed on, watchful ever; but though the track was
+plain enough, the elastic water grasses had sprung back so as to
+thoroughly impede our view, and we knew that at any moment we might be
+ready to plant our feet upon the wounded monster that we sought.
+
+Twice over little alligators went scuttling from beneath our feet, at
+the last time drawing forth an ejaculation from Tom, and then we stopped
+short with our guns at our shoulders; for Tom's utterance was followed
+by a warning shriek from the monkeys, and then, as that ceased, came a
+low, fierce, snarling growl from apparently just in front.
+
+"What shall we do?"  I thought.
+
+For a moment I felt disposed to try and get round some other way, but
+the slightest movement now was sufficient to bring forth a growl from
+our invisible enemy; and it was very plain that we had tracked the
+jaguar to his lair while the boa had escaped.
+
+To have retreated would have been to bring it down upon us; so after a
+glance at Tom's resolute face I made a sign and we took a step in
+advance.
+
+Only one; we had time for no more, for with a savage yell the jaguar
+bounded right at Tom from the opening; we just obtained a glimpse of it,
+and it was like firing at a streak of something brown passing rapidly
+through the air, but fire I did, both barrels almost simultaneously; and
+the next moment Tom was knocked down and the jaguar had disappeared
+amongst the reeds we had but just passed.
+
+"Are you hurt, Tom?"  I cried anxiously, as I stooped to secure his
+undischarged gun.
+
+"Hurt!" he exclaimed angrily; "of course I am!  Just as if you could
+have one of them great cats fly at you and knock you over without being
+hurt!  But I ain't killed, Mas'r Harry," he said, rising and shaking
+himself.  "`Them as is born to be hanged won't never be drowned,' and
+them as is born to be swallowed by crocks won't never be torn to pieces
+by wild cats.  Look out, Mas'r Harry!  Give it him again!"
+
+At that moment, snarling and lashing its tail from side to side as it
+showed us its white teeth, the jaguar now crept back, cat-like, on its
+belly, as if about to spring, when, with the best aim I could, I gave it
+both barrels of Tom's gun, and with a convulsive bound the brute rolled
+over, dead.
+
+"That's hotter than the country, Mas'r Harry!" said Tom.  "But we killed
+him, anyhow; so load up.  But, my!  Mas'r Harry, what a beauty!  And did
+you see when he showed his teeth?--he was the very image of the Don!"
+
+I did not reply to Tom's remarks; but as I reloaded I could not help
+admiring the glossy, spotted coat of the great beast I had just slain--a
+brute whose activity and power must have been immense.
+
+But we had not performed the task we had come to complete.  This was
+something upon which I had not counted; and now, though quite satisfied
+in my own mind that the serpent had escaped, we left our conquered
+assailant and once more began cautiously to pursue the track with guns
+pointed in advance, but without the expectation of a fresh assault,
+when, as if determined to be first this time, Tom suddenly fired at an
+upraised, threatening head, and it fell upon the monstrous, helpless,
+writhing coils of the immense serpent.
+
+For it was evident that here the reptile had become too exhausted to
+continue its retreat, and Tom had administered the _coup de grace_.
+
+It was almost an unnecessary shot, for the jaguar had terribly mangled
+the serpent, which was half-torn and bitten through in one place where
+it had been first seized; but even now I felt a strong desire to fire
+again, as I saw a hideous coil rise slowly and then fall motionless,
+while for the first time the monstrous proportions of the creature
+became apparent.
+
+"Don't stir, Mas'r Harry!" cried Tom triumphantly.  "Keep watch over
+'em, or some one else will swear as he did it.  I'll be back in less
+than half an hour."
+
+Then, before I could utter a word of remonstrance, Tom had dashed off,
+leaving me to my loathsome wardership.  But not for long; he was soon
+back with four Indians, giving his orders lustily, and we stood and
+looked on while they skinned the trophies.
+
+"Perhaps they'll believe you now, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "We'll take
+the skins up in triumph--that we will!  But who'd ever have thought of
+my coming out here to shoot adders a hundred foot long?"
+
+"Say five hundred, Tom," I said laughing.
+
+"Well, ain't he, Mas'r Harry?" cried Tom innocently.
+
+For from the effect of his elation it is probable that his eyes
+magnified, though, upon the skin being stretched out and measured, it
+proved to be exactly twenty feet three inches in length, while the
+reptile's girth was greater than the thigh of a stout, well-built man.
+
+But at last, with our trophies borne in front, we made our way back to
+the hacienda, the Indians shouting, and the whole of the workpeople
+turning out to welcome us.  But though my uncle expressed pleasure, and
+took the first opportunity of telling me that he had never for an
+instant doubted my word, it was plain enough that he was constrained in
+his manner; while as to Pablo Garcia, I believe that a blow would not
+have given him greater offence than did this proof which I forced upon
+him of the truth of my assertions.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHTEEN.
+
+GOLDEN DREAMS.
+
+I saw Lilla but once alone, and then the encounter was not of my
+seeking.  She came up to me, though, with a sweet, sad expression in her
+face and a trusting look in her eyes that made my heart bound, as she
+laid her hands in mine and thanked me for what she called my gallantry;
+and I was so taken up by her words that I hardly noticed the scowl
+Garcia gave as he came in.  In fact, just then my heart felt so large
+that in my joy I could have shaken hands with him so warmly that I
+should have made the bones of that fishy fin of his crack again.
+
+But there was no handshaking: Garcia walking to the window and lighting
+a cigar, while Lilla hurried from the room, as was now her custom when
+Garcia came.
+
+The first flush of joy passed and I was alone with the half-breed, to
+feel how impossible any friendly feeling was between us; and seeing that
+he was disposed to do nothing but stare at me in a half-sneering,
+half-scowling fashion, I strolled out, paying no heed to the burning sun
+as I made for the woods, where the trees screened me; and then on and on
+I went, mile after mile, through the hot steamy twilight, amidst giants
+of vegetation hoary with moss.  Beast or reptile, harmless or noxious,
+troubled me little now, for I was in pursuit of the golden idol of my
+thoughts, winning it from its concealment, and then, with everything
+around gilded by its lustre, living in a future that was all happiness
+and joy.
+
+But I was not always dreaming.  At times I searched eagerly in places
+that I thought likely to be the homes of buried Peruvian treasure;
+without avail, though, for I had no guide--nothing but tradition and the
+misty phantoms of bygone readings.
+
+To the people at the hacienda my wanderings must have seemed absurd, for
+though I took my gun I never brought anything back.  This day game was
+in abundance, but I did not heed it--only wandered on till I came to a
+rugged part of the forest far up the mountain-side, and seated myself on
+a lump of moss-grown rock in a gloomy, shady spot, tired and discouraged
+by the thought that I was pursuing a phantom.
+
+What should I do, then?  I asked myself.  Go, as my uncle advised, to
+Texas?  That meant separation; and yet I knew that I could not stay,
+and, in spite of all my golden hopes, the future looked very black to
+me.  I kept putting it off, but it would come.  I must look the
+difficulty in the face--the end must arrive; and I laughed bitterly as I
+thought of my prospect--even if such treasures as I had heard of did
+exist--of finding either of them in the vast wilds spread for hundreds
+of miles around.
+
+My meditations were interrupted by the sharp crackle made by a dry twig
+trampled upon by a foot; there was a rustling noise close behind me, and
+as I turned I became aware of a face peering out at me from a dense bank
+of creepers, as a voice whispered:
+
+"Is your gun loaded, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"You here, Tom!"  I exclaimed.
+
+"Course I am!" said Tom indignantly.  "What else did I come out here for
+if it wasn't to take care of you?  And a nice game you're carrying on--
+playing bo-peep with a fellow!  Here you are one minute, and I says to
+myself, `He won't go out this morning.'  Next moment I look round, and
+you're gone!  But this here sort of thing won't do, sir!  If you're
+going on like this I shall give notice to leave, or else I shall never
+get back alive."
+
+"Why not?"  I said, laughing at his anxious face.
+
+"'Cause of these here rambling ways of yours, sir."
+
+"And if I take care, pray what danger is there in them, Tom?"
+
+"Care--care!" echoed Tom.  "Why, that's what you don't take, sir.  I'm
+`Care,' and you leave me at home.  You don't say, `Come and look after
+me, Tom,' but go on trusting to yourself, while all the time you're like
+some one in a dream."
+
+"But what is there to be afraid of, Tom?"
+
+"Sarpints, sir!"
+
+"Pooh, Tom!  We can shoot them, eh?--even if they are a hundred feet
+long!  Well, what else?"
+
+Tom grinned before he spoke.
+
+"Jaggers, sir!"
+
+"Seldom out except of a night, Tom."
+
+"Fevers, sir!"
+
+"Only in the low river-side parts, Tom.  We're hundreds of feet above
+the river here."
+
+"Snakes in the grass, sir!"
+
+"Pooh, Tom!  They always glide off when they hear one coming."
+
+"Not my sort, Mas'r Harry," said Tom in an anxious whisper.  "They're a
+dangerous sort, with a kind of captain, and he's a half-breed.  If you
+will have it, and won't listen to reason, you must.  Mas'r Harry,
+there's snakes in the grass--Indian-looking chaps who watch your every
+step, sir.  You haven't thought it; but I've always been on the
+look-out, and as they've watched you, I've watched them.  But they got
+behind me to-day, Mas'r Harry, and saw me; and I don't know what to
+think--whether Muster Garcia has sent 'em, or whether they think you are
+looking for anything of theirs.  You don't think it, Mas'r Harry, but at
+this very minute they're busy at work watching us."
+
+I started slightly at one of his remarks, but passed it off lightly.
+
+"Pooh, Tom!"  I said.  "Who's dreaming now?"
+
+"Not me, Mas'r Harry.  I was never so wide awake in my life.  I tell
+you, sir, I've seen you poking and stirring up amongst the sticks and
+stones in all sorts of places, just as if you was looking for some old
+woman's buried crock of crooked sixpences; and as soon as you've been
+gone these Indian chaps have come and looked, and stroked all the leaves
+and moss straight again.  You're after something, Mas'r Harry, and
+they're after something; but I can't quite see through any of you yet.
+Wants a good, stout, double-wicked six held the other side, and then I
+could read you both like a book."
+
+"Nonsense, Tom--nonsense!"  I cried; though I felt troubled, and a vague
+sense of uneasiness seemed to come over me.
+
+"P'r'aps it is nonsense, Mas'r Harry--perhaps it ain't.  But this here
+ain't Old England; so don't you get thinking as there's a policeman
+round every corner to come and help you, because there ain't, no more
+than there's a public-house round the corner to get half a pint when a
+fellow's tongue's dried up to his roof.  So now let's understand one
+another, Mas'r Harry.  You've got to keep close up to the house."
+
+"Nonsense!"  I exclaimed.  "What good would that do?  Look here, Tom, my
+good fellow: I know you are faithful and true-hearted, but you have been
+following me about till you have found a mare's nest and seen an enemy
+in every Indian.  You must learn to keep your place, Tom, and not to
+interfere."
+
+Tom did not answer--he only looked sulky.  Then, spitting in his hands,
+he rubbed them together, crawled out of the bush, stood up, let his gun
+fall into the hollow of his arm, and then thrusting his hands into his
+pockets, stood looking at me, as if prepared for the worst.
+
+"Going any farther, Mas'r Harry?" he said as I rose.
+
+"Yes," I said, "I'm going up this gorge."
+
+Then with Tom closely following, I climbed on till we were in a vast
+rift, whose sides were one mass of beautiful verdure spangled with
+bright blossoms.  High overhead, towering up and up, were the mountains,
+whose snow-capped summits glistened and flashed in the sun, while the
+ridges and ravines were either glittering and gorgeous or shadowy and of
+a deep, rich purple, fading into the blackness of night.
+
+I stopped gazing around at the platform above platform of rock rising
+above me, and thought of what a magnificent site one of the flat
+table-lands would make for a town, little thinking that once a rich city
+had flourished there.  Even Tom seemed attracted by the beauty of the
+scene, for he stood gazing about till, seeing my intent, he came close
+behind me again, and together, with the traveller's love of treading the
+fresh and untried soil, we pressed on, climbing over loose fragments of
+rock, peering into the stream that bubbled musically down the bottom of
+the gorge, wending our way through the high growth of long tangled
+grass, till the gorge seemed to plunge into darkness, a huge eminence
+blocking the way, in whose face appeared a low, broad archway, forming
+the entrance to a tunnel, leading who could tell where?
+
+Any attempt to follow another track was vain, as I soon perceived; for,
+as I saw, the gorge seemed to be continued beneath the archway, while
+right and left the rock was precipitous beyond the possibility of
+climbing even to the shelves, where ancient trees had securely rooted
+themselves in the sparse soil, to hang over and lend their gloom to the
+sombre scene.
+
+But in spite of its mystery there was a something attractive in the vast
+cavern, from which it now became evident the little river sprang; for it
+ran trickling out beneath the rocks we clambered over, till we stood
+gazing in towards the shadowy depth, listening to strange echoes of a
+murmuring rising and falling sound that dominated all the faint whispers
+that escaped, as it were, from time to time to the light of day.
+
+"What do you think of this, Tom?"  I said, after vainly trying to see
+the cavern's extent.
+
+"Think, Mas'r Harry?  Why, it looks to me like the front door to
+Bogyland.  But do let's get back, sir; for I was never so hungry before
+in my life.  I say stop, Mas'r Harry--what are you a-going to do?"
+
+"Do!  Why, go in and explore the place, to be sure, Tom," I cried,
+beginning to climb the rocky barrier that barred the way into the
+cavern.
+
+"No, I say, pray don't, Mas'r Harry!" cried Tom dolefully.  "I ain't
+afraid in the light, when you can see what you are doing, but I can't
+stand the dark, nohow.  Don't go, Mas'r Harry.  Think of what your poor
+mother would say."
+
+"Hold your tongue, will you, you great calf!"  I exclaimed angrily.
+
+For an intense desire seemed to come over me to explore this dim,
+shadowy region.  For what might we not find there treasured?  It might
+be the ante-chamber to some rich, forgotten mine--one of the natural
+storehouses from which the old Peruvians had been used to extract their
+vast treasures.  There were riches inexhaustible in the bowels of the
+earth, I knew, and if this were one of the gates by which they could be
+reached, held back from causes induced by cowardice I would not be--I
+had too great a prize to win.
+
+But before I had crossed this natural barrier to the entrance, reason
+told me that I must have light, and provision, and strength for the
+undertaking; and at that time I had neither.  There was nothing for it
+then but to listen to the voice of reason, as personified by Tom; and
+with a sigh I climbed back just as he was going to join me.
+
+I saw plainly enough that it must be nightfall before we could reach
+home; and, getting free of the rocks, I was musing, and wondering
+whether, after all, I had hit upon a discovery, when Tom whispered to
+me, with averted head, to look to the right under the trees.
+
+I did so, and became aware of a shadowy figure slinking off amongst the
+bushes, but I took little heed of it then, trudging on as fast as the
+nature of the ground would allow; and at last, thoroughly worn out in
+body, but with my imagination heated, I reached the hacienda.
+
+That evening, when I was alone with my uncle, I mentioned my discovery,
+and asked him if ever the cavern had been explored.
+
+"Never that I am aware of, Harry," he said quietly; "and I don't think
+it would profit much the explorer.  I have heard of the cave; it is a
+sort of sanctified place amongst the Indians, who people it with ghosts
+and goblins, such as they know how to invent.  Let me see, what do they
+call the place in their barbarous tongue?  Ah!  I remember now--
+Tehutlan.  I had forgotten its very existence.  One of the old Peruvian
+gods used to live there in olden times, I believe, as a sort of dragon
+to watch over the hidden treasures of the earth.  You had better search
+there and bring some of them out, or catch the dragon himself; he would
+make your fortune as an exhibitor in New York."
+
+"And you think, Uncle, it has never been explored?"  I said, without
+replying to his last remark.
+
+"My dear boy, for goodness' sake give up dreaming and take to reality,"
+he said pettishly.  "Explored?  Yes.  I remember how they say the
+Spaniards explored it, and butchered a lot of the poor Peruvians there
+like so many sheep, but they found nothing.  Don't think about
+treasure-seeking, Hal--it's a mistake; fortunes have to be made by toil
+and scheming, not by haphazard proceedings; but all the same I must
+say," he added musingly, "they do tell of the golden ornaments and
+vessels of the sun-worship hidden by the poor conquered people ages ago
+to preserve them from their greedy conquerors.  Their places are known
+even now, they say, having been handed down from father to son."
+
+"But did you ever search?"  I said eagerly.
+
+"Who?  I?  Pooh!  Nonsense, Hal!  My idea always was that gold was to be
+grown, not searched for; but after all, I might just as well have gone
+upon a harum-scarum gold-hunt as have sunk my few poor hundreds here."
+
+The conversation was directly changed, for Garcia came in to take his
+evening cigar with the family, looking the while dark and scowling; but
+it had little effect upon me, for my thoughts were running upon the dim,
+mysterious cavern, with its echoes and shadows; and the more I thought,
+the more it seemed possible that a natural or an artificial discovery
+might there be made.  By artificial, I meant the finding of a buried
+treasure.  With the old profusion of gold in the land there must have
+been some rich mines.  Why might not this be one of them?
+
+"Anyhow, I have nothing to lose," I said to myself; and at last I
+retired to rest, excited with the thoughts of Lilla and the riches I
+might find--the consequence being that I lay awake half the night,
+forming all sorts of impossible schemes; but above all determining that,
+come what might, I would explore the great cavern of Tehutlan--_if_.  If
+what?  If I could find it again.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINETEEN.
+
+BEGINNING TO "BURN."
+
+The sun was rising and sending his golden arrows darting through the
+thick mist which hung over the plantation, as I went out into the
+court-yard, to find all still and peaceful, for work had not yet
+commenced.
+
+I had taken the precaution of laying in a good supply of provisions,
+which I carried in a wallet in company with flint and steel, matches,
+and several candles; for, instead of the morning light making my project
+seem absurd, I had grown warmer upon the subject, and come to the
+determination that if buried treasures had lain in the earth all these
+ages I might as well become the owner of one as for it to lie there
+another century, waiting some less scrupulous searcher.
+
+The night had not been passed without quiet thought, and I had come to
+the conclusion that if so much gold had been used for the embellishment
+of the various temples, and that gold had been hastily torn down and
+hidden, it would most probably be in the vicinity of a ruined temple.
+
+But at this present time I was red-hot for exploring the cavern, which
+did not fit with my common-sense argument, without it should prove that
+there had once existed a temple somewhere on one of the platforms at the
+side of the gorge, when, if that should be the case, I felt sure that I
+had hit upon the right place.
+
+What, then, was my first proceeding?
+
+Evidently to search the sides of the ravine for traces of some ancient
+building.
+
+Tom's words on the previous day had not been without effect.  It was
+quite possible that I was watched, either by some spy of Garcia's, or,
+it might be, by some suspicious Indians who had seen me searching about,
+perhaps, for aught I could tell, close by one of the buried treasures,
+of whose existence they were aware.
+
+What a thought that was!--it sent a thrill through me, and roused me to
+fresh energy and determination.
+
+Under the circumstances, and granting that I had been watched--the
+figure I had seen corroborating Tom's words--it was evidently my policy
+to get away unseen; and to achieve this I had risen thus early, swung on
+my wallet, and, armed with my gun, a hunting-knife, and a long iron rod,
+I walked softly round the house, but only to have my nostrils saluted by
+the fumes of tobacco, and the next instant I was face to face with Tom
+Bulk, leaning against a post and smoking.
+
+"Startin' so soon, Mas'r Harry!" he said quietly.  "I thought you'd be
+in good time this morning."
+
+Then, paying not the slightest heed to my discontented looks, he knocked
+the ashes out of his pipe, shook himself together, and prepared to
+follow me.
+
+"But I don't want you with me, Tom," I said.
+
+"Dessay not, Mas'r Harry; but I'm a-coming all the same, and got my gun
+cleaned up ready."
+
+I knew it was useless to complain--for Tom had already given me one or
+two samples of how obstinate he could turn--so I made the best of it;
+and, knowing that he was as trustworthy as man could be, I trudged on
+with him close behind, hour after hour, till, after several wanderings
+wide of the wished-for spot, we hit upon a little clear, cold, babbling
+stream.
+
+"I'll bet tuppence that comes out of that big hole," said Tom eagerly.
+
+The same thought had occurred to me; and now, just as I had given up all
+hope of finding the gorge that day, here was the silver clue that should
+lead us straight to its entrance.
+
+The stream led us, as we had expected, right to the mouth of the gorge--
+that is, to where the rocks, which had heretofore been only a gentle
+slope clothed with abundant vegetation, suddenly contracted, became
+precipitous, and broken up into patches of rich fertility and sterile
+grandeur.
+
+But now these charms were displayed in vain; for the gorge being
+reached, I prepared to examine carefully its sides, and accordingly
+began to climb.
+
+"Thought you meant the big hole, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom, gazing uneasily
+about, and evidently seeing an enemy in every lump of rock or trunk of
+tree.
+
+"Up here, Tom, first," I said.
+
+He followed me sturdily, without a word, up, and up, and up, climbing
+over the precipitous sides, with tough root or fibrous vine lending us
+their aid, till, breathless, we stopped to gaze round or down into the
+rich ravine below.
+
+Platform after platform I reached, and then peered about amongst the
+dense growth in search of some trace of masonry; but though again and
+again the blocks of stone wore the appearance of having been piled
+together, I could find nothing definite--nothing but that ever-recurring
+dense foliage creeping over and hiding everything, till we had panted up
+another hundred feet, where a much larger table-land or platform
+extended before us.
+
+My heart beat painfully now; for, judging from appearances, it seemed
+that if ever temple had looked down upon the beautiful little vale, this
+must have been the spot where it was piled.  The cavern was sacred to a
+god; there must, then, have been some temple or place of sacrifice near
+at hand, it seemed, and I longed to begin investigating; but only to
+seat myself upon a mossy block, dreading the search lest it should prove
+unfruitful, and so dash my golden visionary thoughts.  But at length I
+was about to commence, when a throb of joy sent the blood coursing
+through my veins, for Tom said, in his dry ill-tempered way:
+
+"Been some building going on here some time or another, Mas'r Harry."
+
+I started to my feet then, to find that the block I had used for my seat
+had once been squared for building, and on peering about, there, in
+every direction, amongst creeper, moss, and vine, lay fragments of some
+mighty temple.  Some of the blocks were crumbling away; some square and
+fresh as if lately cut; and many of a size that was gigantic, and
+excited wonder as to how they could have been moved.
+
+I was right, then.  Here had once been a grand temple; and if its
+treasures had been hidden by the ancient priests of the place, where so
+likely a concealment as the mysterious cave, whose gloomy entrance I
+could just distinguish far-off below us?  The building must once have
+been grand, for every step revealed new traces, with the vegetable world
+completing the ruin commenced by man: mosses eating away, roots forcing
+themselves amongst interstices, and moving with mighty force stupendous
+blocks from their ancient sites.
+
+"Yes, this was the temple.  I was right so far," I exclaimed to myself.
+"Now, then, for the treasure!  This way, Tom!"  I exclaimed, turning to
+descend, eager now, and excited.
+
+But the descent was steep at times, even perilous, though I heeded it
+not; and in less than half an hour we should have reached the stream
+meandering through the rugged bottom of the ravine, had not Tom, who was
+always on the look-out for danger, suddenly dragged me down into the
+shelter of a mossy boulder, and, in reply to my inquiring look,
+contented himself with pointing a little below us to the left, when,
+following the direction of his arm, it seemed to me that my secret
+starting that morning had been in vain.  The golden treasure, if it
+existed, appeared about to be snatched from my grasp--my knowledge was
+about to be met by cunning, perhaps force.  We were watched.  Of that
+there was no doubt, and my heart sank with bitter disappointment; for
+there, where Tom pointed, plainly to be seen peering at us from a clump
+of verdure, was a pair of sharp bright eyes, their owner being carefully
+hidden from view.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY.
+
+IN SHADOWY LAND.
+
+For quite a quarter of an hour we remained motionless--the watcher and
+the watched--Tom and I both well armed, and involuntarily our guns were
+pointed at the eyes; but the position was not one which justified
+firing.  The ravine was as free to the owner of those eyes as to
+ourselves, and, after all, we had no proof that this was an enemy.
+
+I was in doubt as to our next proceeding, and had just come to the
+conclusion that our most sensible plan would be to turn back without
+going near the cavern at all, and so try to throw the enemy off the
+scent, for I felt certain that whether I discovered a treasure or no, I
+was on the right track, when Tom whispered eagerly to me:
+
+"Let's show him that we know how to use our guns, Mas'r Harry.  We won't
+shoot him, but only give him a start.  Look at that: there's a
+poll-parrot--two of 'em--settled in the tree above him!  It's a long
+shot, but I think I could bring one down; so here goes!"
+
+Tom levelled his piece and the next instant would have fired, when the
+parroquets began chattering, screaming, and fighting together,
+fluttering down towards the bushes which concealed our watcher.  Then
+there was a rush, a crashing of the undergrowth, and the owner of the
+eyes--a good-sized deer--bounded into sight for an instant, and then
+disappeared in a series of spring leaps, which soon took it out of sight
+in the dense growth.
+
+"I _am_, blessed!" exclaimed Tom, in accents of the most profound
+disgust.  "If I'd known, wouldn't I have fired, that's all!  Had some
+venison to take back, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"I'm very glad you did not, Tom," I said.
+
+For I felt how the report of a gun would have published our whereabouts,
+if there really were any lurkers near--a thing that I must say I now
+thought very probable, since the fact of there being a treasure in the
+cave, held sacred by the Indians, would, as a matter of course, render
+them very jealous of intruders.
+
+"Where for now, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom.
+
+"The cavern, Tom," I said.
+
+Finishing our descent we were not long in reaching the rocky barrier,
+evidently piled by Nature at the entrance of the vast frowning arch.
+
+We stopped and looked around suspiciously; but the gorge was silent as
+the grave--not a leaf stirred; there was neither the hum of insect nor
+the note of bird.  Heat--glowing heat--reflected from the rocks, already
+not to be touched without pain--and silence.
+
+"Going in, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom.
+
+"Of course," I replied.
+
+"Very good, Mas'r Harry; if you will, you will.  But if we get lost, and
+then find ourselves right away down in no-man's land, don't you go and
+say it's my fault."
+
+I was in no mood to reply, and clambering up the hot rocks, with little
+glancing lizards and beetles rushing away at every step, we soon stood
+gazing in at the gloomy chamber, our eyes, unaccustomed to the gloom,
+penetrating but a few yards at a time, so that had there been a host of
+enemies within, they would have been unseen.
+
+"Now, Tom!"  I said excitedly, as together we climbed down into the
+shade, to feel the cool and pleasant change from broiling heat to what
+was, comparatively, a very low temperature.  "Now, Tom, we are going to
+explore one of the wonders of the world!"
+
+"Humph!" ejaculated Tom, who did not look at all pleased; "it's very
+big, and large, and cool.  But say, Mas'r Harry," he exclaimed,
+brightening up, "it wouldn't make half a bad place for keeping tallers!
+Yah! what's that?"
+
+"Only a bird," I said, as with a rush a couple of large birds had flown
+close by us, evidently alarmed at our visit to their home.  "That's a
+good sign, Tom, and shows that you need not fancy there's an enemy
+behind every block of stone.  If anyone was within those birds would not
+be there."
+
+Tom grunted, and then, as if to show his unbelief, cocked both barrels
+of his gun, as, with eyes each moment growing more familiar with the
+gloom, we walked slowly forward into the darkness ahead--slowly, for the
+floor was rugged in places with fragments from the roof, and stalagmite.
+The roof was about fifty feet above our heads, and the span of the low
+corrugated arch, I should say, a hundred more than that.  The stream was
+rippling noisily along, threading its way amongst the massive blocks of
+stone, murmuring musically over pebbles and sand.  Now our way was wet
+and slimy, and then again rugged and dry, till, having penetrated some
+little distance with every precaution, we turned round to look back at
+the entrance, to see as pretty a picture as ever I gazed upon in my
+life.  We could now see plainly the nature of the roof, hung with
+beautiful stalactites of many graceful forms, giving to the great arch
+the appearance of some grand specimen of Gothic tracery, through which
+we looked upon the ravine lit up by the outer sunshine, with its green,
+and gold, and blushing floral hues.  It was a scene to be remembered for
+ever; but the gold in my thoughts seemed more glorious, and I turned
+from it without a sigh.
+
+Another dozen yards and a curve in the cave hid the entrance from sight;
+we were in gloomy shades, where a light was necessary; and before going
+farther I paused to think.
+
+If the treasure had been hidden there, where would it be?
+
+Reason said directly, in the most distant and inaccessible recesses of
+the vast cavern.
+
+And where was that?  How far from the light of day?
+
+That was the problem I had set myself to solve, and, in spite of a
+feeling of awe with which the place inspired me, I prepared for the
+solution.  It was no light task, and I have no shame in owning that I
+felt a strange reluctance to proceed along a rugged path wherein might
+at any time be yawning some fearful bottomless chasm, ready to swallow
+up the adventurer; but I would not show my dread, and if Tom felt any he
+was too obstinate to show his.
+
+By means of string we tied each a candle to our pistol barrels, and then
+set forward, walking slowly, now with the floor of the cavern ascending,
+now with it sloping down with a steep and rugged gradient, but always
+with the little river gurgling in darkness by our side, sometimes almost
+on a level with our feet, at others, where the path rose, running in a
+deep chasm whose black darkness made one shudder.
+
+We must have penetrated, I should say, the greater part of a mile when
+the narrow rocky shelf upon which we were walking came to a sudden end,
+and holding down our candles, we tried to penetrate the depth before us,
+but in vain; we could only see a vast black abyss, over which we were
+standing upon a tongue of rock, while to right, to left, it was
+precisely the same--an awful falling away of all that was palpable--and
+we knew that a slip would have sent us to a horrible death.
+
+"This is a fearsome, unked place, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom; but his
+words went floating around as if taken up by a chorus of mocking voices,
+and a strange shudder crept through me.
+
+It was indeed awful, that vast obscurity, with death threatening us if
+we took another step; and I could not help thinking how easy it was for
+a people of a low order of intellect, blindly superstitious, to make
+this solemn hall the home of their poor idol.  It was a place that took
+no little courage to explore, and often I felt my heart fail me ere I
+recalled the errand upon which I had come.
+
+Was it likely that, sooner than it should fall into the hands of the
+Spaniards, gold almost invaluable had been cast into this awful gulf?
+It was probable; but, as far as I could see, recovery would have been
+impossible, unless, after all, it was not so profound as the darkness
+made it appear.  But then, how to descend?  To swing by a rope over the
+fearful chasm would have unnerved the stoutest of heart, and I felt that
+I hardly could have dared such an adventure.
+
+This, then, must be the extent of the cavern--or rather of our power to
+explore it in this direction--for, as I have before said, we stood right
+out upon a projecting piece of rock from which descent was absolutely
+impossible, and there was nothing for it but to turn back.
+
+"Think it's deep, Mas'r Harry?" whispered Tom loudly.
+
+"Deep--deep--deep--deep--deep--deep!" came whispering back from all
+sides, making Tom shiver; but he recovered himself directly, and taking
+a piece of greasy newspaper from his pocket he loosely crumpled it
+together, knelt down close to the brink of the abyss, lit the paper, and
+then threw it from him to blaze out brightly, and fall down--down
+rapidly--as it burned lower, and lower, and lower, till at a vast depth
+it burned out, but without illuminating anything.  We saw no reflection
+from rocky point or gleaming water, and our feeling of awe was
+increased.
+
+"I'll have another try, anyhow," said Tom.  "Ears will sometimes tell us
+what eyes won't.  Just lend a hand here, Mas'r Harry."
+
+For a moment or two I shrank from assisting him, on seeing his object,
+but directly after applied one hand to a rough block of stone that lay
+at our side, weighing, I should think, a hundred pounds.
+
+We had about a couple of yards to move it, and then it rested upon the
+very brink, a shrinking sensation coming over me as I saw Tom stand,
+candle in hand, with one foot resting upon the rock ready to thrust it
+over.
+
+"Now, then, Mas'r Harry," he said, "this'll find the bottom if anything
+will.  We shall soon know now.  Say when!"
+
+I did not speak, for I was wondering whether that rough block was going
+down where that I coveted had been cast, and for a moment I was about to
+restrain Tom; but I thought that the fall of that stone would teach me
+whether the bottom was at an attainable depth or no, and I signed to Tom
+to thrust the fragment off.
+
+"Over, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Over!"  I said in a whisper; and the next moment there was a grating
+noise and the stone had been thrust off to fall--fall--fall in silence,
+while with awe-stricken countenances we leaned over the gulf and
+listened, second after second, without avail, for no sound came up.
+
+"It's gone bang through to the other side of the world, Mas'r Harry!"
+whispered Tom.  "There ain't no end to this place, for if it had been
+ever so deep you must have heard it touch bottom some time.  Ain't it
+awful!"
+
+It was awful, and a hand seemed clutching my heart as I thought of
+falling, ever falling like that, or of some enemy dashing me over into
+the fearful gulf.  There seemed to be indeed no bottom within ordinary
+range, and the idea of descending by rope in search there of treasure
+was absurd.
+
+How long the stone had been falling I cannot say; but just as we had
+given up all thought of hearing of it more there came from the depths
+below a faint whisper of a splash, or of some pebble falling in water,
+but only for that whisper to be echoed and re-echoed from distant parts
+till it increased to a fearful roar that was some seconds in dying away.
+
+It was impossible to help a shudder upon hearing those horrible
+reverberations, each one telling of the awful profundity of the place--
+one which, without extensive mining apparatus, I felt that any fathoming
+for search was out of the question.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY ONE.
+
+THE BLACK ARCH.
+
+Dreadful place indeed!
+
+"They cannot have thrown any treasure down there," I mentally exclaimed
+the next moment.  "It must be somewhere recoverable."
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," said Tom then, "hadn't we better get back?"
+
+"Are you afraid, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Well, no, Mas'r Harry, I ain't afraid; but I am nearer to being so than
+ever I was in my life.  'Taint fear, only one of my knees will keep
+going shikery-shakery, and my teeth have took it into their heads to
+make believe it's cold, and they're tapping together like the lid of a
+kettle in boiling time.  But I ain't a bit afraid."
+
+"It's an awful-looking place, Tom," I said, "and enough to make any one
+shudder."
+
+"'Tis that, Mas'r Harry--'tis that indeed!" said Tom earnestly.  "And if
+I believed in ghosts and goblins I should say as this was the shop where
+they was made.  But--but, Mas'r Harry, what's that?"
+
+I turned round hastily to look in the direction in which we had come, to
+see plainly a shadowy-looking form flitting, as it were, out of sight in
+the dim obscurity, and a feeling of tremor came over me as I thought of
+our peril should we be attacked now, standing, as we were, with certain
+death behind and on either side; and determined that, if we were to
+encounter an enemy, it should be upon less dangerous ground, I called to
+Tom to follow me; and holding my dim light well in front, began to
+retrace my steps in the direction of the entrance, when there was a loud
+echoing cry from behind.  I felt a violent blow in the back which dashed
+me to the ground, and in an instant our candles were extinguished and we
+were in darkness.
+
+For a few moments I felt paralysed, expecting each instant that I should
+have to grapple with an enemy; but, save for the whisperings and the
+distant roar of water, all was silent till Tom spoke.
+
+"Have you got the flint and steel, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Yes," I whispered.  "But what was the meaning of that blow and that
+cry?"
+
+"It was me.  I stumbled, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, "for there was a black
+thing like a devil's imp flew up out of the big hole and hit me in the
+face.  But pray get a light, Mas'r Harry!"
+
+That Tom's imp was some huge bat I did not for a moment doubt; but after
+seeing a shadowy figure in front I knew that it was possible that danger
+awaited us, so, hastily dragging flint and steel from my pocket, I was
+soon clinking away till a shower of sparks fell upon the tinder; the
+usual amount of blowing followed, and at last a match was fluttering its
+blue, cadaverous light, to blaze out soon and enable us to ignite our
+candles, now burned down very low, when, hastily pursuing our way, we
+came again without adventure into the great entrance, the daylight being
+welcome indeed, when we sat down, about fifty yards from the mouth, to
+partake of some refreshments.
+
+It is surprising what a tonic those provisions and a moderate taste of
+_aguardiente_ formed.  The daylight, too, lent its aid to restore the
+equilibrium of our nerves, and things wore an entirely different aspect.
+
+"That must have been my shadow, Tom," I said at last, just as he was
+indulging in a pipe.  "Your light threw it on to the dark curtain of
+gloom before us.  And as for your imp, that was a huge bat."
+
+"Well, do you know, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, "I do begin to think that I
+hollered afore I was hurt.  But you know it really is an unked place in
+there, and wants a deal of getting used to, and I ain't a bit used to it
+yet.  But don't you make no mistake, Mas'r Harry; if you want to go in
+again I'll go with you, and I can't say fairer than that."
+
+"Well, Tom," I said thoughtfully, "I do want to go in again, for I'm not
+at all satisfied with my journey.  I don't understand what became of
+this little river, for of course it must have turned off somewhere this
+side of the great hole."
+
+"To be sure it did, Mas'r Harry; I saw where it went off under a bit of
+a tunnel just before we got to that horrible great place."
+
+"Then the cavern must branch off there, Tom," I said.  "That must be the
+part for us to explore."
+
+"Very good, Mas'r Harry, when you like; but in case of an accident, and
+I don't come out any more, I think I'll tell the truth before I go in: I
+said I wasn't, Mas'r Harry, but I was awful scared and cold and creepy,
+but I think I shall be better this time; so when you're ready I am."
+
+I expressed my readiness, and in spite of fatigue we stepped onward
+again till the darkness compelled us to stop and light candles, when,
+knowing now that there were no very great perils in the path, we made
+far more progress, and in a very short time arrived at the spot where
+Tom had seen that the bed of the stream took a fresh direction.
+
+It was just as he had intimated: it suddenly turned off to the left, but
+beneath the shelving rock where we stood holding down our candles as far
+as we could reach; and if we wished to explore farther there was nothing
+for it but to scramble down some forty feet to where the water ran
+murmuring amongst the blocks of stone, here all glazed over with the
+stalagmitic concretion that had dripped from the roof.
+
+I led the way, and with very little difficulty stood at last by the
+stream, when Tom followed, and we slowly proceeded along its rocky bed
+till at the end of a few yards we came to the turn where it came gushing
+out of a dark arch, some six feet high and double that width, the water
+looking black and deep as it filled the arch from side to side, running
+swiftly--a river of ink in appearance.
+
+"Tom," I said dreamily, "we must explore this dark tunnel."
+
+"Very well, Mas'r Harry," he said in resigned tones.
+
+And when a few minutes after I turned to look at him, he was leaning
+against a rock and removing his shoes and stockings.
+
+"What are you doing?"  I said.
+
+"Gettin' ready, Mas'r Harry; so as to have something dry to put on when
+we come back."
+
+"But I'm not going to try without boat or raft, Tom," I said.  "We must
+give it up for to-day."
+
+Tom said no word but hurriedly replaced his extreme garments, and
+together we slowly made our way back to reach the light in time to see
+that the sun was very low down in the horizon, when completely wearied
+out we sat down to finish our provision, a very easy task, for I had
+only intended my store for one.  But I must give Tom the credit of
+saying that he would not eat without much pressing, declaring that his
+pipe would satisfy him.
+
+An hour after we were making our way back to the hacienda with,
+fortunately for us, a bright moon overhead, but it was nearly midnight
+before we reached the court-yard.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY TWO.
+
+THE RETURN TO SHADOW-LAND.
+
+Tom was inexhaustible in his schemes, and at the end of three days he
+had contrived the very thing we required, in a light little raft
+composed of a few bamboo wands confining together a couple of inflated
+calf or small heifer skins, which floated lightly on the river like a
+pair of huge bladders.
+
+"There, Mas'r Harry, what do you say to them, eh?  Let all the wind out
+and double 'em up, cut fresh sticks over there by the cave, blow the
+bags out again, and there you are fitted up in style."
+
+"Tom," I said joyfully, "you're a treasure!"
+
+"Course I am, Mas'r Harry!  And yet you wanted to leave me behind."
+
+We were off the next morning before daybreak well armed, each carrying a
+pistol besides our gun, and travelled as rapidly as we could, being
+pretty well laden; our load being increased this time by better
+illuminating powers in the shape of rope thickly coated with pitch.
+
+"You'll take the prog-bag, Mas'r Harry, as soon as we get there; and
+I've brought this bit of rope so as to sling the skin bags over my
+shoulders," said Tom.
+
+"All right!"  I said, and I nodded assent.
+
+Having the advantage of a little more acquaintance with the road we
+arrived at the ravine in good time without seeing a soul, walked
+straight to the blocks in front of the great cave, climbed them,
+hastened in for some distance, and then sat down in the cool twilight to
+rest and refresh ourselves, the place being apparently just as we had
+left it some days before.
+
+It was very laborious work that tramping through a trackless country,
+but an hour's rest and a hearty meal sufficed to make us once more
+eagerly set about our task; Tom now apparently as much excited as myself
+though without my deep interest.  Tom's idea was that we might discover
+something wonderful, more singular perhaps than the vast chasm; but his
+fancies were exceedingly vague, while for my part I studiously preserved
+silence respecting my own intentions.
+
+As soon as we reached the region of gloom we lit a candle and one torch,
+but so far, with the increased power of thoroughly illuminating the
+place, it only served to reveal the vastness of the awe-inspiring cave
+we were traversing.
+
+Our progress was necessarily slow, but at last we stood over the arch
+from whence issued the stream, when, moved by a strange feeling of
+attraction, I left Tom busily preparing the raft while I walked forward
+with the torch to stand at last upon the rocky cape projecting over the
+awful gulf, and there stood holding the light above my head trying to
+penetrate the gloom.
+
+But my endeavours were vain; above, beneath, around, the torch shed a
+halo of faint light, beyond that all was intense blackness, from out of
+which came the whisperings, murmurings, and roarings, evidently of
+water, but which the imagination might easily have transposed into the
+mutterings of a vast and distant multitude.
+
+With an involuntary shudder I turned away, thinking of the consequences
+of a sudden vertigo.
+
+Tom was busy with knife and rope, and kneeling down I helped him,
+puffing into the skins till almost breathless; but at last our task was
+done, and together we carried the little raft down to the water-side,
+though not without several slips, launched it, and then placed upon it
+our lights stuck in lumps of clay brought for the purpose.
+
+The raft was about six feet long by four feet wide; the skins supporting
+light sticks of bamboo well secured to them, and these in their turn
+bearing cross pieces laid in their places, so that the light vessel's
+deck, if I may call it so, was a sort of bamboo grating, upon which we
+could sit, though standing would have been a puzzling gymnastic
+exercise.
+
+We were ready then at last; but now the same feeling seemed to pervade
+both as we stood there on the rock gazing before us at the black arch,
+through which, flowing easily, came the inky water.  From where, from
+what strange regions?
+
+The Golden Magnet--by George Manville Fenn
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY THREE.
+
+THE WATERFALL.
+
+I don't think many could have stood peering into that gloomy tunnel
+without feeling something like a tremor of dread.  However, I mastered
+it at last, after asking myself the question, Was it wise to run such a
+risk?  The answer came in the shape of gold--it might be the passage to
+traverse to arrive at inexhaustible treasure, and I turned to Tom.
+
+"Are you ready?"  I said.
+
+"Yes, Mas'r Harry, I'm ready when I've lit my pipe," he said.
+
+And coolly filling it and igniting it from the torch, he crept boldly on
+to the little raft and took a bamboo, one of two cut on our way here, to
+pole us along.
+
+After placing our guns in safety upon a ledge of rock, I crept on too,
+and the little raft swayed down heavily; but it was wonderfully buoyant,
+and with our lights in front we prepared for our subterranean passage.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Yes," I replied.
+
+And then we pushed off, poling ourselves along under the arch, the
+rugged wall being easily reached on either side, the stream widening and
+not being very rapid after we had passed the first dozen yards.
+
+The navigation proved so easy that we were able to glance about at the
+sides and roof, which often nearly touched us, compelling us to stoop,
+while at other times the tunnel opened out and we seemed to be making
+our way through a narrow lake.  But it soon contracted again, and I
+should think our onward progress must have been through the damp, dark,
+winding way for quite a couple of miles; when, after seeing nothing but
+shining, glistening rock above us for hours, we seemed to have come to
+the end of our uneventful journey in a large irregularly shaped chamber
+whose roof of veined rock was about forty feet above us, its length
+being about two hundred feet, and its greatest breadth about sixty.
+
+The stream had widened out into a little lake again, leaving, however,
+on one side a sandy shore some six or eight feet wide.  The waters were
+troubled, as if in a state of ebullition, and for a while we sat
+wondering and listening to a loud moaning roar coming apparently from a
+distance.  Then pushing on by the side, in a manner of speaking we
+coasted round the place till we reached the sandy shore and rested; for
+though the water flowed out through the arch by which we had entered
+there was no way of further exit from the great vault.
+
+This, then, was the extent of the cavern river, and it was with
+disappointment that I went slowly round once more, poling the raft over
+the troubled waters, to find that there was no likelihood of a discovery
+here.  The sandy shore was the only landing-place, and unless the
+treasure was buried there I could see no other spot where a search could
+be made.  As to the lake's profundity, of that we could tell nothing,
+only that at every attempt to touch bottom we withdrew our poles with a
+shiver.
+
+Here, then, was the source of the river, which rose from springs
+somewhere far below--springs which caused the bubbling we saw, making
+our little raft to rock terribly in one part we passed over, so that we
+gladly sought the sandy shore and there remained listening to the
+lapping of the water and the faint distant roar.
+
+"There must be another cavern beyond this, Tom," I said after a
+thoughtful pause.
+
+"Ain't a doubt about it, Mas'r Harry," he replied.  "It's my belief that
+if any one would do it he might go on for ever and ever, right through
+the inside of the earth to find it all full of places like this."
+
+"Look!"  I said eagerly, as I stood on the sandy slip of land and held
+up the light above my head, pointing the while to the end of the vault;
+"there's a rift up there, Tom, if we could climb to it, and that's where
+that roaring noise comes through."
+
+"Mean to try it, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Yes," I said, "if we can climb to it; otherwise we must come again with
+something we can fit together like a ladder."
+
+"Oh!  I can get up there, Mas'r Harry, I know," said Tom.  "I've been up
+worse places than that in Cornwall after gulls' eggs."
+
+Tom sprang ashore, and I gave a cry of horror, for the little raft was
+moving off; but with a leap Tom was back upon it and drew it ashore by a
+piece of line, which he tied to one of the poles after forcing it well
+down into the sand.
+
+"That won't get away now, Mas'r Harry," he said.
+
+And then stepping cautiously along over the sand, which gave way and
+seemed to shiver beneath our feet, we reached the end of the vault, and
+with very little difficulty climbed from cranny to cranny till we gained
+the opening--a mere slit between two masses of rock--through which we
+had to squeeze ourselves, and then wind up and up between block after
+block, that looked as though they had been riven asunder in some
+convulsion of nature.
+
+Two or three times we were for going back, so arduous was the ascent;
+but determined to see our adventure to the end we pressed on and on,
+ever higher, till the noise became almost deafening, a cold dank wind
+too made our lights to flutter, and once they threatened to become
+extinct.  But five minutes after the passage widened and the draught was
+not so fierce, while bright veins running through the rock at my side
+whispered of some rich metal or other for him who would venture thus far
+in its search.
+
+"We're a-coming to it now, Mas'r Harry," said Tom shouting, for the
+noise was deafening.
+
+The very next moment we were standing in a vast vault stretching out as
+far as our feeble light would show us, while about fifty feet to our
+left, in one black, gloomy, unbroken torrent, fell from some great
+height above, a cascade of water, black as night, till it reached the
+basin below us, which, even with our trembling lights, shone forth in a
+silvery, iridescent foam.
+
+We could hardly hear the words we uttered from time to time, but we felt
+but little inclination to speak, so awe-inspiring was the scene before
+us; and it was not until we had been gazing for some time that we
+ventured to climb down lower and lower, to find that the bottom of the
+cavern was a basin of restless water, from which it was evident some
+portion escaped through a natural conduit to the vault below, while
+probably the rest made its way to the vast gulf we had before seen.
+
+Then up and down--now near the great foaming basin, then with arduous
+climbing close to the dome that formed the roof--I searched about, well
+aided by Tom, who seemed to think that I was looking for something
+precious, though he said nothing.  At one time we approached so near the
+waterfall that we could distinguish, high up, the narrow archway through
+which it gushed.  It seemed, too, that by a little management any one
+daring enough might have passed round the rocky amphitheatre in which we
+were, right beneath the waterfall to the other side, where rifts and
+faintly-discerned chasms whispered of further wondrous passages
+unexplored, and I felt sure--for the more I searched the more the
+feeling came home to me--that we were the first human beings who had
+ever entered this stronghold of nature.
+
+With the exception of the bright veins I have mentioned there was no
+trace of gem or precious metal.  The sides and roof sparkled and
+glistened again and again, but it was only with some stalactitic
+formation--beautiful to the eye, but worthless; and at last I felt that
+this was labour in vain--the treasure was no more here than in the vast
+chasm where we had hurled the stone; and, shouting to Tom my intentions,
+we stood and had another look, and then lit upon a mass of rock a large
+piece of oily oakum which we had brought for the purpose.
+
+Our oakum burned brightly, but it was of little avail, giving us not
+much more than a glimpse of the wonders of the grand chamber in which we
+stood; and then we turned to go, but only to encounter an unexpected
+difficulty.  The chamber was so vast and the rift by which we had
+entered the sloping side so high up amidst crags resembling one another
+that we had great difficulty in finding it, and I remember shuddering as
+I thought of the consequences of being lost there in the dark.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR.
+
+CAST ON A STRANGE SHORE.
+
+Being nervous or wanting in nerve is a state that would soon prove the
+ruin of the adventurous.
+
+We had to set ourselves determinedly to the task of finding our way
+back, and after a weary climb Tom pointed it out.
+
+If anything, the descent was more laborious than the climbing up; but at
+last, tired out, we reached the vaulted chamber with its troubled lake
+and narrow sandy strip of shore--a welcome place, gloomy and horrible as
+it was, for it meant rest upon our raft, and the gliding out with the
+stream to the entrance arch, and then not so very long a journey to the
+blessed light of heaven.
+
+"Ah!"
+
+That cry burst from our lips simultaneously, as, climbing down to reach
+the sand, we held our lights low to see--what?
+
+That there must be a sort of tide in the lake, small as it was; for the
+water was bubbling up more fiercely with a hissing noise, and there was
+no sand--the waters had covered it; there was no raft--the pole had been
+loosened by the water and the raft had gone, floated away, to be driven
+by the stream to the tunnel, and then swim lightly away to leave us to a
+horrible death--a self-sought death; and as I thought of what I had done
+in my insensate greed for gold I could have groaned aloud.
+
+But no, it was no insensate greed, I told myself--it was for Lilla's
+sake--and my eyes rilled with tears as I thought that I should never see
+her more, and that Garcia--
+
+That name sent a thrill of energy through my weary frame, and calling
+upon speechless Tom, I told him to light a piece more oakum; and he did
+so, to reveal plainly the raft floating about right at the end of the
+great vault, and apparently nearing the arch of exit.  What were we to
+do?
+
+There was but one answer.  Dash into that horrible black lake and swim
+to the raft, or else stay and die.
+
+It was dreadful, to plunge into those mysteriously disturbed waters,
+containing far below who could tell what hideous monsters?--to swim, or
+try to swim, where the strange eddies and whirlpools might draw the
+struggling wretch down!  To swim, too, in profound darkness; for I felt
+that if the attempt were made it would be made together.
+
+The thoughts in my breast must have been the same as those in poor
+Tom's; for, looking at the faintly-discerned raft and then up at me, he
+said with a groan: "Mas'r Harry, I daren't!"
+
+"Tom," I said, "I dare not!"
+
+"But tell me to try it, Mas'r Harry," he cried--"order me to swim off to
+it, and I'll try.  I shall be sucked down like a cork in a sink-hole,
+but tell me to do it--order me and make me, and I'll try; but I daren't
+go without I was made."
+
+"Light another piece of oakum, Tom," I said hoarsely.  "Perhaps the
+water on the sand is shallow and we might walk along to the other end,
+and then try to swim together: it would not be half so far.  But stay--
+hold my hand while I step down and try."
+
+We crept down to where the sand had been bare when we left it, though
+loose and yielding; and, sticking the short piece of candle in a
+crevice, Tom seized my hand firmly and I stepped down into the water,
+but only to cry to Tom to draw me forth, for the sand was quick now and
+watery, and more dangerous to him who ventured upon it than the lake
+itself.
+
+It was not without a sharp struggle that I once more stood beside Tom
+upon the ledge of rock, when without a word he drew out the oakum and
+prepared to light it, while, half beside myself with horror, I tried to
+calculate how far was the distance, and whether, by well marking the
+spot where the raft floated, we could not contrive to hit it in swimming
+in the dark.  That we should have to swim in the dark I knew; for
+neither of us, I felt, could then have swum with one hand, holding a
+light above the troubled waters with the other.
+
+Just then Tom's oakum blazed up behind me, to light up the vault with
+its sparkling stalactitic roof, glistening sides, and strangely-agitated
+water.  There floated the raft plainly enough just in front of the arch,
+and so near to our reach that in an instant Tom had thrown off cap,
+wallet, and jacket beside the candles stuck in the rock and the still
+burning oakum.
+
+"No, Tom--no!"  I cried, catching at him; "you must not risk it."
+
+"Let go, Mas'r Harry--I must!" he shouted.  "I swore I'd stick to you."
+
+He struck me in the chest so that I staggered back, and then there was a
+loud plash and he was swimming away.
+
+To start up and throw off my own jacket and wallet was the work of an
+instant, for, with his example, I could not stay back.  We were
+companions, and I felt that it would be cowardly after he had taken the
+first plunge.
+
+Another instant and I was after him, "plash!" with the noise of my
+plunge still echoing as I rose above the waters--echoing in a strange
+whisper along the arched roof.  But oh! the painful, numbing sensation
+of intense cold that struck to my heart!  It was fearful, and before I
+had taken a dozen strokes I felt that I should never reach the raft.
+
+I was not called upon so to do, for the next minute, in answer to my cry
+came a groan from Tom, and I knew that he was swimming back, and the
+next moment he shrieked:
+
+"Mas'r Harry, back! lend me a hand!  Cramp--cramp!"
+
+And then he gave a shriek of agony which roused me to a state of frenzy,
+as I could just see him beating the water with frantic effort close by
+my side.
+
+The raft was forgotten then as with a vigorous stroke I reached him,
+placed one arm beneath his, and then struck out for the lights.
+
+How I reached them I cannot recall: only a horrible struggle, the
+echoing of splashing water, the reaching of the cold, slimy rock with
+something seeming to draw me under, a fierce effort to get out, the
+dragging forth of poor Tom, who sank by my side with a groan; and then
+in a dreamy state I pulled the last piece of oakum from Tom's wallet,
+held it to one of the candles for it to blaze up, sputtering loudly from
+the wet hand that held it.  I sheltered my eyes after pressing out the
+water, looked again and again, separated the oakum so that it flared
+more and more, lighting up the low arch through which we had entered,
+when I groaned to myself: was this to be the end of my golden dreams--
+death in this hideous vault? for the stream set swiftly now through the
+arch, and the raft was gone!
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE.
+
+A NIGHT'S REST.
+
+The bright, flaring, spluttering blaze, glimmering and flashing upon the
+troubled waters and reflected from the roof; then, as it sank down,
+comparative darkness, for the two scraps of candle seemed to burn very
+dimly.  Tom lay upon the rocks without speaking, while the agony that
+passed through my brain was intense.  I felt that I had murdered the
+poor fellow, who was called upon to give up his young life through his
+fidelity to what any thoughtful man would call my wild follies.
+
+We were to die, then, here, in this wild, mysterious cave, far beyond
+the reach of aid; for even if we had not by our caution thoroughly
+concealed our coming, who would dare to follow our route, unless by
+chance the raft were seen?
+
+That certainly afforded a faint gleam of hope, and another came directly
+to fortify it.  My uncle had talked about the great cave, and its
+exploration had been mentioned.  It was possible, then, that upon our
+absence causing uneasiness a search might be made in this direction; for
+I knew my uncle too well to think that he would leave his sister's child
+unsought.
+
+But if he did not arrive in time? or if some of Garcia's spies had seen
+us enter and were to mislead the searchers?
+
+The thought was too horrible; and I shuddered as I thought of Lilla and
+her fate, till a maddening sensation of jealousy drove for a few minutes
+all fear and dread away.
+
+My musings were arrested by Tom, who made me start by suddenly taking my
+dripping hand between his--damp and icy to the touch.
+
+The next moment he was holding my hand to his breast, so that I could
+feel the laboured beatings of his true heart as he exclaimed hoarsely:
+
+"Mas'r Harry, you saved my life then, and I'll never forget it."
+
+"Nonsense, Tom!"  I said with gloomy cheerfulness.  "It's all give and
+take out here.  Why, you saved me from the crocodiles."
+
+"Cuss 'em!  Don't talk about 'em here, Mas'r Harry," said Tom in a
+whisper.  "We don't know but what there's horrible ones living in these
+dreadful waters.  That there cramp taking me in the leg like that made
+me feel as if one had got hold of me.  I'm a horrible coward, Mas'r
+Harry, that I am."
+
+"Tom," I said, "this place is enough to unnerve any one."
+
+Then we were silent, for the strange echoings of our voices had an
+unearthly, terrible effect upon our nerves; and more than once I started
+at the grotesque shadow of myself upon the wall.  The roar of the great
+waterfall came humming through the rift above our heads, while below the
+waters hissed, and bubbled, and lapped against the rocks in a curious,
+whispering, awe-inspiring fashion; and then moved by the same impulse we
+both took off and wrung all the moisture we could out of our things
+before standing shivering before the lights, one of which was already
+beginning to gutter down and threatened to become extinct.
+
+Upon examining our wallets we found that we each had a couple of candles
+left, but our provision was very low; and the question now arose as to
+the next proceeding.
+
+"Won't do to lie down and die, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "I'm ever so
+much warmer now."
+
+"No, Tom," I said, "we'll fight to the last; but what are we to do?"
+
+"Well, Mas'r Harry, I'd first of all get up into the crack of a passage
+up there before the lights go out, for there's no knowing how high this
+water may rise; and if I ain't to see daylight no more, but to die here,
+I should like to die dry and warm."
+
+"Don't talk about death, Tom," I said with a shudder.  "Let's fight for
+life to the last, and, as you say, we'll climb up to the rift."
+
+One candle burned out as we tried to move it, and deferring the lighting
+of another for reasons of economy, we climbed to the narrow crack-like
+passage and went along it about thirty yards before Tom, who was first,
+turned round in a part where the passage widened a few feet.
+
+"Now look here, Mas'r Harry," he said.  "We don't know that there ain't
+no other way out of the cave.  I should say as there is if we could find
+it; at all events we mustn't lie down and die till we've looked about
+and the candles are burned away, and then felt about till we can't feel
+no longer.  So see here, Mas'r Harry, we're wet, and cold, and tired
+out, and we can't do nothing better than sit down here and have a good
+sleep.  Then we'll wake up, eat the bit of grub there is left, and go to
+work again fresh.  What do you say?"
+
+"Say?  That I think you are right, Tom," I replied, trying to imitate
+his cheerfulness.  "But about the light?"
+
+"Light, Mas'r Harry?  Why, we must put it out.  We ain't little children
+to be afraid to go to sleep in the dark.  Then you've got your
+tinder-box and matches all dry in the wallet, and we can light up and go
+at it again in the morning, or night, or whatever it is, Mas'r Harry,
+for there ain't no difference here.  Who knows but what, while we are
+looking for the way out, we mayn't find what you want?"
+
+"What I want, Tom?"  I said suspiciously.  "To be sure, Mas'r Harry?
+What you want, whatever that may be--I don't say as it's gold mines, or
+dymons, or what not; only whatever it is we _may_ find it, for I
+shouldn't be surprised at finding anything here."
+
+I did not reply; but making the best of the sad lodging that was to be
+ours for the next few hours, and all wet and shivering as we were,
+creeping together for warmth, we lay down, and I stretched out my hand
+to extinguish the candle.
+
+But my hand was arrested half-way, as I looked upon the glittering rock
+above my head and listened to the hissing, seething noise of the water
+below us in the long vault and the faint roar of the cataract far above
+us to the left.  Now with a sense of dread indescribable I thought of
+the water rising to where we were during our sleep, and whether it would
+not be better to light another candle.  Anything was better than lying
+there in the horrible darkness.
+
+The spare supply of light we possessed, though, would be wanted after
+our sleep, and reluctantly I pressed down the wick; thinking as I did so
+what would be the use of the gold if I found it now and there should be
+no means of escape!
+
+"What time would you like your shaving-water, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom,
+whose teeth chattered as he spoke.
+
+"This is no time for laughing, Tom," I said gloomily.
+
+"I don't see as it's any time for crying, Mas'r Harry," he replied, "for
+I'm quite wet enough without that."
+
+Then he was silent, and we lay in that awful darkness, which in, spite
+of my efforts, I kept peopling with multitudinous horrors.
+
+Then I seemed to lose consciousness; in spite of hard rock, cold, and
+damp, sleeping heavily, and dreaming now of Lilla, who seemed to be in
+some terrible peril from which I could not save her.  I wanted to reach
+her, but something kept me away, while the danger she was in, as it
+floated before my distempered imagination, was somehow connected with
+Garcia, and Indians, and fire, or a mingling of all three.  I felt ready
+to cry out as I struggled against the power that held me back; but at
+last I saw what it was that stayed me; it was the gold for which I had
+been seeking--piled-up, heavy masses of gold--holding me down, crushing
+me almost, while Lilla's sweet imploring face was turned to me as if
+asking my help.  I strained, I longed to release myself, but in vain;
+and at last one great ponderous mass began to move towards me slowly,
+with a heavy, roaring noise, till it rested upon my chest, and with a
+start I woke to find one of Tom's arms thrown across my throat and him
+snoring loudly.
+
+For a few minutes I lay aghast, unable to make out where I was; but by
+degrees recollection brought back all the horrors of our position, and
+with a sigh I managed to rid myself of Tom's arm.
+
+I settled myself to try and sleep once more, so as to be ready for what
+would, I knew, prove an arduous, wearying task, tiring alike to body and
+spirit; when my blood seemed to be frozen in my veins, for there came a
+soft, fluttering noise, the air seemed to fan my cheeks as I lay, and
+then there echoed through the place three wild, appalling cries,
+followed by profound silence.
+
+"Who's that a-calling?  It won't do, Muster Garcia!  You left her to
+drown, eh?  What!  Hilloa!  Say, Mas'r Harry, was I dreaming or did you
+call?"
+
+"I did not call, Tom," I whispered; "but there is some one in here
+besides us.  Hark!"
+
+Again, as I spoke, and heard plainly above the distant roar, three more
+cries came sweeping along, and once more there was silence.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "better chance for us to get out.
+If some one else can come in that only shows that there's another way;
+and when it's time to get up, why, up we get, for I don't feel a bit
+disposed to try any more sleep here--it's too much like hard work!"
+
+"I don't think the cries were human, Tom," I said.
+
+"Never mind that, Mas'r Harry, they weren't ghosts' cries.  I'll bet
+that.  Now, if my old mother was here she'd stick out as it was a spirit
+as couldn't--Oh, Mas'r Harry, though, what a horrid screech!" he
+whispered, as again a long-drawn, hollow, echoing cry ran through the
+passages.
+
+I do not think I'm more timid than most lads would have been at a time
+like this; but my hands trembled as I sought for the flint, steel, and
+tinder-box, anxious to be out of the darkness that hemmed us in on all
+sides, and it was not until I had tried for some time that I was able to
+ignite the tinder.
+
+At last, though, the brimstone match was held down to the spot glowing
+beneath my breath, the blue flame was succeeded by that of the wooden
+splint, and once more our spirits rose as the feeble light of a candle
+was reflected from the rocky walls.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SIX.
+
+THE AMPHITHEATRE.
+
+We were half numbed with the cold, but I found now that, in spite of our
+troubled dreams and its apparent brevity, our sleep must have continued
+for a long time, for our clothes were nearly dry.
+
+"Now, then, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, "never mind no shrieks and cries;
+let's eat what there is in that bag and drink what there is in that
+bottle, and then go on our voyage of discovery.  It will give us
+strength for the job, besides being ever so much easier to carry.  If
+anything queer comes near us we've got our pistols, so let them look
+out."
+
+In spite of the feeling of tremor caused by the mysterious cries I was
+eager enough to move, and we began to climb up once more through the
+crack, after stepping back to the vault, holding up our candles, and
+making sure that by no possibility we had overlooked the raft.
+
+As to its floating away I felt that it would not go very far on reaching
+the end of the tunnel, there were too many obstacles in the way in the
+shape of great boulders to block up the stream; so that hope of relief
+was but faint there even if a search was commenced.
+
+There was no raft in sight; nothing but the strange, troubled water,
+ever bubbling and leaping up; and with a shudder, as we thought of the
+struggle we had had, we turned away, but not without seeing that the
+sand strip was now about half bare.
+
+It was no time for being nervous.  We knew that to live we must find a
+means of exit while our candles lasted, so started once more to thread
+our way along through the rift and right on to the huge cavern where the
+cascade of water came thundering down.
+
+Here we halted for a time to gain breath, and then set to work to
+thoroughly explore the place; so we pushed on nearer and nearer, to find
+that, as we expected, we could pass right round behind the waterfall,
+over the slippery, wet stones, worn into seams, as if at one time the
+stream had rushed down them; but no trace of rift or passage could we
+find save one small crevice through which it seemed possible that a body
+might be squeezed.
+
+"Never mind, Mas'r Harry, that can't be the way; let's try farther round
+this other side."
+
+Tom led now and I followed, leaving the cascade behind us, and
+thoroughly examining the other side of the amphitheatre, but without
+avail; when we sat down, worn out, about opposite to the rift where we
+had entered, too disheartened to speak, till Tom said:
+
+"We shall have to try and crawl through that hole, Mas'r Harry--there,
+under the waterfall."
+
+"A dog could hardly do it, Tom," I said bitterly, and then I started.
+"Stop a moment," I cried.  "That was a regular crack or split in the
+rock that we came through, Tom; such a one as might have been made by an
+earthquake."
+
+"Sure it was, Mas'r Harry; but you don't think as another one has come
+and shut it up, do you?"
+
+"No, no, Tom," I cried, leaping up and forgetting my fatigue; "but why
+should not that crack be continued on this side--here, just opposite
+where we are?  Come, climb higher with me, and let us have another try."
+
+My thought was a bright one; for far up, just where the side of the
+amphitheatre began to curve into the dome which formed the roof, we
+found a crack answering to the one through which we entered on the other
+side; and squeezing ourselves through, we found that we were in another
+narrow passage--so narrow, though, that we proceeded with great
+difficulty.
+
+"This must be the way out, Tom," I said.
+
+"Or the way in, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "one of them two.  Anyhow,
+though, we shall soon see."
+
+Not so soon, though, as Tom expected; for we crept on and climbed for
+quite a couple of hours, winding and doubling about, before the rift
+opened out, sloping, too, at the same time, so that walking became out
+of the question; and we climbed slowly down till we lost sight of roof
+and sides.  Then on and on, slowly and carefully, where a false step
+would have sent us gliding we knew not where; and then we stopped,
+aghast, with a fearful chasm at our feet, to awake to the fact that we
+had climbed down to the extreme edge of an awful precipice, while, on
+holding up our lights, there before us was darkness, black and
+impenetrable, above, around, beneath.
+
+The same thought occurred to both, and in a whisper we gave utterance to
+that thought together, though in different words.
+
+"Tom, we've come round to another part of the great black gulf."
+
+"Mas'r Harry, this is the same place where we pitched down the big
+stone.  Let's try another."
+
+More to prove the truth of our thought than anything else, I assented;
+and finding a good-sized lump, Tom hurled it outwards with all his
+might, and then we listened as we had listened before, to hear it at
+last strike water at a profound depth, with the same roar of echoes to
+make us shrink shuddering back.
+
+"It is the same place, Tom," I said, speaking hoarsely, for this was
+another damp to our hopes.
+
+There was apparently no chance even of reaching the rocky point where we
+had stood the day before, for that point stood out alone, and I could
+not see how it could be reached; but in a dull, despondent way, I
+thought that we would try to the last; and shrinking back a few yards
+from the edge of the precipice, we began to climb along the side, in the
+hope of finding some outlet in that direction; for could we but reach
+that point by any means we were safe.
+
+Ten minutes' climbing in a state of extreme horror, with the loose
+fragments of rock slipping from beneath our hands and feet, to roll
+rattling over the edge of the vast chasm, and then we were brought to a
+standstill; for there, right in front, was a bare, smooth, perpendicular
+wall of rock, inexorable as fate itself.
+
+We turned and began to climb back along the horrid slope, when, with a
+sensation of horror that I hardly dare to recall, I felt my legs slip,
+my hands, torn, wet, and bleeding as they were, to glide over the stone
+to which I clung; and, with a feeble cry for aid to Tom, I gave myself
+up for lost.
+
+With a shriek like that which might have been expected to have emanated
+from some wild beast, Tom leaped to my side, caught at me, and then,
+clinging together, we continued our downward course for what seemed an
+interminable length of time, when there was a sudden stoppage.  Tom's
+feet rested in a cleft of the rock, and he held me fast, as I lay
+gasping, with my legs hanging for some distance over the frightful
+chasm.
+
+For full five minutes we did not either of us move, since it seemed that
+the slightest attempt to alter our position must result in a plunge into
+the darkness yawning to receive us.
+
+One candle was extinguished, but the other lay guttering and flaring
+some twenty feet above us, wasting rapidly, and casting its feeble,
+weird light upon where we clung.
+
+We neither of us spoke, but softly feeling about, I at length got my
+fingers in a chink of rock, which gave me courage to move my legs, so
+that at last they rested upon a rough point or knob.  Then, by Tom's
+guiding, my other hand found a hole, and by an effort I climbed on to
+the slope, to lie panting and waiting for nerve.
+
+Help me Tom could not from his position, and had I not stirred myself I
+must have fallen at last; but he had well paid the debt he owed me for
+my last night's efforts, as I told him when we had cautiously made our
+way back up the slope in a diagonal direction to where the rift opened,
+to sink down at last, breathless and thankful, in the narrow way; glad
+even to be beyond reach of the influence of the horrible gulf, which had
+for me an attraction that was appalling.
+
+We were very quiet now, as we half sat, half lay upon the rocky bottom
+of the crack, till our strength was somewhat renewed after our late
+efforts, when, dragging myself up, I wiped the clammy dew from my
+forehead, and Tom followed my example.
+
+"Tom," I exclaimed, "inaction means death.  Let's try that hole behind
+the fall."
+
+"Right, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, essaying to be cheerful.
+
+And without another word he rose, took his candle from the niche in
+which he had placed it, and together we made our way back into the
+amphitheatre.  Then we climbed over the blocks to behind the fall,
+where, going down upon his knees, Tom held his candle in at
+arm's-length, and then essayed to creep in at the little opening.
+
+I looked on anxiously as his head and shoulders disappeared, then his
+whole body; and I was preparing to follow him when he wriggled himself
+back, to face me with a sad shake of the head.
+
+"No good, Mas'r Harry--a baby couldn't go through there."
+
+I took his word, and led the way back till we were clear of the mist
+shed by the fall, and then I set to and tried if the great problem of
+our escape could not be solved; and at last when all hope was ready to
+expire in my bosom the solution came.
+
+We were sitting, sad and dejected, worn by our long toil, when suddenly
+we were startled by a shriek similar to those which we had heard upon
+our awaking.
+
+Tom pressed close to me, and I must confess to a strange sensation of
+awe, as now, one after another, these wild cries came ringing out of the
+darkness around.  Now near, now far-off, and fading away as it were,
+till one was uttered close by my ear, and I saw a shadowy form sweep
+past the light shed by our one poor feeble candle; then another and
+another; when, angry with myself for my superstitious dread, I exclaimed
+aloud:
+
+"Why, they're birds!"
+
+"Birds they are!" cried Tom gently.  "But are they real birds, Mas'r
+Harry?"
+
+"Real? yes, Tom!"  I exclaimed excitedly.  "And there must be some other
+way of entrance, for I saw one disappear close by the falling water.
+Yes, and there goes another!"  I cried, as I held up the light.  "Tom--
+Tom, they are the messengers of life!  There is a way out yet!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN.
+
+A JOURNEY IN THE DARK.
+
+Again the hope which animated our breasts chased away the sense of
+depression and fatigue, as, lighting our last candle to obtain a better
+light, we clambered as rapidly as we could high up towards where the
+water came roaring from its vast culvert, just as with a loud shriek a
+bird flew out, like some creature of shadow-land, from a niche which had
+hitherto escaped our notice.
+
+The next moment, after a flit round the amphitheatre, it gave another
+shriek, and we saw it re-enter the niche and disappear.
+
+That there was an outlet to the upper world there we now had no doubt,
+but the question arose which exit presented the least peril--the ascent
+to this niche right over the arch of the torrent, or the way back by the
+vault of the troubled waters, to swim for our lives down the little
+river.
+
+We did not pause long to consider, but, drawing our breath hard, sought
+to climb up to where the bird had disappeared.
+
+We needed the activity and power of some animal born to a climbing life,
+for it was a terrible task, over slippery, spray-bedewed rocks, that
+seemed composed of ice.  Our feet and hands slipped again and again, and
+more than once I felt that I must fall upon the bow of that torrent of
+inky water, at first by our side, soon right beneath us, and so be
+plunged into the seething cauldron below.
+
+I found myself wondering whether, if I did so, my body would be forced
+through along some subterranean way to the vault of the troubled waters,
+from thence float out slowly along the little river, and so to the mouth
+of the cave and the outer sunshine.
+
+Such thoughts were enough to unnerve one; but, bit by bit, we climbed on
+in safety, handing the candle from one to the other, and ever and anon
+stretching out a helping hand, till, how I cannot tell, we clung at
+length right over the falling torrent, with a piece of rock, smooth as
+the polishing of ages could make it, between us and the niche, which now
+proved to be a good-sized split separating a couple of rocks.
+
+"You go first, Mas'r Harry," Tom whispered, with his mouth close to my
+ear.  "I'll stand firm, and you can climb up my shoulders, and then lend
+me a hand."
+
+I prepared to start, handing him the one candle we now had alight, when
+I gave utterance to a cry of despair; for the linen band which had
+crossed my breast, and supported the wallet, had been worn through by
+the constant climbing, and I suppose must have broken when I was making
+this last ascent.  At all events, the wallet was gone--plunged, I
+expect, into the torrent, and bearing with it the flint, steel,
+tinder-box, and matches; so that, should any accident befall our one
+light, we should be in the horrible darkness of the place.
+
+"Never mind, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "It ain't no use crying after
+spilt milk.  Up you go, sir."
+
+With failing heart and knitted brow I exerted myself, climbed to Tom's
+hips, as he clung to the rock and lighted me; then to his shoulders;
+stood there for a moment trembling, and then struggled into the cleft,
+turned round, lay down in a horrible position, sloping towards the
+torrent, with my head two feet lower than my knees, and then stretched
+out my hands to Tom.
+
+"Can't reach, Mas'r Harry," he said, after one or two despairing trials.
+"You'll have to go and leave me.  See if you can get out and fetch
+help."
+
+For a moment I felt stunned at this unforeseen termination of our
+efforts, for there really had seemed hope now, unless this fresh passage
+should prove too narrow to let us pass.
+
+I did not answer Tom, but drew myself up again to think; when, taking
+off my coat, I rolled it round and round, laid fast hold of the collar,
+and then, once more lying down, I lowered the coat to Tom.
+
+"Can you reach that?"  I said.
+
+"No, Mas'r Harry--not by a foot," said Tom gloomily, his words being
+shouted, as the roar of the torrent beneath us swept his voice away.
+
+He stood in a position of awful peril: a false step, and he would be
+plunged into the torrent; and as I looked down at his upturned face and
+the flickering candle, I wondered how I could have ever dared to stand
+there myself.
+
+"Can you reach it now?"  I said, lowering myself a little more.
+
+But his answer came in a dull, muffled, despairing monotone:
+
+"No."
+
+I wriggled and shuffled my body a little more forward, forcing my boot
+toes into a crevice as I did so, for it seemed that now the slightest
+strain would draw me over the precipice.  But there was no other
+resource: Tom must have help; and I lay shivering there as, with an
+upward spring, the candle between his teeth, Tom clutched my coat, I
+shuddering the while, and wondering whether the cloth would give way, or
+whether I should be drawn down.
+
+We were looking straight into each other's eyeballs, lit by the
+guttering candle, as, with trial after trial, exerting the great
+muscular strength in his arms, Tom climbed higher and higher till he
+could touch my hands, my arms, and then hold on by my neck, when he
+stopped panting, just as, in his convulsive efforts, his teeth met
+through the candle, ground through the wick, and the upper portion fell
+far below into the torrent to leave us in that awful darkness.
+
+"Hold fast, Mas'r Harry!"  Tom hissed in my ear.  "Crook your hands.
+No!  Clasp 'em together, to give me a foothold."
+
+"Tom!"  I groaned, "I'm slipping.  I can hold on no longer."
+
+"A moment--a moment, Mas'r Harry," he cried.
+
+I clasped my fingers together, when, bending his body into a half
+circle, he got one foot into my hands, forced himself rapidly up,
+staying my downward progress of inch after inch, as the weight of his
+body pressed me to the rock; but as he turned to hold me in his turn, it
+was just as I felt myself going faster and faster, gliding head
+downwards towards the torrent.
+
+Another struggle, and, wet and bleeding, I was by Tom's side, for him to
+hold tightly by one of my hands, as with the other he felt his way along
+slowly for some yards, when once more we sank upon the rocky floor, to
+lie panting, our breath drawn in hysterical sobs, and a darkness around
+that was too fearful even to contemplate.
+
+Our despair was such that we could find no words; but at last Tom said,
+in a voice that I could hardly hear for the roar of the torrent, which
+seemed to be here condensed by the narrow passage:
+
+"Mas'r Harry, I'll go first; follow close behind, and crawl."
+
+His words gave me energy, and we set off, crawling slowly, now upwards,
+now downwards, feeling every foot of the way, lest some new peril should
+lie in our path.  The roar of the torrent rose and fell as we crept
+away, till by slow degrees it became fainter, fading to quite a soft
+murmur; but still no new horror assailed us.  The dread darkness was
+forgotten in the hope that shed a light into our hearts, as foot by foot
+we progressed through what was sometimes a narrow passage, sometimes a
+wide vault, as we could tell by the echoing of our voices from its
+arched roof.  In one of these, too, our ears were saluted by the shrieks
+of birds and the rushing of wings--a fact which told us we could not be
+very far from the light of day; but progress was so slow that I often
+despaired of seeing that light again.
+
+Often and often I could have lain down and cried like a child, and it
+required no weak effort to keep my emotion back.
+
+"Seems to me, Mas'r Harry," said Tom at last, "this is a very big place
+we're in, for the more I try about, the less I seem able to get on.
+Shall we rest a bit?"
+
+Had Tom said, "Shall we keep on?"  I should have made the same
+reply--"Yes."  And then, as we extended our aching limbs upon the soft
+soil which covered the floor of the cave in this part, a delicious sense
+of tranquillity stole over me, and almost instantaneously I sank into a
+deep dreamless sleep.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT.
+
+TO DAYLIGHT.
+
+How long we lay in that stupor--more than sleep--I cannot tell; but I
+was awoke by Tom, and once more we slowly continued our journey, walking
+now though--for the absence of fresh perils had given us courage--and
+with our arms extended we went slowly on; but ever with the soft earth
+of the cave beneath our feet, and the stillness only broken by the
+occasional shriek of a bird.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," said Tom after a long silence.  "We are only
+wandering here and there without finding the passage to go out."
+
+"I have been thinking so too, Tom," I said, as a thought struck me.
+Then loudly--"Look out, and see if you can make out anything when I
+fire: the flash may guide us."
+
+Taking out my pistol I fired upwards, when it was as if the whole cave
+were being crushed up together--thunder, roar, and bellow, in a
+deafening series of echoes--echoes succeeded by the rustling as of ten
+thousand wings, and shrieks that were deafening--noises which were quite
+a quarter of an hour in subsiding.
+
+"We must be near to an opening, Tom," I said, as soon as I could make
+myself heard.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry, and I've seen it," he said cheerily.  "This is
+a big place, hundreds of feet over, but the passage out lies here; that
+firing of the pistol was a good idea of yours."
+
+He took my hand and stepped out boldly.  Then feeling his way with
+caution, he exclaimed joyfully that he had found the opening, into which
+we stepped, and soon knew by the hollow sound that we were in a rapidly
+contracting passage.
+
+From time to time I now flashed off a little powder in the pan of my
+pistol, in which instant we were able to see that we were in one of the
+riven passages of the cave, similar to those which we had before
+traversed; and, faint with hunger, we pressed on, till a distant murmur,
+ever increasing, forced itself upon my notice, and in a voice of despair
+I exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, Tom, Tom! we are going back, my lad!"
+
+"Mas'r Harry," he exclaimed, "don't be down-hearted.  'Tis so, though;
+and I've been thinking it for the past quarter of an hour, but I
+wouldn't say it for I wasn't sure.  Never mind, let's turn back.  That's
+the big waterfall we can hear, sure enough.  But we can step out bold
+now, as we know there's no danger; and when we are in the big place
+where we slept, a little powder will show us the way."
+
+A weary walk and we were once more upon the soft earth of the cave where
+we had slept--the bird-chamber we called it--when, by means of flashing
+off powder, we arrived at a pretty good idea of the size of the place,
+and, better still, discovered a fresh outlet.
+
+Danger and disappointment had made me now cautious, and I would not
+proceed until, by the expenditure of more powder, we had made sure that
+there was no other passage; alarming the birds too, so that they swept
+round us like a hurricane.
+
+"Right this time, Mas'r Harry," cried Tom.
+
+Then we were once more on the way, crawling as to pace, as we felt our
+way cautiously along.
+
+"If it ever fell out, Mas'r Harry, that we wanted a hiding-place, what a
+spot this would be!" said Tom, little thinking that the day was to come
+when it should prove the salvation of those who were our truest and best
+friends.  "Why, I don't believe there's an Indian ever had the pluck to
+come a quarter as far, and we know it now well, every foot of it."
+
+"Except the way out, Tom," I said sadly.
+
+"Oh, that's right enough now, Mas'r Harry," he cried.  "Cheer up: here's
+the birds flying along by the score.  Can't you hear their wings
+whistle?  They're some of those we frightened out coming back again."
+
+I could hear the soft flap of wings plainly enough, and I could not help
+feeling hopeful as we toiled on, till suddenly Tom exclaimed:
+
+"Keep back!"
+
+"What is it?"  I exclaimed, our voices echoing in a way which told us
+that the cave had once more opened out.
+
+"My leg goes down as far as I can reach here, Mas'r Harry.  There's a
+hole of some kind.  Stop till I flash off a bit of powder."
+
+I stood firm, while Tom was busy for a few moments, during which I heard
+the click of his flask.  Then there were sparks as he snapped off his
+flint-lock pistol, but for a few times without effect; but at last he
+started a train of powder which burned brightly, showing us that we
+stood on a ledge some fifty feet above where there was the flash of
+water and many a grotesque rock.
+
+"Why, Tom?"
+
+"Why, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Down on your knees!"  I cried joyfully as I set the example.
+
+For we were in the first extensive widening out of the cave, at about
+five hundred yards from its mouth, having emerged through an opening
+hitherto unknown to us from its being upon a ledge forty or fifty feet
+above the floor, where in that part it ran on a level with the little
+river.
+
+We rose from our knees, weak as two children, and contrived to scramble
+down to the bottom, along which we stumbled slowly and without energy
+towards the cave's mouth, going back first to where we had left our
+guns.  Turn after turn, winding after winding, we traversed, and there
+was the faint dawning of light in the distance--light which grew more
+and more bright and glorious as we advanced, shading our eyes with our
+hands, till, utterly worn out, we sank down close to the entrance
+amongst the soft, warm, luxurious sand, when I gazed at the pale,
+haggard, blood-smeared face beside me, to exclaim:
+
+"Tom, is that you?"
+
+"Mas'r Harry," he replied hoarsely, "poor Missus wouldn't know you if
+she was here."
+
+It was the noon of the third day, we afterwards learned, that we had
+spent in these realms of darkness, and never did the bright face of
+nature look more glorious than it did to our aching eyes.  But in spite
+of the intense sensation of gnawing hunger we could not proceed till we
+had rested.  Then after bathing our faces, hands, and feet in the cold
+stream, we slowly journeyed to the hacienda.
+
+"Don't say a word about the cave, Tom," I said, as we neared home.
+
+"No, Mas'r Harry, not if you don't wish it," he rejoined, looking at me
+wonderingly.
+
+"I have a reason, Tom," I said.  "We can say that we have been
+exploring, and that will be true, and will satisfy them."
+
+"You ain't done with the cave yet, then, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"No, Tom," I said, "not yet."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY NINE.
+
+A QUESTION.
+
+The look I received from Lilla that evening was one which, while it
+reproached me, made my heart leap.  But all the same, I did not respond
+to it: I dared not; and I sat there answering my uncle's questions and
+telling him of our discovery of the ruined temple, but no more; while
+Garcia, who was present, smiled a contemptuous smile that was most
+galling.
+
+For that smile seemed to mean so much, and to say, "Look at this crazy
+vagabond, how he spends his time!"
+
+I was too weak and ill, though, to resent it, and gladly sought my bed,
+which I did not leave for a couple of days, being tended most
+affectionately during that time by Mrs Landell.
+
+We had made our entrance to the hacienda by night, as I had wished on
+account of our appearance, and it was well we did so, for an inspection
+of the clothes I had worn displayed such a scarecrow suit as would have
+ensured the closing of any respectable door in my face.
+
+But if, when I rose from my couch, my clothes were worn, so was not my
+spirit, and during the long hours I had lain there my brain had been as
+active as ever concerning the buried treasures.
+
+The terrors of the cave were great, certainly, but then I reasoned that
+three parts of them were due to ignorance.  Had we been acquainted with
+the geography of the place, as we were now, and taken common
+precautions, we might have saved ourselves the hairbreadth escapes and
+agony of mind that had so told upon us--we need not have risked our
+lives by the great gulf, nor yet in the vault of the troubled waters.
+With a short portable ladder and a knotted rope the ascent to the rift
+over the torrent in the great amphitheatre would have been easy.  And
+altogether it seemed to me that another visit, well prepared for, would
+not be either arduous or terrible.
+
+The visit, of course, would be to search for the treasure; and calm
+reflection seemed to teach me that it was very probable that we had now
+hit upon the part that appeared likely to have been used for the
+purpose--so I thought.  I could not feel that the timid, superstitious
+Indians would ever have penetrated so far as we did, but the soft earth
+of the bird-chamber seemed, after all, a most likely place.
+
+"What! going again, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom when I broached the subject.
+
+"Yes, Tom," I said; "I want to explore this bird-chamber part of the
+cave.  And besides, we need run no risks this time--we need not go into
+the terrible parts."
+
+"Very good, Mas'r Harry; only reck'lect about the pitcher as goes so
+often to the well getting broken at last."
+
+"But you'll go with me, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Go with you, Mas'r Harry?  Course I will!  I should just like to catch
+you going without me.  Don't you get coming none of them games."
+
+The result of this was that one morning, soon after sunrise, Tom and I
+were climbing over the rocks that barred the mouth of the cave.  We had
+plenty of provision and plenty of candle.  Each man, too, carried his
+own tinder-box and a small coil of knotted cotton rope, which served as
+a girdle, and so was not allowed to encumber our movements.
+
+Light-hearted and eager, I led the way, and we pushed right in past the
+rift on the ledge which led to the bird-chamber, for we were anxious to
+see what had become of our raft.
+
+It was just as I anticipated: we found it self-anchored between two
+blocks of stone within fifty yards of the tunnel-arch; and landing it,
+we cut the leather thongs, let out the wind, and then hid the whole
+affair behind some rocks--in case, as Tom said, we might want it again.
+
+A rest and a slight attack upon the provisions, and we were once more
+journeying towards the mouth, but only to pause in the chamber where lay
+the opening that had saved our lives.
+
+A little agility took us to the mouth of the rift; and now, candle in
+hand, we could see the passage through which we had travelled so
+laboriously, to find it the easiest of any crevice we had traversed, the
+floor being deeply covered with guano, as was the case with the
+bird-chamber when we entered it, at last, to find a vast hall of
+irregular shape, swarming with the guacharo, or butter-bird of South
+America--a great night-jar, passing its days in these fastnesses of
+nature, but sallying out at dark to feed.  The uproar they made was
+tremendous, and several times I thought that our lights would be
+extinguished, though we escaped that trouble and continued our search.
+
+The floor was nearly level, and the roof, like the others in the cave,
+covered with stalactites; but the birds and their nests completely
+robbed the place of beauty or grandeur.
+
+An hour spent here convinced me that we knew the two only passages
+leading from the place, so we continued our investigations, travelling
+along the farther passage till the sound of the great waterfall smote
+upon our ears, but still nothing rewarded our search though we went to
+the end.
+
+A passage of the most rugged nature, but a passage only, with nothing in
+the shape of branch or outlet save into the amphitheatre, into which we
+had no desire to penetrate.  Certainly the passage widened out into a
+chamber with glistening roof here and there, but with rocky floors, and
+presenting nothing striking as likely to reward my search.
+
+At the end of a couple of hours we were back in the bird-chamber (I
+continue to call the places by the names that first struck us as
+suitable), when we sat down for another rest and time of refreshing, for
+we had no peril to dread this time; and now, once more, I began to think
+over with damped spirits the possibility of finding what might have been
+here concealed.  Treasures, the wealth of nations, might have lain
+hidden for ages, with the guano continually accumulating to bury them
+deeper and deeper; but were they buried there?
+
+I would try and prove it, at all events; and rousing myself from my
+musing fit I took a sharp-pointed rod with which I had come provided,
+and began to probe the soil, Tom watching me earnestly the while.
+
+But nothing rewarded my endeavours.  I probed till I was tired, and then
+Tom took up the task, but always for the rod to go down as far as we
+liked in the soft, yielding earth.
+
+At last I told him to give up, for the possibility of success seemed out
+of the question.  Fatigue had robbed me of my sanguine thoughts, and
+wearily I led the way back to the mouth of the cave, and we again had a
+rest, Tom lighting his pipe, and I gladly seeking the solace of a doze.
+
+Rest and refreshment had their usual effect, and I was soon up again and
+at work with the rod, thrusting it down into the sand all over the
+place, till in one spot it struck upon something hard, and my heart
+leaped; but a little tapping of the hard matter showed that it was
+nothing but a mass of rock some four feet below the sand.
+
+I sat down again, hot and ill-tempered; when Tom tapped the ashes out of
+his pipe and stood before me.
+
+"Now, what is it you're really after, Mas'r Harry?" he said.  "Not gold,
+is it?  Why don't you be open with a fellow?"
+
+"What makes you ask, Tom?"  I said suspiciously.
+
+"Because they do say, Mas'r Harry, that the folks that used to live here
+got to bury their stuff, to keep it out of the Don's hands."
+
+Always the same tradition!  But I made no answer, for a fresh thought
+had struck me--one of those bright ideas that in all ages have been the
+making of men's fortunes; and, leaping up, I seized the rod and ran to
+where the stream, inky no longer, but clear and bright, ran sparkling in
+the subdued light over its sandy bed towards the open sunshine.
+
+Wading in, I turned up my sleeves and began to thrust my iron probe down
+here into the soft sand, for I had argued now like this: that after
+carefully considering where would be the best place to hide their
+treasure, the priests of old might have been cunning enough to think
+that the simpler the concealment the less likely for it to be searched,
+and thus with the dim mysterious caverns beyond offering all kinds of
+profundities--spots that could certainly be suspected--they might have
+chosen the open mouth of the Cave, and buried that which they sought to
+save in the bed of the little stream.
+
+The thought seemed to take away my breath for a few moments, it came so
+vividly; the next minute I was wading about, thrusting the rod down as
+far as I could in the wet sand; but always with the same result--the
+iron went down easily to my hand and was as easily withdrawn.
+
+I probed right in as I waded amongst the gloomy parts and then went on
+to where it became dark, but still I was not discouraged, but came
+slowly back towards where the barrier of rocks blocked the entrance,
+down beneath which the little stream plunged to reappear some yards on
+the other side; and here in the most open part of all, but screened from
+the sight of any one in the valley--here, where the water formed a
+little pool beneath the creeper-matted rocks, I gave the rod a hard
+thrust down as far as it could be driven, bending so that my shoulder
+was beneath the water, when my heart leaped and then beat tumultuously,
+for the rod touched something.  I tried again.
+
+Yes, there was something beneath the sand!
+
+Was it rock--stone?
+
+I tried again; tapping with the iron.
+
+No; it was not stone!
+
+Was it metal?
+
+I tried again, after examining the point of the rod, and this time drove
+it down fiercely.
+
+Yes, it was metal; but the question to solve was this--
+
+Was it gold?
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY.
+
+FOUND.
+
+My excitement was intense; and all dripping as I was with the icy water,
+I leaped out on to the sand with the intention of climbing over the
+barrier out into the bright sunshiny vale, to cut a long, thin bamboo
+with which to probe the sand in a more satisfactory manner.
+
+Then I stopped short, as the recollection of Tom's words flashed across
+my brain.  His surmises might be correct; and, cautious as we had been,
+watchers might have seen our goings and comings, while my stepping out
+into the vale now to cut a pole would show that I had some particular
+object in view.
+
+Another minute, though, and with my mind teeming with thoughts of rich
+ingots, plates, and vessels of gold, I began to consider as to what
+ought to be my next step.  Without testing further I felt that I had
+been successful--that a wonderful stroke of good fortune had rewarded my
+efforts; and then, how was I to dig it from its wet, sandy bed and get
+it safely to the hacienda?
+
+"Tom," I cried excitedly, "I have not spoken sooner lest you should
+think me an empty dreamer; but I have found that which I sought."
+
+"Sure, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"Well--a--well, yes, nearly, Tom," I stammered, somewhat taken aback by
+his coolness; "and now I want you to swear that you will take no unfair
+advantage of what you have seen or may see in the progress of this
+adventure."
+
+"Want me to do _what_, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom sturdily.
+
+"I want you to swear--"
+
+"Then I ain't a-going to swear, nor nothing of the kind; so you need not
+think it.  If I ain't worth trusting send me back; leastwise, you won't
+do that, because I sha'n't go.  But, howsoever, I ain't a-going to go
+swearing and taking oaths, and, there! be quiet!  Look there, Mas'r
+Harry.  Make him swear if you like.  No, not that way, more off to the
+left.  Turn your eye just past them three big trees by the lump of rock.
+That ain't a deer this time, but some one on the look-out.  Two on 'em,
+that there are!"
+
+I glanced in the pointed-out direction, to see plainly that a couple of
+Indian heads were strained towards us, as if their owners were narrowly
+watching for our appearance; though I knew from the gloom beneath the
+arch where Tom was seated that we must be invisible to any one standing
+out there in the glow of the bright afternoon sunshine.
+
+What did it mean?  Were these emissaries of Garcia watching my every
+act; or were they descendants of the Peruvian priests possessed of the
+secret of the buried treasures.
+
+I shrank back farther into the cavern to crouch down, Tom imitating my
+acts, and together we watched the watchers, who remained so motionless
+that at times I felt disposed to ask myself whether I had not been
+mistaken, and whether these were not a portion of one of the rocks.
+
+"It's no good, Mas'r Harry," said Tom; "we must make a rush for it.
+They'll stop there for a week, or till we go.  'Tain't nothing new;
+there's always some one after you; and if you've found anything I can't
+see how you're going to get it away.  Let's go now, before it gets
+evening, for they'll never move till we do."
+
+"But the--"
+
+"Well, they ain't obliged to know that we've found that, Mas'r Harry,"
+said Tom smiling.  "We don't know it ourselves yet.  What we've got to
+do is to play bold, shoot one or two of the birds as they dodge about
+farther in, then knock off a few of those pretty bits of white stone
+hanging from the roof, and they'll think that we've come after
+curiosities."
+
+Tom's advice was so sound that I led the way farther into the cave,
+where we made the place echo, as if about to fall upon our heads, as we
+had a couple of shots, each bringing down six of the guacharo birds.
+Then re-loading, we secured three handsome long stalactites, white and
+glittering, and thus burdened we took our departure, walking carelessly
+and laughing and examining our birds, Tom stopping coolly to light his
+pipe just as we were abreast of where we had seen the Indians.
+
+It was bold if the watchers' intentions were inimical, and we gave
+ourselves the credit of having thrown them off the scent, for we saw no
+more of them that evening; returning tired and excited to the hacienda
+to find my uncle quiet and cordial, for he seemed to be giving me the
+credit of trying to break myself off my inclination.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY ONE.
+
+THE HIDALGO'S DIGNITY UPSET.
+
+That night I forgot all past perils as I dreamed of gold--swimming in
+it--rolling in it--for it seemed to possess all the qualities of
+quicksilver, and whenever I tried to hold it or sweep it up it all
+escaped through my fingers.
+
+I woke at last with a start, with my chest heaving, and my face and
+limbs bathed with a cold, dank perspiration.
+
+As far as I could judge it wanted a couple of hours to daybreak; but I
+felt too much agitated to try and sleep again.  So rising and hurrying
+on my clothes, I sat there, hour after hour, thinking and planning my
+future course, for a night's rest had not weakened my convictions.
+
+The determination I came to at last was, that I could not do better than
+smother my impatience for a whole week; taking, the while, excursions in
+every other direction so as, if possible, to blind any one who made a
+study of my movements.  Then my journey to the cavern must be made by
+night, armed with spades, and taking with us a couple of mules to bring
+home the spoil.
+
+So I mused, little recking of what was to come, till the great golden
+sun rose from his glorious bed, when, after lying down an hour for the
+sake of the rest, I rose and sought for Tom, to find him indulging in
+that bad habit of his, a morning pipe; when I told him my plans, and
+also asked him if he thought that we ought to take my uncle into our
+confidence.
+
+"Not by no means, Mas'r Harry," he said.
+
+"I may depend on you, Tom, of course?"  I said, "Depend on me, Mas'r
+Harry?  Ah!  I should think so.  There never was nobody couldn't stick
+to no one no tighter than I'll stick to you.  There won't be no getting
+rid of me; so don't never think so no more.  What you say is quite
+right, and we'll wait a week.  If no one ain't touched that stuff for
+three hundred years they'll leave it alone another week.  I'll be on the
+look-out for a couple of mules and spades, and we'll go, like the forty
+thieves, to the enchanted cavern, eh, Mas'r Harry?  I'll get 'em, and
+we'll put them into the little wood under the mountain-side, eh? and
+keep 'em there till it's dark, when we'll start.  A week to-day, or a
+week to-morrow?"
+
+"A week to-day, Tom," I said; "and if you'll hang about here, I'll tell
+you what time we'll go for a shooting trip."
+
+We had a roam after breakfast, and then, returning to the mid-day meal,
+I spent some time about the plantation, when, feeling tired and overcome
+with the heat, I went into the house, lay down upon the couch in the
+darkened room, and, I suppose, from the effects of past fatigue, soon
+dropped off into a sound slumber.
+
+I have some recollection of hearing voices and a low, buzzing sound
+that, in my confused state, seemed somehow to be mixed up with gold.
+Then it was Lilla's beautiful golden hair, and I was seeing it spread
+out and floating once more upon the surface of the river.  Then I was
+wide awake, for I had heard Garcia's voice utter my name with an
+intensity of bitterness that made me shudder as I rose upon my elbow.
+
+"I tell you he goes to the Indian villages, where there are dark--
+skinned maidens.  I know it; and then he comes back here, pretending to
+be ill and tired with his travels."
+
+"It is not true!"  I heard Lilla exclaim angrily.  "And if he were here
+now--"
+
+"But he is not here now," said Garcia sneeringly.  "He has some
+assignation in the moonlit woods with one of his dark beauties, with
+fire-flies in her hair and flashing eyes, such as those cold-blooded
+Englishmen love."
+
+"It is false!" cried Lilla; "and if he were here you would not dare to
+say it."
+
+"Look here!" he said.  "I will be played with no longer.  I have been
+calm and patient while this English dog has come in here to insult and
+try to supplant me.  He has always been placed before me since the day
+he set foot in the plantation.  Your mother is my debtor, and you are
+promised to me.  Let there be any more of this trifling, and I will
+bring down ruin upon the place.  I have sued gently and tenderly, but it
+is useless.  Now I will show you that I am master; promise me now that
+you will speak to him no more, or--"
+
+I never knew what threat Garcia would have uttered for just then running
+forward I dashed out my clenched fist with all my might, and with a
+crash the Don went down over a chair just as my uncle and Mrs Landell
+ran into the room.
+
+"What does this mean?" exclaimed my uncle angrily, as Lilla ran,
+sobbing, to her mother.
+
+"He struck me!" cried Garcia furiously, as he scrambled up.  "He has
+insulted me--a hidalgo of Spain--and I'll have his blood!"
+
+"Better go and wash your face clear of your own," I said contemptuously,
+as I suffered from an intense longing to go and kick him.  "He was rude
+to my cousin, Uncle, and I knocked him down.  That's all."
+
+With a savage scowl upon his face Garcia made for the door, turned to
+shake his fist at me, and he was gone.
+
+"Hal," said my uncle gently--"Hal, my boy, I'd have given a year of my
+life sooner than this should have happened.  You don't know these
+half-blood Spaniards as I do.  You don't know _what_ mischief may befall
+us all through your rashness."
+
+"I wonder that you admit him to your house, Uncle!"  I exclaimed hotly,
+for anger was getting the better of discretion.
+
+I was sorry, though, the next minute; for, on hearing my words, my uncle
+glanced in a troubled way at his wife, who was trying to soothe poor
+weeping Lilla; while, during the next hour, I learned that I had had the
+misfortune to strike down the man who was my uncle's creditor to a large
+amount, as he had been Mrs Landell's, or they would not have allowed
+his attentions to Lilla.
+
+"I'm ashamed of it all, my boy," said my uncle; "but he holds our future
+entirely in his hands, and he looks for the receipt of Lilla's little
+dowry as part payment of the debts.  I've struggled very hard against
+ruin, Hal, and now it seems that it must come.  But after all, I don't
+know that I'm sorry, for it would have been a cruel thing--like selling
+that poor child.  But when a man is embarrassed as I am, what can he do?
+And besides, we both thought at one time that Lilla had a leaning
+towards him.  It was when he seemed to come forward generously with his
+money, which I was foolish enough to take.  But there, let it pass; and
+I repeat, mind, Hal, that I cannot allow matters to go on between you
+and Lilla.  All will be at an end with Garcia, I suppose, and we shall
+have to turn out; but I cannot encourage you.  I must begin again, I
+suppose."
+
+"Uncle," I said, "I am deeply grieved that my coming should work such
+evil in the place," for my anger had now evaporated.  "I ask your pardon
+for bringing such trouble upon your house.  I could not help loving
+Lilla; to see her was to do that; and even now, if I saw that fellow
+brutally using his strength against her, I should feel obliged to strike
+him."
+
+"Things must take their course, Harry," said my uncle; "and I don't know
+that, after all, I am very much grieved.  We have seen the man now in
+his true colours, and I learn that one of those colours is that which is
+worn by a coward.  But while you stay, Harry, beware!  Garcia has sworn
+that he'll have your blood, and he will!"
+
+"Yes, Uncle," I said quietly, "if he can!"
+
+"Just so, Harry; but take care."
+
+"I'll be on my guard, Uncle," I replied.
+
+And then I left him to go and think, my pulses throbbing as I thought of
+the exciting turn my adventures were taking--the event of the last
+hour--my discovery, if such it could be called; and I longed for the
+time when I could put it to the proof.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY TWO.
+
+NOT QUITE.
+
+The time glided on, and I saw no more of Garcia; but, all the same, I
+could not help feeling that this calm might portend a storm.
+
+My uncle was evidently very uneasy; but he said no more, merely
+proceeding with his business as usual, while with Tom I took trips here
+and there, making myself certainly now no burden, for we returned each
+evening loaded with game of some description--deer, fowl, or fish.
+
+The first two days I saw at different times that we were followed; but
+afterwards it seemed that the spies, self-constituted or not, had given
+up their task, and that we were free to roam the forest as we pleased.
+
+I grew hopeful upon making this discovery, and longingly looked forward
+for the night of our great adventure.
+
+It seemed as if that night would never come, but it came at last.
+
+Instead of going to my bed-room I stole out directly I had seen my uncle
+take his last cigar; and knowing that my absence would not be noticed, I
+made my way to the appointed place.
+
+It was excessively dark--a favourable omen, I thought; and on reaching
+the little wood there was Tom smoking his pipe, with the bowl inside his
+jacket, though, had the ruddy glow been seen at a distance, it might
+easily have been taken for the lanthorn of a fire-fly.
+
+"Seen any one, Tom?"  I whispered.
+
+"Not a soul, sir."
+
+"Have you got all we want?"
+
+"I believe you, Mas'r Harry.  Two spades, two mules, plenty to eat and
+drink, plenty of powder and lead, and coffee-bags enough--brand-new ones
+of your uncle's--to put in all the treasure we shall find."
+
+I could not see Tom's face, but I felt sure that he was indulging in a
+good grin.  However, I said nothing; but enjoining caution, we each took
+the bridle of a mule and began to thread our way cautiously amongst the
+trees, taking the precaution of setting off in an opposite direction to
+that we intended afterwards to pursue.
+
+It was a strange and a weird journey, but we went on hour after hour,
+and nothing molested us.  About midnight we halted to let the beasts
+graze for half an hour in a grassy vale, while we did what Tom called
+the same; our pasture being cake, and our drink spirit and water.
+
+Refreshed by our short halt, we again journeyed, and from time to time,
+after giving Tom the bridle of my mule, I stayed back to listen and try
+to discover whether we were followed; but, save the cry of some beast,
+there was nothing to be heard.
+
+About two hours after midnight we struck the little stream, and soon
+after were well in the ravine, when, for the purpose of exercising
+greater caution, and, as Tom said, running the risk of being stung, we
+each took the bridle of our mule over one arm and went down on all
+fours, crawling forward; and so slow was our progress that, were we
+watched and a glimpse of us obtained, I felt certain that we must be
+taken for a little herd slowly grazing towards the mouth of the great
+cavern.
+
+We reached the rocky pass at last, and then, muffling the feet of the
+mules with the coffee-bags, we took them cautiously on--the intelligent
+beasts clambering carefully and with hardly a sound--when we led them
+right in for some distance, gave them the maize we had brought, and then
+sat down in the darkness listening to their crunching of the grain and
+the loud cries of the guacharo birds as they flew in and out, fortifying
+ourselves the while with a hearty meal--Tom foregoing his pipe for
+reasons of cautious tendency.
+
+According to my calculations the day would break in about an hour's
+time; and during that hour, but always on the alert, we stretched
+ourselves upon the sand to rest, listening to every sound; for there was
+the possibility, we knew, of there being enemies, biped or quadruped,
+within a few yards of where we rested.
+
+Towards daybreak it turned intensely cold--colder than I could have
+imagined possible in a tropic land; but we were prepared to bear cold as
+well as danger, for a fire would, of course, have been inviting
+observation.
+
+Day at last; with a glorious flush of light reaching down the valley,
+and making the stalactites on the roof to glisten.  But our ideas now
+were bent on the object we had in view, and nature's magnificence was
+unnoticed.
+
+As soon as the light had penetrated sufficiently, we led the mules
+farther in, and secured them in the broad passage, so that they could
+reach the water of the stream; our next step being to creep cautiously
+to the rocky barrier, and, well sheltering ourselves, to watch long and
+carefully for some sign of spies.
+
+We did so for a full hour, but the silence of the place was even awful.
+Then the grey dawn brightened into the sweet fresh morning, with the
+heavy dew glistening in the sunshine as it dripped from the great tropic
+leaves--otherwise all was still; and convinced at length that those who
+had hitherto dogged our steps had for this time been eluded, I made a
+sign to Tom; and going in about fifty yards, we seized our spades and
+began to throw the light soil and sand into the bed of the little
+stream, shovelful after shovelful, so as to form a dam, which was at
+first washed down nearly as fast as we piled it up; but at last our
+efforts were successful, and the dammed-up water began to flow aside,
+cutting for itself a new channel through the sand, and making its exit a
+few feet nearer the rocky barrier, but taking up its former course on
+the other side.
+
+We rested then for a few minutes, faint and hot; but the excitement of
+the quest took from us the sense of fatigue, for the water had all
+drained away from the bed of the stream, and the little pool close under
+the rocky barrier now presented the appearance of a depression whose
+bottom was covered with a beautifully clean sand.
+
+I had come provided this time with a longer rod, and, taking it in my
+trembling hands, I stood for a few moments upon the sand, anxious, but
+dreading to force it down lest it should be to prove that I had been
+deceived by my over-sanguine nature.
+
+Then, rousing myself, I thrust the rod down, when, at the depth of four
+feet, it came in contact with some obstacle.
+
+Drawing it up I tried again and again, Tom eagerly watching the while,
+as I proved to a certainty that there was something buried in the sand,
+extending over a space of about three feet by two, while elsewhere I
+could force the rod down to the depth of over five feet without let or
+hindrance.
+
+"Try yourself, Tom," I said hoarsely, as I passed to him the rod, which
+he seized eagerly, and thrust down; while trembling with excitement I
+cautiously climbed the barrier, beneath which lay the hole, and peered
+over the rocks into the valley.
+
+Not a leaf moving--all hot and still in the morning sun; and I returned
+to Tom.
+
+"Well?"  I said eagerly.
+
+"Well," echoed Tom; "I should think it is well!  There _is_ something
+buried here, Mas'r Harry, and it ain't rocks, nor stones, nor wood.  I
+fancy it's a lead coffin, for it feels like it with the point of the
+rod."
+
+"Nonsense!"  I said impatiently.  "There would be no lead coffins here,
+Tom."
+
+"We'll see, anyhow, Mas'r Harry," he exclaimed.  And seizing a spade he
+began to hurl the sand out furiously.  "There's a something down here,
+that's certain," he panted out between the spadefuls, "but what it is
+goodness knows.  All I can say is that it's a something."
+
+"Let me come too, Tom," I cried excitedly.
+
+"No, I shan't, Mas'r Harry!" he exclaimed.  "There ain't room for both
+of us to work at once, and we shall only be tripping one another up.
+Let me work a spell, and then you can take a turn."
+
+Tom dug away at a tremendous rate, the wet sand cutting out firmly and
+easily, and soon the hole grew deep and wide, when, suddenly resting,
+Tom looked up at me.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," he said, just as I leaped down into the hole, "go
+and see if there's anybody coming."
+
+"No," I said, looking at him suspiciously; "go you."
+
+"Course I will, Mas'r Harry!" he exclaimed.  "But say, what a s'picious
+sort of a fellow you do get."
+
+Then, jumping out, he took his turn at inspecting the ravine, peering
+cautiously through the creepers that covered the rocks, while I toiled
+hard at the spade, throwing up the wet sand.
+
+"Don't throw no more this side, Mas'r Harry," said Tom on his return.
+"Pitch it the other way.  It's been falling into the water and making it
+thick, so as it will go running down and telling everybody as we're at
+work in here."
+
+Tom's words made me leap out of the hole.
+
+"Gracious, Tom!"  I exclaimed, "what a fool I am!"
+
+"Well, Mas'r Harry," said Tom bluntly, "I did think as you was just now,
+over that s'picion o' yourn; but as to throwing the sand into the water,
+why, one can't foresee everything.  I don't think there's any harm done,
+though."
+
+"I beg your pardon, Tom," I exclaimed, holding out my hand, "it was
+ungenerous."
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," he said, taking my hand awkwardly, as if I had
+given him something to look at, and then he seemed to give it to me back
+again, when, once more turning to our task, we threw out the sand close
+under the rocky barrier, and it was well we did so, as will be seen in
+the end.
+
+"There's something here.  I can feel it with my spade, Mas'r Harry,"
+exclaimed Tom suddenly.
+
+And then, moved by the same tremulous nervous feeling as myself, he
+leapt out, and together we once more searched the vale with our eyes, to
+see nothing, though, but the same flagging leaves and the quivering
+motion of the bright transparent air.  But as we descended once more, a
+snorting, whinnying noise from the mules came from within, and in our
+excitement and alarm we were about to thrust in the sand again to bury
+our treasure, only reason told us of the folly of the act.
+
+Spade in hand we ran into the gloom, and followed the winding of the
+track to where the mules were tethered, to find them uneasy and
+straining at their halters, as if something had alarmed them.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY THREE.
+
+MICA OR GOLD.
+
+"Ah! there's some one about, Mas'r Harry, I'm 'fear'd," whispered Tom.
+"I wish we'd covered the stuff up again.  What do you say to taking a
+light and going right in?"
+
+Tom's advice seemed so sensible that we ran back, fetched a candle and
+the matches, got a light, and then carefully examined the cave, peering
+wherever it seemed possible for any one to hide.
+
+But our search was in vain, though we penetrated right to the point on
+the great gulf, and peered into the dark arch.  As far as we could see
+all was silent, solemn, and grand, and we had nothing to fear from
+behind us while we worked.
+
+"Well, it's been a deal of bother, Mas'r Harry; but it's better than
+thinking every moment that there's some one going to jump out on you."
+
+The mules were quiet as we passed them on our way back, and we then
+inspected the valley from the spot we called our observatory, but all
+was still; and hastily seizing a spade, I was once more digging away,
+Tom casting aside the sand I threw out.
+
+The edge of the spade touched something now every time I thrust it in.
+I had but to stoop and force in my fingers to feel the buried object;
+but moved by that spirit which induces people to examine so carefully
+the outside of a strange letter, when the interior is at their disposal,
+I feasted expectancy for a few minutes longer, telling myself that I
+would carefully clear out all the sand before I tried to ascertain what
+our treasure might be.
+
+That was an exciting period, and I can picture it all even now: the
+great cave, with its vast arch protruding right over the barrier, so
+that we were toiling in the shadow of the huge vault, filled by day with
+an ever-deepening golden mellow gloom--a gloom deepening into blackness
+in the far depths; the trickling water, fresh from its mysterious source
+in the great amphitheatre; our splashed and stained figures, toiling
+together now in the pit we had dug; and the friendly scuffle which took
+place when, the sand being well cleared out, Tom stooped, but only to be
+arrested by my hand.
+
+"No," I exclaimed, "let me, Tom!"
+
+Then, with painfully throbbing heart I bent down, the blood seeming to
+flush to my head so as to nearly blind me.
+
+The next moment my fingers were groping about amongst the sand and
+water.
+
+"Be quick, Mas'r Harry, please, or I shall bust!" cried Tom, just as my
+fingers encountered something hard.
+
+With a cry of joy I rose up, to exhibit to the staring eyes of Tom Bulk
+a glittering yellow stone.
+
+"Gold, Tom--gold!"  I exclaimed.  "And here's more and more!"
+
+I stooped down, to bring up two, three, four more lumps of the same
+glittering yellow stone.
+
+"No, 'tain't, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, gruffly, as he turned over one of
+the fragments in his hand.  "That ain't gold at all; that's what they
+calls mica.  I allers reclect the name, cause it's the same as one of
+the prophets we used to read about at school.  You might get plenty of
+that in the rocks, without much trouble.  It's just the same stuff as
+some mates of mine once got out of a gravel pit at home, and they took
+it to the watchmaker in the town, and they says to him, `What's that
+gold worth?' they says.  `Which gold?' he says.  `Why, that,' they says.
+`That's no more gold than you are,' he says; `that's mica.'  And then
+he told them that they might allers tell gold in a moment, by pulling
+out a knife and trying to cut it, when if it was gold it would cut easy
+like, just the same as a piece of lead.  Try that, Mas'r Harry."
+
+Snatching out my knife, I cut at one of the pieces of yellow stone, to
+find it splinter under the keen edge of my blade.
+
+"I'll swear, though, that the pynt of that rod hit something else
+besides them bits of stone, Mas'r Harry.  Try again; or, no--let me
+try."
+
+The disappointment was so keen, that for a few moments I was speechless,
+and offered no opposition to Tom, who began to grope about with both
+hands to bring up dozens more pieces of the micaceous rock, and then a
+piece of flint that seemed to have been chipped into shape, and then a
+long obsidian blade.
+
+"We're a-coming to something after all, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "Here's
+a cur'osity, and here--here--here's--pah!  I don't like handling them."
+
+As he spoke, Tom held out to my view three or four blackened bones,
+which he threw down again amongst the sand and water at the bottom.
+
+"We shall come to the leaden coffin after all, Mas'r Harry," he said.
+"This has been a berryin' place after a fight, p'r'aps; but is it worth
+while to disturb it?"
+
+I did not answer, for my attention had been taken up by a slight sound
+towards the interior of the cave.
+
+"Here, quick, Tom!"  I exclaimed.
+
+He leaped out in an instant, just as, with a fierce rush, the pent-up
+water conquered our little dam, took to its old bed, and swept down sand
+and soil, filling up our pit in a few minutes as it bore all before it,
+and then subsided quietly into its former course, the sand sucking up
+the moisture where it had levelled; and to a casual observer the cave
+seemed as if it had been untouched for ages.
+
+"Well that's pleasant, certainly," said Tom coolly; "but 'taint so bad
+as it might have been.  We haven't got wet.  Never mind, Mas'r Harry,
+we'll have it out again by-and-by.  There's more in that hole yet than
+we have seen.  Them bits of yaller stuff weren't put in for nothing.
+But let's go up again to the prog and have a good feed before we begin
+again; and, suppose you bring your spade?"
+
+I followed Tom mechanically, spade in hand, to where, behind a mass of
+rock, we had made our storehouse, and seating ourselves in the gloomy
+shade I was busily opening my wallet, when Tom, who was getting some
+maize for the mules, suddenly pressed my shoulder and pointing in the
+direction of the cave's mouth, I heard him whisper the one word:
+
+"Look!"
+
+I looked, with my eyes seeming to be glued to the spot, as slowly there
+appeared above the rugged line formed by the top of the rocky barrier a
+human head, another, and another, with intervals of a dozen yards
+between each; and then they remained motionless, gazing straight forward
+into the great cavern.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR.
+
+OUR WORK RENEWED.
+
+Could they see us, or could they not?
+
+It was a hard trial sitting there motionless, wondering whether those
+eager, searching eyes could penetrate as far through the gloom as where
+we sat.  It seemed they could not, as, for full ten minutes, their
+owners rested there peering over the massive rocks.
+
+The least movement on our part, a whinny or a snort from the mules,
+would have been sufficient to have betrayed our whereabouts, and
+bloodshed would, perhaps, have followed; but all remained still, save
+once, when I heard Tom's gun-lock give a faint click just as first one
+and then another head was being withdrawn.
+
+"There, Mas'r Harry," said Tom in a whisper.  "What do you think of
+that?  They're on the look-out for us you see.  And we got grumbling
+about the little dam breaking, when what did it break to do?  Why, to
+smooth over the rough work we had done, so as those copper-coloured
+gentlemen shouldn't see it and make a row.  But, say Mas'r Harry, I
+a'most wonder they didn't see the water look thick.  P'r'aps they will
+yet, so I wouldn't move."
+
+Tom's advice was so good that we sat for quite a couple of hours, when I
+told him of the plans I had made.
+
+"Tom," I said, "it was an act of folly for us to be working there
+without one of us watching.  I tell you what we must do, we must rest
+till it begins to grow dusk, and then begin working in the dark.  Do you
+see?"
+
+"Well, I can see now, Mas'r Harry," said Tom grinning; "but I don't see
+how I'm going to see then.  How so be: just as you like.  I'm ready when
+you are."
+
+The afternoon passed, the sun disappeared behind the mountains, and the
+dark shadows began to fall, just as with a loud shriek bird after bird
+winged its way out of the cavern for its nightly quest of food.  We
+stole to the barrier, looked long and cautiously down the valley, and
+then set to work in the dim and fast-fading light to dam the stream--
+this time taking the precaution to lay lumps of rock and stalactites in
+the bed to support our embankment of sand and earth; when once more the
+stream took another course, the bed was dry, and in silence we stepped
+down to the site of our former labours.
+
+I was not so sanguine now of the toil proving remunerative; but from the
+little knowledge I possessed of the Indian's superstitious character I
+felt pretty sure that they would not venture by night to a cavern whose
+interior was clothed by them with endless mysterious terrors, though it
+possessed terrors enough, as we well knew, without the aid of
+superstition.  But all the same, there was the chance of others having
+an object in watching us, so every spadeful was thrown out in silence,
+every word spoken in a whisper.  The night came on impenetrably black
+and obscure, but we worked on, feeling our way lower and lower, taking
+turn and turn, till once more we stood in the pit we had dug, and
+commenced groping about with our hands, for the spades told us that we
+had come to whatever was buried.
+
+"More of these yaller stones," said Tom.
+
+We threw out as quietly as we could a couple of hundred rough lumps
+about the size of those fragments of granite used for macadamising a
+modern road.
+
+"Tom," I said, after trying about with my spade, "there's something more
+here.  I believe those pieces were put in to deceive whoever searched."
+
+"Let me clear out a little more of the sand, Mas'r Harry."
+
+He threw out a few more spadefuls, filling the spade each time with his
+hands so as to throw out nothing more than sand; and then once more we
+began to feel about.
+
+"What's that, Tom?"  I whispered hastily.
+
+I knew by his exclamation that he had found something particular.
+
+"Nothin' at all," said Tom sulkily.
+
+"I insist upon knowing what it is," I cried angrily, as I caught him by
+the arm.
+
+For--it must have been the influence of the gold--I again felt
+suspicious.
+
+"There it is, then," said Tom gruffly, "ketch hold."
+
+I eagerly took that which he had handed to me, and then with a shudder
+of disgust hurled it away, as the gravedigger scene in "Hamlet" flashed
+across my mind; and then we worked on in silence.
+
+"Bones," said Tom, "flint-knife things, and, hallo! what's that you've
+got, Mas'r Harry?" he exclaimed in a sharp whisper.
+
+In my turn I had uttered an exclamation as my hands came in contact with
+a flat heavy piece of metal, which, upon being balanced upon a finger
+and tapped, gave forth a sonorous ring.
+
+"I don't know, Tom," I whispered huskily, "but--but it feels like what
+we are in search of."
+
+"Do you think it is gold, Mas'r Harry?" he hissed in a voice that told
+of his own excitement.
+
+"Gold or silver, Tom," I said in a choking voice.
+
+Then I felt faint.  Suspicions of a horrible nature seemed to float
+across my brain.  "Suppose," I thought, "Tom should murder me now to
+possess himself of the treasure, load the mules, and then bury me in the
+grave we had dug.  The water would flow over it again in a few hours,
+and who would ever suspect the man who went away laden with wealth?"
+
+The next moment, though, I had driven away the base thoughts, and was
+leaning against the rock above me.
+
+"Tom," I said, "I'm faint; go and fetch the spirits."
+
+"I will that, Mas'r Harry," he whispered, "for I don't know how it is,
+I'm feeling rather queer myself.  It's this stuff, I think.  I've got
+hold of one of these little tiles, and one can't see it, but it feels
+yaller."
+
+Tom passed another plate into my hands, when running my fingers over it
+my heart beat more rapidly, for I could feel an embossed surface that
+told of cunning work, and I longed intensely to get a light and examine
+what we had found though I knew such a proceeding would be folly.
+
+In a few minutes Tom was back, and a draught from the bottle we had
+brought revived us, so that we quickly cleared out the wet sand and
+water that kept filtering in, and then as fast as we could grope drew
+out plate after plate and placed them in one of the coffee-bags Tom had
+brought.
+
+We did not need telling that it was gold.  The sonorous ring told that
+as plate touched plate.  The darkness, as I said, was intense.  But I
+could almost fancy that a bright yellow phosphorescent halo was spread
+around each plate as we drew it from its sandy bed.
+
+"But suppose, Mas'r Harry, as it's only brass?" whispered Tom suddenly.
+
+"Brass, Tom?  No, it's gold--rich, yellow gold; and now who dares say
+I'm a beggar?"
+
+"Not me, Mas'r Harry.  But I won't believe it's gold till I've seen it
+by daylight.  'Tain't lead, or it wouldn't ring.  'Tain't iron, for it
+will cut.  I've been trying it."
+
+"Hush, Tom!"  I said hoarsely.  "Work--work! or it will be day, and we
+shall be discovered."
+
+As I spoke I bent down into the hole to drag out what felt like a vase,
+but all beaten in and flattened.  Then another, and four or five
+curiously shaped vessels.
+
+"Fetch another bag, Tom," I whispered; for the one we now had felt
+heavy, and I wanted them to be portable.
+
+"Wait a bit, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom.  "Here's a rum un here--big as
+a table top.  Lend a hand, will you."
+
+Both trembling with excitement we toiled and strained, and at last
+extricated a great flat circular plate that seemed to weigh forty or
+fifty pounds, and stood it against the rock.
+
+And now in the wild thirst I forgot all about bags or concealment as we
+kept scraping out the sand and water, and then brought out more plates,
+more cups, thin flat sheets, bars of the thickness of a finger and six
+inches long.  Then another great round disc similar to the one I had
+dragged out with Tom; and then--then--sand--water--sand--water--sand--
+one solitary plate.
+
+"There must be more, Tom!"  I whispered excitedly.  "Where is the rod?"
+
+He felt about for a few minutes, and I heard the metal clinking upon
+metal as he drew the iron rod towards him.  Then, feeling for the
+pointed end, he thrust it down here and there again and again.
+
+"Try you, Mas'r Harry," he said huskily.
+
+I took the rod, and felt with it all over the pit; but everywhere it ran
+down easily into the sand, and I felt that we must have got all there
+was hidden there.  And now, for the first time, I began to think of the
+value.  Why, if this were all pure gold that lay piled-up by our side,
+there must be thousands upon thousands of pounds' worth--twenty
+thousands at the least.  But a pang shot through my brain the next
+instant, for the thought had struck me, suppose it should prove but
+copper after all.
+
+The day would show it, and the day I hoped would soon be there.  But now
+a new trouble assailed me.  What about Tom--what share would he expect?
+
+"Mas'r Harry," said Tom just then, "if this here all turns out to be
+gold you'll be a rich man, won't you?"
+
+"Yes, Tom," I said, "very wealthy."
+
+My words would hardly leave my lips.  "Then you'll do the handsome thing
+by me when I get married, won't you, Mas'r Harry?"
+
+"What shall I do, Tom?"  I said, wondering the while what he would say.
+
+"'Low me a pound a week and my 'bacco as long as I live."
+
+"Yes, Tom, two if you like," I exclaimed aloud.  "But now lend a hand
+here and let's get these behind the rock farther in."
+
+Fatigue!  We never gave that a thought, as, each seizing one of the
+round shields, we carried them cautiously in and felt our way to where
+was the food, taking back with us more of the coffee-bags, in which we
+carefully packed the flattened cups, and each bore back a heavy bag, but
+only hastily to return again and again to collect the plates, and
+sheets, and bars we had rapidly thrown out; when we returned once more
+to throw ourselves upon the sand and feel over it with our hands again
+and again, creeping in every direction, forcing in our fingers and
+running the sand through them till we felt certain that nothing was left
+behind.
+
+"Now, then, Tom," I said.  "Quick!--the spades.  There must not be a
+trace of this night's work left at daybreak."
+
+Tom's hard breathing was the only response, as, seizing his spade and
+giving me mine, he forced back the sand, helping me to shovel it in
+until the floor was once more pretty level, and we knew the water would
+do the rest, even to removing the traces of our running to and fro,
+unless the sharp Indian eye should be applied closely to the floor of
+the cavern.
+
+We toiled on, working furiously in our excitement, feeling about so as
+to compensate as well as we could for the want of sight, till I knew
+that no more could be done, when, retreating inward to where we had
+dammed the stream, we let the water flow swiftly back into its old
+channel, leaving the bits of rock where they were, save one or two whose
+loosening soon set the water free, so that it swept with a rush over the
+place where we had so lately toiled; and then, dripping with
+perspiration and water, we went and sat down to eat and rest just as the
+first faint streaks of dawn began to show in the valley, and we could
+see that there was a barrier across the mouth of the cave.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE.
+
+EXCITING TIMES.
+
+Light--more light, but still not enough to tell of what our treasure was
+composed.  If we had been at the mouth of the cave it would have been,
+possible, but where we were the darkness was still thick darkness.
+
+Twice I had impatiently gazed at the metal I had been fingering with all
+a miser's avidity, when my attention was taken by an object upon a rock
+close by where we had worked during the night--a toil that I had been
+ready to declare a dream, time after time, but for the solid reality
+beneath my hands.
+
+Tom caught sight of the object at the same moment as myself; and
+together, moved by the same impulse, we raced down, secured it, and then
+ran panting back with a gloriously-worked but battered _golden_ cup,
+that we had placed upon the rock above us, and which had thus escaped
+our search.
+
+The next minute we were gazing tremblingly back to see whether we had
+been observed, for to lose now the wondrous treasure in our grasp seemed
+unbearable.
+
+But no--all was still; and, for my part, I could do nothing but pant
+with excitement as the truth dawned more upon me with the coming day,
+that I was by this one stroke immensely rich.  The treasure was gold--
+rich, ruddy gold, all save one of the great round shields, and that was
+of massive silver, black almost as ink with tarnish; while its
+fellow-shield--a sun, as I now saw, as I afterwards made out the other
+to be a representation of the moon--was of the richer metal.
+
+I was right, then--Garcia could be set at defiance, my uncle freed.  But
+it was all too good to be true; and that little If thrust itself into my
+thoughts--that little If that has so much to do with our lives.
+
+_If_ I could get the gold safely away!
+
+My brow knit as I thought of this, and my hand closed involuntarily upon
+the gun; but directly after I felt that we must bestir ourselves to pack
+our treasure safely.
+
+"Let us have something by way of breakfast, Tom," I said hastily, after
+throwing my coat over the part of the treasure visible.
+
+We ate as people eat whose thoughts are upon other things, till we were
+roused by a whinnying from the interior of the cave, when Tom hastily
+carried some maize to the mules so as to ensure their silence in case of
+the Indians again approaching the place.
+
+As far as I could make out from the obscurity where I was there was not
+a trace of the sand having been disturbed--the water had removed it all;
+but I trembled as I thought of the consequences of some Indian eye
+having seen the golden vessel, for I knew that we should never have been
+allowed to return alive.
+
+My plans now were to spend a portion of the day in carefully packing our
+treasure as compactly as possible, and then, when night had well fallen,
+loading the mules and making the best of our way to the hacienda--easy
+practicable plans apparently; but Fate declared that I had not yet
+earned the wealth.
+
+I said that Tom had gone to see about the mules, and for a few minutes I
+was hesitating about the nearest bag to me--one which, from the feel,
+contained a mixture of bars, plates, and cups, that I knew might be
+packed in a quarter the space.
+
+I looked to the mouth of the cave; all was sunshine there; but it was
+dark where I stood, and feeling that if the task of packing was to be
+done, the sooner it was set about the better, I seized the bag, drew out
+a large and massive vessel, two or three plates that must have formed a
+part of the covering of some barbaric altar, and was about to draw forth
+more, when I heard a faint noise, and, turning, Tom sprang upon me with
+a fierce look in his countenance, bore me down amongst the treasure, and
+laid his hand upon my mouth.  His whole weight was upon me, and he had
+me in such a position that all struggling seemed vain; but with the
+thought strong upon me that the temptation of the gold had been too much
+for him, and that as some victim had evidently been sacrificed at its
+burial I was to fall at its disinterring, I bowed myself up, and the
+next moment should have endeavoured to throw him off, had not his lips
+been applied to my ear and a few words been whispered which sent the
+blood flowing, frightened, back to my heart, as the full extent of their
+meaning came home.
+
+"Mas'r Harry, don't move: you're watched!"
+
+It was no time for speaking, and I was in such a position that I could
+not see, while for quite a quarter of an hour we lay there motionless,
+when, gliding aside, Tom made room for me to rise, pointing the while
+towards the mouth of the cave, through which I could see, some distance
+down the ravine, a couple of Indians curiously peering about, and more
+than once stooping cautiously over the little stream which there ran,
+half-hidden by rocks and undergrowth.
+
+"They're looking to see if the water's muddy, Mas'r Harry," whispered
+Tom.  And then, directly after, "Creep back a little more behind the
+rock here; they're coming this way again."
+
+What! step back and leave the treasure?  No, I felt that I could not do
+that, but that I would sooner fight for it to the last gasp.
+
+Tom was right, though.  The Indians were coming nearer, disappearing at
+length behind the rocks at the mouth as they came cautiously on; and I
+lay down flat upon my face to watch for their appearance above the
+barrier when they began to climb it, Tom retiring the while farther into
+the cavern.
+
+Two men, not such odds as need give us fear if we were compelled to
+fight; for after the pains to attain the treasure, it seemed impossible
+to resign it.  My conscience would not teach me any wrong-doing in its
+appropriation.
+
+Ten minutes elapsed, and the Indians did not appear; but it was plain
+enough that they knew of the treasure's existence, and watched over its
+safety.  But had they seen us come?
+
+I thought not, as at last they came slowly up, looking from side to
+side, as if in search of intruders; and my heart beat with a heavy
+excited throb as I thought of the discovery, and the inevitable struggle
+to follow.  Who would be slain I wondered.  Should I escape?  And then I
+shuddered as I pictured the bloodshed that might ensue.
+
+And all this time nearer came the Indians, until they stood amongst the
+blocks of stone, peering eagerly in, and shading their eyes to pierce
+the darkness.
+
+For a few minutes it seemed to me that they must see that the soil had
+been disturbed, or else make out my crouching form; but it soon became
+evident that they saw nothing--that the cavern presented no unusual
+aspect.  As far, too, as I could make out, there was an evident
+unwillingness to enter, as if the place possessed some sanctity or dread
+which kept them from passing its portals.
+
+They seemed to be content with watching and listening; but would they
+keep to that?
+
+I thought not; for suddenly my breath came thickly, as I saw one of the
+men make a sign or two to his companion, and then begin cautiously to
+descend into the cavern; when, nerving myself for the struggle, I
+stretched out my hand for my knife and pistols, determined to fight to
+the death for that which I had won.
+
+Cautiously, and in a peculiarly shrinking fashion, the Indian climbed
+down, while his companion leaned anxiously forward.  Then followed
+moments of suspense that seemed hours, as the man who now stood beneath
+the arch stretched forth both hands, as if invoking some power, uttered
+a few words, and then stopped short, for his companion gave a loud
+peculiar cry, and I saw that he was anxiously gazing down the ravine,
+when the first Indian hurriedly joined him, and, together, they glided
+silently away.
+
+"That was a close shave, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, creeping softly
+forward, gun in hand.  "That poor chap didn't know what a risk he run of
+being dead and buried.  I had him covered with my gun the whole time;
+and if he'd made at you with his knife, down he must have gone."
+
+"I want the gold, Tom," I said hoarsely, "but no bloodshed."
+
+"More don't I, Mas'r Harry," he replied; "so all they've got to do is to
+leave us alone, and alone we'll leave them.  Now, what's to be done
+next?"
+
+That was plain enough, and needed no answering.  The treasure had to be
+carefully packed; and together we worked hard, fitting the plates, bars,
+and tile-shaped pieces together in the bags, so that they should occupy
+as little space as possible, binding together and covering the two great
+discs, and then packing the vases and cups, the most awkward part of our
+discovery; but at last we had all in the ample supply of coffee-bags Tom
+had brought, and bound round and round with the cotton ropes which we
+unravelled for the purpose.
+
+I breathed more freely as one by one we carried our heavy,
+awkward-looking packages into the part of the cave where the mules were,
+and then laid them behind a rock in the dark vault, ready for the
+night's journey.
+
+"And now," said Tom, "we'd better take it in turns to have a good sleep,
+the other keeping watch--for we shall be up all night again."
+
+I turned round to Tom, to stare with astonishment at the man who could
+talk so coolly about sleep with such a treasure beneath his charge.  As
+for me, my veins throbbed with the fever that coursed through them, and
+I could not have closed my eyes for an instant till I had my treasure in
+safety.
+
+"Will you take first turn, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom, yawning.
+
+"No," I said peevishly; "you can sleep if you wish to."
+
+"Well, Mas'r Harry, I do wish to," said Tom; "and that ain't nowise
+wonderful, when I was hard at work all lars night."
+
+Tom made no more ado, but stretched himself out in the sandiest spot he
+could find; and the next minute there could not be a doubt as to the
+state he was in, for he snored loudly.
+
+Judging from appearances, when I once more walked, gun in hand, towards
+the mouth of the cave, it was about four o'clock, so that there were at
+least five or six hours to pass before we could attempt our homeward
+journey.
+
+I did not dare to go far towards the mouth, lest there should be
+watchers there; but picking out the best spot for observation, I stood
+and gazed eagerly around, scanning every crag, tree, and bush within
+range, in the search I made for enemies.
+
+If I could only get the treasure safely to the hacienda, we could melt
+it down there, and turn it into ingots handy for packing; when, with the
+offer of ample for the purchase of a good farm, I could, perhaps,
+persuade my uncle to return to England, or, if he preferred, he might
+stay here.
+
+Then I thought again whether it would be wisdom to attempt to carry off
+the treasure by night, we two alone to guard it.  I stood, hesitating,
+thinking of how easy it it would be for the Indians to take us at a
+disadvantage; of what an insecure place the plantation would be should
+they discover that the treasure was gone; and at last I made up my mind
+as to my course, and walked sharply back to where Tom was snoring.
+
+Then, stooping down, I unfastened the package which contained the little
+bars, took out fifty, and secured the package again; when I shook and
+roused up Tom.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY SIX.
+
+ANOTHER ENCOUNTER.
+
+"Right, Mas'r Harry, I'm here," he exclaimed.
+
+"Put half those about you in your different pockets, Tom," I said.  And
+he did as he was bid, handling the little ingots as if they were so much
+lead.  "And, Tom, I want your advice.  I've come to the conclusion that
+it is not prudent to take all this through the woods at night, with
+Indians about."
+
+"That's sense, that is," said Tom, interrupting.
+
+"I think, Tom, we'll hide it--all but this, which we'll take back; and
+then we can come well prepared some other time, to carry the rest away."
+
+"Good, Mas'r Harry; but where'll we hide it?"
+
+"That's what I'm thinking, Tom," I said.  "Where do you think would be a
+good place?"
+
+"Well, Mas'r Harry, I shouldn't bury it, because that's the way it was
+hidden afore; nor I wouldn't chuck it down the big gulf place, as you
+call it; it would be safe enough, only we couldn't get it again."
+
+"Don't fool, Tom," I said impatiently.
+
+"Who's a fooling?" said Tom gruffly.  "Tell you what, Mas'r Harry, I
+don't think those Indian chaps would ever have the pluck to go right in
+where we've been.  What do you think of the way under the arch on the
+raft?"
+
+"The very idea that struck me, Tom," I said.
+
+Then I told him my plans--the result being that, at the end of a couple
+of hours, the little raft was prepared, launched, laden with our
+packages, and once more, with candles stuck in their clay sticks, we
+were poling ourselves along very slowly in the black tunnel.
+
+The lights flashed on roof, and from off the water, which rippled over
+the bamboos and soaked us through and through; but we pressed slowly and
+steadily on till we must have been half-way to the vault of the troubled
+waters, when I whispered to Tom to stop.
+
+We were now in a part where the tunnel widened out to thirty or forty
+feet, though the roof was not more than a foot above our heads, and
+remarkable for the streaks of a creamy spar which banded it in every
+direction.
+
+"Tom," I said in a whisper, as I glanced round to see that we were
+alone, "could we do better than this?"
+
+As I spoke I was trying the depth with my bamboo pole, to find that,
+wherever I reached, there was not more than five feet of water.
+
+"But suppose it's that shivering sand, and it swallers it up, Mas'r
+Harry?"
+
+"But it's hard rock, Tom.  Feel," I whispered.
+
+There was no mistaking the firmness of the bottom; so, carefully marking
+the spot by a cross which I scored on the roof with my knife, we softly
+dropped in six golden packages over the side of our little raft, which
+seemed ready to leap out of the water on being released from its heavy
+burden.
+
+A soft gentle splash in each case, and then the black waters closed over
+each package, a pang striking my heart as they disappeared; and I asked
+myself whether I was wise, now that I had gained the object of my
+search, to let it go from me again like that.  I was roused, though,
+from my reverie by Tom, who generally had a word of encouragement for me
+at the blackest times.
+
+"There, Mas'r Harry, that's covered up well, and it can be easily
+uncovered again; and I'll lay my head agin a halfpenny apple, that if we
+don't come to fetch that there, nobody else won't; for unless we told,
+nobody wouldn't never find it."
+
+I could not help thinking that Tom was right; and now, with my treasure
+found, and, as it were, banked for my use, I felt lighter of spirit, and
+we floated easily back in about the quarter of the time occupied in
+going; when, carefully taking our raft once more partly to pieces, we
+concealed it behind the rocks, and made the best of our way to the
+mules.
+
+"Now, Mas'r Harry, you may do as you like; but I say, let's get twenty
+or thirty of these stone icicles, just as if we'd come on purpose to
+fetch 'em, pack 'em atop of the mules, and ride bang out as if we were
+not afraid of anybody."
+
+It was good counsel, and I followed it, riding over the stony barrier
+just as the sun was setting.  The stalactites were swung in coffee-bags
+on either side of the mules, which, delighted at being once more in the
+open air, cantered off merrily whenever the track would allow.
+
+It was just beginning to grow dark upon as glorious an evening as ever
+shone upon the gorgeous tropic world, when we reached the end of the
+ravine, and both became at the same instant aware of about a dozen
+Indians, who advanced quickly, making friendly signs, and repeating the
+word--"Amigos!  Amigos!"
+
+"They want to see what we've got, Mas'r Harry," chuckled Tom.  "Don't
+show fight unless they do."
+
+Professing to ask for tobacco and a light, the little party surrounded
+us; and, as if by accident, one man touched the bags, and contrived to
+see their contents, when he said something to his companions, to whom we
+civilly gave what they asked, showing no trace of tremor; while they
+were smiling and servile.  But I could not help feeling what would have
+been our fate had the lading of those mules been the treasure, for
+twelve to two were long odds.
+
+It was evident that they were satisfied, and giving us the country
+salutation, they bade us good-night, and we moved off; but Tom pulled
+up, and shouted after the leader of the party, who returned; when, with
+a face whose gravity could be seen, even in that dim short twilight, to
+be extreme, Tom took out one of his smallest stalactites, held it up
+before him, and repeated the word "buono" three times, and then
+presented it to the Indian, who received it with grave courtesy and
+retired.
+
+"There," said Tom, "if he don't go and tell his tribe that we're madmen
+after that, why, I was never born down Cornwall way.  Say, though, Mas'r
+Harry, that was a narrow escape; those chaps watch that gold, and they
+thought we had it; and if we had been loaded that way I'm thinking that
+it would have been buried again, with two skulls and bones this time,
+and those would have been ours."
+
+I shuddered as I urged my mule onward, anxious to reach the hacienda,
+which we did earlier than I hoped for, stabled our mules, and then,
+relieving Tom of his golden burden, I went up to my room and secured it
+in my travelling case, before descending to find my uncle sitting, with
+Lilla kneeling beside him, holding his hand; and a glance showed me that
+both she and Mrs Landell had been weeping bitterly.
+
+I was surprised to see them assembled at so late an hour, but taking no
+notice, I went up and shook hands.
+
+"Well, Harry," said my uncle sadly; "had enough of exploring yet?"
+
+"Quite, Uncle," I said.  "I have finished now."
+
+He looked up at me for a moment, and then fell to stroking Lilla's
+golden hair.
+
+"Well, lad, I'm sorry," he said, after a pause; "but I may as well tell
+you, and be out of my misery.  But don't think I blame you, lad--don't
+think I blame you, for I suppose it was to be."
+
+"What is it, Uncle?"  I said in an indifferent tone.  "No new trouble, I
+hope?"
+
+He glanced at me in a sadly disappointed way, and then said sternly:
+
+"_I_ don't reproach you, Harry; but that blow you struck Garcia has been
+my ruin, unless I buy his favour with this."
+
+As he spoke he laid his hand tenderly upon Lilla's head, then drew her
+to him and kissed her lovingly.
+
+"But we can't do that, my little lamb--we can't do that," he continued.
+"We are to be turned out of the place; but I daresay there's a living to
+be got--eh, Harry?  You'll not leave us, I suppose, now we're in
+trouble?  You said you would not, and now, my lad, is the time to put
+you to the proof.  You'll work now, won't you?"
+
+"Not if I know it, Uncle," I said coolly.  "Why should I work?  I'm much
+obliged for your hospitality; but I feel now disposed to go back to
+England, and the sooner the better."
+
+My uncle did not speak, and a dead silence fell upon all.  I caught one
+sad, reproachful glance from Lilla's eyes; and then she clung, weeping
+and whispering to my uncle, who, however, only shook his head.
+
+"I think, my dears, we'll go to rest," he said at last suddenly.
+"Lilla, my child, fetch the Book--we'll have one chapter in the old
+place for the last time, for who can tell where we shall be to-morrow?"
+
+My heart burned within me as I longed to tell the true-hearted old
+fellow of my success, but I would not then.  The news of Garcia's
+behaviour gave me an opportunity that I could not resist, and, after
+sitting in silence till my uncle had read his chapter and offered up a
+simple prayer for the protection of all, I allowed them to part from me
+almost coldly, though more in sorrow than in anger, and to go, aching of
+heart, to bed.
+
+I knew that Tom would not say a word, so I was safe; and the next
+morning, after a sad, dull breakfast, I sat with them all in the
+darkened room, my uncle starting at every noise in the yard, where all
+looked bright and fair, while Lilla's eyes met mine from time to time in
+mingled reproach and wonder at what seemed to her my heartless
+behaviour.
+
+We had not long to wait, for it seemed that Garcia had declared his
+intention of being there that morning to demand payment of money, the
+greater part of which had been advanced to Mrs Landell when a widow--a
+debt which my uncle had undertaken to repay at the same time that he had
+accepted further favours from this man.
+
+We had not been seated there an hour when we heard Garcia's voice in the
+yard, and Lilla crept closer to Mrs Landell.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, "you must please leave the room.  I was in hopes
+that you would have gone out.  I cannot find it in my heart to give up
+without making an appeal to Garcia for time."
+
+"An appeal that shall end in a new bargain being made with respect to
+that poor girl!"  I exclaimed.  "Uncle, be a man, or you will make me
+blush for you!"
+
+My uncle was about to speak when Garcia noisily entered the room, his
+sneering, triumphant face turning pale with rage as he saw me seated
+there.
+
+Mrs Landell and Lilla both cast an imploring glance at me, one which I
+answered by crossing over, taking Lilla's hand, and whispering a few
+words of comfort and encouragement.
+
+Garcia's eyes flashed, but he kept down his resentment, and, advancing
+to the table:
+
+"Senor Landell," he said, "I come to demand the money that is due to me,
+and which I must now have.  Of course you are prepared?"
+
+"Prepared, Garcia?" said my uncle.  "I am not prepared--you know that,"
+he continued sadly.  "But still these stringent proceedings will do you
+no good.  I ask you as a favour for time.  I am certain that I can
+realise more from the plantation than you can.  Give me time and it will
+prove to your advantage."
+
+"Miss Lilla," said Garcia, advancing with a smile, "you hear your
+stepfather's words.  It rests with you.  Shall I give him time?"
+
+Lilla's only reply, as I stood back, was a shudder, and she clung more
+closely to her mother.
+
+The action was not lost upon Garcia, who stepped back rapidly to the
+door, uttered some words to a couple of men in waiting, and they
+followed him into the room.
+
+"You have the papers," said Garcia fiercely to the elder man, who seemed
+a sort of notary; "take possession of this place and all thereon, as
+forfeited to me in accordance with the bonds.  Senor Landell, in an hour
+I require you to be off this plantation.  As for you," he exclaimed,
+turning to advance threateningly upon me, "you are an intruder.  This
+place is my property; leave here this instant!  Or stay," he said with
+mock courtesy; "perhaps the gay young English senor will take compassion
+upon his uncle's position and release him by paying his debt.  What does
+Senor Grant say?"
+
+"Harry, for Heaven's sake," cried my uncle, "let there be no
+disturbance.  Take care, or there will be bloodshed!" he cried.
+
+For as I advanced to confront Garcia he drew out a pistol.
+
+"Stand aside, Uncle!"  I exclaimed angrily, for he had caught my arm.
+"I know how to deal with this cowardly bully!  Put up that pistol or--"
+
+I did not finish my sentence, for in obedience to a nod Garcia was
+dragged back into a chair, and Tom Bulk's sturdy arms pinioned him, but
+not in time; for, with a cry of rage, he drew the trigger.  There was a
+sharp report, and then, as the smoke floated upward, a wild cry echoed
+through the room.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN.
+
+SLIPPERY METAL.
+
+That cry was from Lilla, who ran to my uncle's side just as he staggered
+to a chair, holding his face with both hands.
+
+"Not much hurt, I think," he gasped; "but it was a close touch--a sort
+of farewell keepsake," he said with a faint attempt to smile.
+
+It was, indeed, a narrow escape, for the ball had ploughed one of his
+cheeks so that it bled profusely, and I could have freely returned the
+shot in the rage which I felt.
+
+Perhaps it would have been better for all parties had I fired, for it
+would only have been disabling as black-hearted a scoundrel as ever
+breathed.  But my plans were made, and by an effort I kept to them, just
+as the notary was about to flee in alarm.
+
+"Loose him, Tom," I said; and Garcia started up, foaming almost at the
+mouth.  "Keep back there," I cried, "and do not let me see one of those
+hands move towards breast or pocket.  The instant I detect any such act
+I fire."
+
+Garcia stood scowling for a few moments but not meeting my eye, and I
+continued addressing the notary:
+
+"Give me full particulars of this amount, and I will pay it."
+
+"You, Harry--you!" exclaimed my uncle.
+
+"You!--you vile impostor!  You beggar and vagabond!  You do not possess
+an onza of gold," roared Garcia, bursting forth into a fit of
+vituperation.  "Don't listen to him; don't heed him; it's a trick--a
+plan.  I take possession.  The money was to be paid this morning, and it
+is not paid, so I seize the plantation."
+
+"You are the business man," I said coolly to the notary--with that
+coolness that the possession of money gives--"this is a mining country,
+and gold in ounces should be current."
+
+"The best of currency, senor," said the notary with a smile and a bow.
+
+"Tell me the amount, then, in ounces," I said, "and I will pay you."
+
+"Don Xeres," gasped Garcia, almost beside himself with rage, "I will
+take no promises to pay."
+
+The old notary shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"But, Senor Garcia, there are no promises to pay.  I understand the
+English senor to say that he will pay--at once!  Am I not right, senor?"
+
+"Quite," I said.  "Uncle, I will lend you this amount."
+
+"But, Harry, my dear boy, you are mad!  You have no idea of the extent."
+
+"Two hundred and five ounces would equal the amount in _pesos d'oro_
+which Senor Landell is indebted," said the notary quietly.
+
+"Good!"  I said.  "Then will you have proper balances brought?  Uncle,
+see to the return of your papers."
+
+"I am in the hands of Senor Xeres," said my uncle in a bewildered tone.
+"He will see justice done."
+
+The old notary bowed and smiled, while I crossed to where my leather
+case stood upon a side-table, brought it to my chair, and then seated
+myself, slowly unbuckling the straps and unlocking it while the balances
+were brought, when I drew out six of the little yellow bar ingots and
+passed them over to the notary, who was the banker of the district as
+well.
+
+He took them, turned them over, wiped his glasses, and replaced them;
+then examined each bar again.
+
+"Pure metal, I think, senor?"  I said, smiling.
+
+"The purest, Senor Inglese," he replied with another bow.
+
+Then, placing the ingots in the balances, he recorded each one's weight
+as he went on, to find them, with a few grains variation more or less,
+six ounces each.
+
+Five times, to Garcia's astonishment and rage, did I bring from the case
+in my lap six of the golden bars, the notary the while testing and
+weighing them one by one in the coolest and most business-like way
+imaginable.  Then his spectacles were directed inquiringly at me, and I
+brought out four more, which were duly weighed and placed with the
+others.  Then again were the spectacles directed at me.
+
+"Another ounce, less a quarter, senor," said the notary.  "I have here
+two hundred and four ounces and a quarter."
+
+"Fortunatus's purse wants aiding, Uncle," I said, unwilling to exhibit
+more of the golden spoil.  "You can manage the three-quarters of an
+ounce?"
+
+My uncle was speechless; but he rushed to a secretary, took out a little
+canvas bag, and counted out the difference in coin.  When, coolly
+drawing out bags of his own, the notary made up a neat package of the
+bars, inclosing therewith his account of the weights, tied it up, lit--
+with apparatus of his own--a wax taper, sealed the package, and handed
+it to Garcia, who took it with a fierce scowl, but only to dash it down
+the next instant upon the table.
+
+"I will not take it," he exclaimed.  "It is a trick--the gold is base!"
+
+"Senor Don Pablo Garcia, I have--I, S. Xeres--have examined and proved
+that gold," said the old notary.  "I say it is pure, and you cannot
+refuse it.  Senor Landell, there are your bonds now.  Senor Garcia is
+angry, but the business is terminated."
+
+Rising and bowing to us with a courtly grace that could win nothing less
+than respect, the old notary handed some deeds to my uncle, and then,
+picking up the gold, he passed his arm through Garcia's and led him
+away--the notary's attendant following with his master's writing-case
+and balances.
+
+But the next moment a shadow darkened the door, and Garcia would have
+rushed in had not Tom blocked the way.
+
+"Now, then, where are you shovin' to, eh?" grumbled Tom; and there was a
+scuffle, and the muttering of a score of Spanish oaths, with, I must
+say, a couple of English ones, that sounded to be in Tom's voice, when
+Garcia shouted, in a voice that we could all hear:
+
+"Tell him there is another debt to pay yet, and it shall be paid in
+another coin!"
+
+The door closed then, and it was evident that Tom was enjoying the act
+of seeing Garcia off the premises, while the next minute my uncle was
+holding me tightly by both hands and my aunt sobbing on my neck.
+
+"And I was saying you were like the rest of the world--like the rest of
+the world, Harry, my dear boy," was all my uncle could say, in a choking
+voice, and there were tears in his eyes as he spoke.
+
+"Say no more, Uncle--say no more," I exclaimed, shaking him warmly by
+the hands.
+
+Then he took his wife to his heart, telling her in broken words that
+there was to be peace at the old place after all.
+
+It must have been from joy at the happiness I was the means of bringing
+into that home, or else from the example that was set me, for the next
+moment I had Lilla in my arms, kissing her for response to the thanks
+looking from her bright eyes; and even when my uncle turned to me I
+could only get one hand at liberty to give him, the other would still
+clasp the little form that did not for an instant shrink.
+
+"Too bad--too bad, Harry--too bad!" said my uncle, with a smile and a
+shake of the head.  "I am no sooner free of one obligation than I am
+under another; and so now, on the strength of that money, you put in
+your claims."
+
+"To be sure, Uncle," I said laughing; "and you see how poor Lilla
+suffers."
+
+I repented saying those words the next moment, for Lilla shrank hastily
+away, blushing deeply.
+
+My uncle and I were soon left alone, when, holding out his hand to me,
+he said, in a voice whose deep tones told how he was moved:
+
+"Harry, my boy, I can never repay you the service you have done me; but
+if I live I will repay you the money."
+
+"Look here, Uncle," I said, "once and for all--let that be buried.
+There, light your cigar; and I can talk to you."  Then, taking our
+places in a recess by one of the shaded windows, I spoke to him in a low
+tone.  "You know how I have spent my time lately?"
+
+He nodded.
+
+"Treasure-seeking?"
+
+He nodded again.
+
+"Uncle, at times it almost seemed to me a madness; but I persevered and
+succeeded.  Look here!"
+
+I tore open the case and showed him the sixteen golden ingots remaining.
+
+"And you found all that, Harry!  My boy, you were fortunate indeed."
+
+"All that, Uncle!"  I said with a smile.  "That is not a hundredth part.
+I am rich.  I?  No!  We are rich; and now I want your advice.  What are
+we to do? for I've hidden my treasure again till I can fetch it away in
+safety."
+
+"You have done well, then," he said gravely.  "But is not this some
+delusion, my boy?"
+
+"Are these delusive, Uncle?"  I exclaimed, clinking together two of the
+sonorous little bars.  "Were those delusive which Garcia has carried
+off?  No, Uncle, I thought once it must be a dream; but it is a solid
+reality.  I have found the treasures of one of the temples of the Sun--
+ingots, plates, sheets, cups, and two great shields besides, all of
+solid metal."
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, "it sounds like a wild invention from some
+story-teller's pen, and I should laugh in your face but for the proofs
+you have given me.  But you must not stay here in this country.  It is
+as much yours as any lucky adventurer's, but your right would be
+disputed in a hundred quarters; while, as for the Indians--"
+
+"Disputed, Uncle?"  I said interrupting him.  "Disputed if it were
+known.  You know it."
+
+"Does any one else?" said my uncle anxiously.
+
+"Tom was with me.  We found it together," I said, "and he helped me to
+conceal it again.  But I could trust him with my life.  In fact, Uncle,"
+I said laughing, "we owe one another half-a-dozen lives over our
+discovery, for either I was saving his life or he was saving mine all
+the time."
+
+"But the Indians, Harry--the Indians!  That is a sacred treasure--the
+treasure devoted to their gods, hence its remaining so long untouched.
+If they knew that you had taken it, no part of South America would hold
+you free from their vengeance.  They would have your life, sooner or
+later."
+
+"Pleasant place this, certainly, Uncle," I said laughing; "what with
+Garcia and the Indians."
+
+"I don't think it could become known from those ingots," said my uncle
+musingly, "though Garcia will rack his brains to find out how you became
+possessed of them.  And yet I don't know; you see they have two or three
+characters stamped on them that the Indians might know.  But were you
+seen?"
+
+"Coming from the place, Uncle?  Yes, I suppose I must have been watched
+constantly.  But all the same, I have the treasure hidden away; and as
+to the risk from the Indians, I don't feel much alarmed; and you may
+depend upon it that they are in the most profound--What's that?"
+
+My uncle uttered an ejaculation at the same moment, for as I spoke,
+rapid as the dart of a serpent, a dark shadowy arm was passed under the
+blind close to the little table where we sat, and on looking there were
+but fifteen of the little ingots left.
+
+"Stop here!  I'll go," I exclaimed.
+
+In an instant I had torn aside the blind, pushed open the jalousie, and
+leaped out into the outer sunshine, to stand in the glare, looking this
+way and that way, but in vain: there were flowers, and trees, and the
+bright glare, but not a soul in sight.
+
+I stood for an instant to think; and then, feeling for my pistol to see
+if it was there if wanted, I dashed across the plantation towards the
+forest, peering in every direction, but without avail; and at last, more
+troubled than I cared to own, I returned, dripping with perspiration, to
+the hacienda, to meet Tom.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry, what's the good o' running yourself all away, like so
+much butter?  'Tain't good for the constitution."
+
+"Have you seen any Indians lurking about to-day, Tom, anywhere near the
+place?"
+
+"Not half a one, Mas'r Harry, because why?  I've been fast asleep ever
+since I saw the Don off the premises."
+
+"Keep a good look-out, Tom," I cried.
+
+Then I hurried in to my uncle, who looked troubled.
+
+"I don't like that, Harry," he said.  "There were eavesdroppers close at
+hand.  I thought I would go too, but I saw nothing.  Not a man had been
+out of the yard.  But there, take the gold up to your room and lock it
+in the big chest; the key is in it.  I put it here for safety till you
+got back, and--confound!"
+
+We gazed in blank astonishment, for as my uncle opened his secretary and
+laid bare my leather case, which he had locked and strapped up, there it
+was with the straps cut through, the lock cut out, and the fifteen
+ingots gone!
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY EIGHT.
+
+BARS WITHOUT BOLTS.
+
+As soon as my uncle had recovered from his astonishment he took out and
+loaded a couple of brace of pistols, laying one pair ready to hand and
+placing the others in his pockets.
+
+"Harry, my lad," he then said seriously, "we have entered upon something
+that will take all our wits to compass.  We have cunning people to deal
+with; but Englishmen have brains of their own, and perhaps we can
+circumvent those who are against us.  I wonder whether Garcia will get
+safe home with his share."
+
+I was too much put out to think or care much about Garcia just then.
+Certainly I did think it a good thing that he had been paid off, and the
+principal current of my thoughts just then tended to a congratulatory
+point as I thought of how much more serious the loss might have been.
+That I had done right in concealing the treasure was evident; and there
+it must lie, I thought, until I could bear it at once away out of the
+country.
+
+My musings were interrupted by my uncle.
+
+"Harry," he said, "I'd give something if the women were away from here.
+I hope I am magnifying the trouble; but I fear that we are going to be
+between two fires; and, at present I hardly know what course to pursue.
+I'm afraid of your gold, my lad, but a prince's fortune must not be
+slighted; and my conscience does not much upbraid me with respect to
+helping you to secure it.  But we must not pass over this robbery in
+silence.  That was done by no one here, I am sure.  We must try and put
+an end to eavesdropping so close at hand, or more strange things may
+happen.  Now, take my advice: both you and Tom go well armed, don't stir
+many yards from the plantation; and now come with me and let us
+carefully search the place inside and out.  Nearly a hundred ounces of
+gold taken within the last few minutes, and part even from under our
+eyes.  It won't do, Harry--it won't do!"
+
+Tom was called in, armed, and then the place was thoroughly searched
+inside and out, but without avail; not a trace could be seen, till,
+after a few minutes' thought, my uncle made a sign to me, placed Tom in
+one position, me in another, and then disappeared into the house.
+
+Five minutes after there was a loud cry, the sharp crack of a pistol,
+and what seemed like some beast of prey leaped from one of the upper
+windows full twelve feet to the ground, about half-way between Tom and
+myself.
+
+With a rush we made for the falling object, grasping it as it fell to
+the earth; but the next instant I was sent staggering back, as the
+Indian--for such it was--bounded up, striking me in the chest with his
+hand; while, when I gathered myself together again, Tom was standing
+alone, and my uncle came running out holding a handkerchief to his face,
+which had recommenced bleeding.
+
+"Did you stop him?" he said.
+
+"Stop!" cried Tom.  "It was like trying to stop a thing made of
+quicksilver.  But," he continued with a grin, "I've got his skin; he
+left that in my hands, and I say, Mas'r Harry, if he wasn't made of
+quicksilver he was of gold."
+
+For at that moment, as Tom shook the dark native cloth garment left in
+his hands by the fleeing Indian, the sixteen ingots fell to the ground,
+to be instantly secured.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, "I told you we had to deal with a cunning enemy.
+That fellow was in the space between the ceiling and roof of my
+bed-room.  How he got there I can't tell; but," he added with a shudder,
+"I fear if he had not been dislodged some of us would not have seen the
+morning's light."
+
+"But pursuit, Uncle," I cried.  "Let us try and overtake him."
+
+"No--no," he said uneasily.  "We should only be led into a trap in the
+forest, and we are too weak for that.  I'm afraid, Harry, that this
+affair is going to assume dimensions greater than we think for.  It is
+evident that the Indians suspected you of having been at their sacred
+treasure, and despatched a spy to watch if their suspicions were
+correct.  I tried to bring him down, but I had only a momentary glance
+and I must have missed him.  No, Harry, there must be no pursuit but
+plenty of scheming for defence, if we wish to hold that which we have
+got.  As I said before, there is no knowing where this will end.  Which
+way did he go?"
+
+"Right away towards the forest, sir," said Tom.
+
+"Perhaps only to slip back and watch by some other path," muttered my
+uncle.  "Give me the bars, Harry, and I'll take them in, while you and
+Tom walk cautiously round before coming to me.  Go one each way, right
+round, so as to meet again here, and then come in and we will talk
+matters over a little.  But stay--tell me--did you see anything of the
+Indians, do you say, as you came back?"
+
+I repeated the incident of being surrounded, and the way in which Tom
+presented a stalactite to the principal man.
+
+My uncle smiled grimly.
+
+"Tom," he said, "you must look out, or that stalactite will come back
+with interest.  I'm afraid that we English do not give the Indians
+credit for all the brain they possess.  They may have once been a
+simple, childlike race, but long oppression has roused something more in
+their breasts.  You must look out, lads--look out."
+
+My uncle left us, and Tom started one way, I the other, to look
+watchfully and carefully round for danger; although, to my way of
+thinking, it was decidedly a work of supererogation there in broad
+daylight, with the sun pouring down his intensely bright beams.  There
+was the creeper-overhung verandah on one side, which, at a glance, I
+could see was untenanted; there, on the other side, was the garden-like
+plantation, with its gorgeous blossoms and flitting birds.  The rows
+could be easily scanned, and I looked down between them; but it was
+evident that there was no danger to apprehend nearer than the forest;
+and I reached one corner of the verandah just as a parrot gave one of
+its peculiar calls, to be answered by another behind me.
+
+This was followed by a regular chorus from the woods, every parrot
+within hearing setting up a series of its ear-piercing shrieks, which in
+turn started birds of other kinds; the toucans hopping about from branch
+to branch uttering their singular barking cries, as they raised high
+their huge bills, which looked as if they would overbalance their
+bodies, but were as light as if made of paper and as thin.
+
+It did not seem a time to notice such things, but somehow they impressed
+themselves upon my mind, and I could not help letting my eyes rest upon
+a pair of the most magnificent trogons I had ever seen.  They were in
+the full beauty of their gorgeous golden-green plumage, which contrasted
+strongly with their brilliant scarlet breasts.  Where they were perched
+there was an opening among the trees and the full blaze of the sun came
+down upon their backs, crests, and yard-long tail-feathers which
+glistened and sparkled at every movement as if formed of burnished
+metal.
+
+This set me thinking of the golden treasure, and a sort of childish
+fancy came upon me as to whether these birds might be inhabited by the
+spirits of some of the old gold-loving Incas, who were watching over
+their treasure and waiting about to see what steps I should take next to
+steal that store away.
+
+I walked on, met, and passed Tom, who remarked upon the improbability of
+the copperskin showing up again; and then I continued my patrol slowly
+round the house, past the court-yard, where all was still, and at last
+found Tom where we had parted from my uncle.
+
+"Seen anything, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Lizard cutting up the verandy, Mas'r Harry, and a bee-bird buzzing
+about over the flowers: nothing else."
+
+I led the way into the room, and Tom followed, to stand at the door,
+picking his cap, and waiting to be told to come in.
+
+"Don't stand there, Tom," I said; "come in and sit down.  You are to be
+one of the privy-councillors."
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, seating himself close to the door.
+
+My uncle not being in the room, I supposed that he had gone to secure
+the gold, and walked across to where lay my cut and destroyed leather
+valise, which I was turning over when I heard what had never thrilled
+through the rooms of my uncle's house since I had been there--namely, a
+light, heart-stirring, silvery-like song, and for a few moments I stood
+listening, as it came nearer and nearer, till Lilla tripped into the
+dark room, to start, stop short, and then colour up upon finding the
+place occupied.
+
+The next moment I was by her side restraining her, for she would have
+darted away, and as I looked in her eyes I could read the story of the
+happy little heart rejoicing at being freed from a hateful bondage.
+
+I must give Tom the credit of being a most discreet companion, for he
+suddenly found that it would be possible to repair my valise, and for
+the next quarter of an hour he was busily cutting and unpicking the
+great coarse stitches.
+
+I was startled from my dreams back to the realities of life, for during
+that quarter of an hour existence had been bright and golden enough for
+me, without thinking of anything else; and the gold, the Indians, my
+uncle--everything had been forgotten, when Mrs Landell entered the
+room.
+
+"Have you seen your uncle?" she said to me, rather anxiously.
+
+"Not during the last quarter of an hour or so," I replied.  "He left us
+to come indoors.  Go and see if he is in the yard," I said to Tom.
+
+Tom went, to return in about five minutes with the news that my uncle
+had not been there for some time.
+
+"Are you sure he came in?" said my aunt.
+
+"Well, no--not sure," I replied; "he left us to come in.  But, by the
+way, Aunt, where would my uncle put plate or money that he wanted to
+keep in safety?"
+
+"Oh, in the strong chest in his little office here," said my aunt,
+leading the way to a small cupboard of a room just large enough for his
+desk, a stool, and an old sea-chest in which he kept his books, and, it
+seemed, such money as he had not in use.
+
+But my uncle had evidently not been there, for the door was closed, and,
+after a moment's thought, Mrs Landell remembered that her husband had
+not asked her for the key, which was in her pocket.
+
+We waited ten minutes, after which both Tom and I went out to make fresh
+inquiries, but without avail; then, pausing in the doorway, Tom said to
+me in a low tone:
+
+"Mas'r Harry, you always laughed at me, and said I was making bugbears;
+but we've been watched and dodged ten times as much as you think for."
+
+"Perhaps so, Tom," I said moodily.
+
+"And I don't want to make no more bugbears now," continued Tom; "but I'm
+sure as if some one told me, or as if I saw it all myself, that your
+uncle has been dropped on, and they've got him and the gold too this
+time, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"Absurd, Tom!  Why, he had not half-a-dozen yards to go."
+
+"Then they was half-a-dozen yards too many," said Tom sullenly.  "We
+didn't ought to have left him, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"But you don't for a moment think--"
+
+"No, Mas'r Harry, I don't; but I feel quite sure as they've burked him,
+and got him away with them bars of gold.  You see if they haven't now!"
+
+It seemed so improbable that I was disposed to laugh; but I felt the
+next instant that it could be no laughing matter, and with a feeling of
+anxiety at my heart that would not be driven away, I turned to enter the
+house just as there was a noise and confusion in the yard, and, to my
+surprise, old Senor Xeres, the notary and banker, was assisted into the
+hacienda, closely followed by his attendant, both bleeding freely.
+
+Tom looked meaningly at me, and the next minute we were helping to bear
+the old Spaniard to a couch, when, his wounds being roughly bound up,
+and a stimulant given, he told us in tolerable English that about three
+miles from the hacienda, while on his way to the nearest town, he had
+been set upon suddenly, and in spite of the resistance offered by
+himself and servant, they had been roughly treated, and the gold
+intrusted to him by Pablo Garcia had been taken away.
+
+Again Tom gave me a meaning look, and I wondered whether the thoughts
+which suggested those looks could be correct.
+
+"Was Senor Garcia with you?"  I said at last.
+
+"No," said the notary; "he left us within ten minutes of our quitting
+this house, or he might have helped us to beat the scoundrels off.  Only
+think, senor--two hundred and five ounces of pure gold!"
+
+"For which you are answerable?"  I said, inquiringly.
+
+"No, no," said the notary.  "I would not take it to be answerable, only
+at the Senor Don Garcia's risk."
+
+"But why does not your uncle come back, Harry?" said my aunt uneasily.
+"He would not be out of the way now unless there was something very
+particular to keep him."
+
+"We'll go and have another look, Aunt," I said.  "We may find him
+somewhere in the plantation."
+
+Signing to Tom to follow, I walked out to stand beneath the verandah
+till Tom joined me.
+
+"They've got it all back again, Mas'r Harry, safe," said Tom gloomily,
+as soon as he stood facing me.
+
+I did not answer.
+
+"And we shall have to look pretty sharp to get the rest away," he
+continued, prophetically.
+
+"Never mind the gold, Tom," I said, with a strange uneasy feeling
+troubling me.  "Let us first see what has become of my uncle."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY NINE.
+
+MISSING.
+
+Going out to one of the sheds across the yard I called together the
+Indians who were regularly employed as labourers on the farm, and told
+them that their master was wanted directly on business, requesting them
+all to spread themselves over the cultivated land, and to try and find
+him.
+
+To my utter astonishment the elder of the party raised one hand with the
+palm outwards, uttered a few words, and one and all the Indians returned
+to their work.
+
+"They didn't understand you, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "Tell them again."
+
+I spoke to the men once more, but they maintained a gloomy silence.
+Then, and then only, I resorted to threats, to find a wonderful
+unanimity of purpose amongst them, for every man's hand in an instant
+was on his knife, and they were evidently prepared to offer a fierce
+resistance.
+
+"Come away, Mas'r Harry," said Tom uneasily; "we don't want no fighting
+now; but this seems rum, the men turning like that all of a sudden."
+
+"I'm afraid that there's a sort of freemasonry existing amongst them,
+Tom," I said, "and these men are evidently under orders.  But let us see
+whether my uncle has returned, for I begin to be afraid that this gold
+is about to bring a curse with it."
+
+"I don't believe in no curses, Mas'r Harry; but we ain't a-going to be
+allowed to get it away without a deal of dodging, and perhaps a
+scrimmage.  They've got part of it back, Mas'r Harry, but I don't think
+they'll get the big lot unless we go and show them where we've stowed it
+away."  I hurried into the house to find that the old notary had fallen
+asleep, while my aunt was uneasily walking about.  "Have you found him,
+Harry?" she exclaimed.  "Not yet, Aunt.  I thought he might have
+returned."  Without waiting to hear her reply I ran back to Tom, who was
+watching the Indians.
+
+"Look here, Mas'r Harry," he exclaimed.  "Here's just the very spot
+where we left your uncle, isn't it?"
+
+"Yes," I said.
+
+"Well, this is just in view of those Indian chaps, and so is the way
+into the house all in full view of them."
+
+"Quite right, Tom."
+
+"Well, nothing couldn't have taken place without them seeing it.  But
+something did take place, and I'll tell you why.  If Mas'r Landell had
+only walked off somewhere to see how his coffee or cocoa was growing,
+and where it wanted hoeing up, do you think that Muster Indian there
+would have been above saying so?  Not he, Mas'r Harry.  But what does he
+do now?  Why, he turns stunt, and won't answer a word; and what does
+that show, eh?  Why, that, as I said before, we didn't ought to have
+left your poor uncle, who's been knocked on the head, and robbed, and
+then hidden away.  Well, do you know what we've got to do now, Mas'r
+Harry?"
+
+"Search for him, of course," I said emphatically.
+
+"To be sure, and both together, or we may get knocked on the head too;
+and I shouldn't like that on account of Sally Smith and Miss--"
+
+"Tom," I said, "your tongue runs too fast.  Let us have more action.
+Come along.  And as to your knocking-on-the-head work, we have nothing
+to fear there so long as we have no gold about us."
+
+"Gently there, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "We've got no gold about us, I
+know; but how many people know that, eh?  Well, I'll tell you--_two_;
+and I'm one, and you're the other.  You keep a sharp look-out, and don't
+you trust nobody at all with a red skin, and only two or three who have
+got white."
+
+As we conversed we kept on advancing towards the plantation rows, when
+Tom stooped down so as to gaze intently at the ground, and then trotted
+slowly along, as if seeking for a place where the grass was broken
+down--an example I followed, to halt at length, with the Indians
+watching me intently from the shed as I reached a spot nearly opposite
+to the part of the verandah where I had parted with my uncle.
+
+"Come here, Tom!"  I said in a low voice; and he ran up.  "What do you
+think of this?"
+
+"Been beaten-down and then smoothed over again," said Tom excitedly.
+"Something has been dragged over here, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"So I thought, Tom," I exclaimed.  "Now let us try whether an Englishman
+can follow a trail; for it looks as if my uncle must have passed along
+here."
+
+There was evidently a display of some little excitement amongst the
+Indians in the shed as we took our first steps along a well-marked
+track.
+
+"They saw it, Mas'r Harry!" exclaimed Tom.  "Look at 'em."
+
+I did not answer, for my eyes were glued to the track, which now showed
+plainly that a body had been dragged along through the tender herbage in
+a perfectly straight line; and I was not long in perceiving that the
+track went in the direction of the little wood where Lilla had had her
+terrible adventure with the snake.
+
+The affair began to show now in blacker colours each moment; and
+I shuddered at last as I stopped short, and pointed to a
+plainly-to-be-seen smear upon a broad frond.
+
+"Blood, Mas'r Harry!" exclaimed Tom hoarsely; and then I heard him
+mutter to himself--"Poor Mas'r Landell!"
+
+We pushed on, to find the same track still; the heavy body that had been
+dragged over the young plantation growth leaving it bruised and broken
+beyond the elastic power of the plants to recover themselves.  Two or
+three times the track made a sudden turn, as if he who made it had
+sought to avail himself of an inequality in the ground; and then, once
+more, it went right away for the forest, in whose depths it disappeared.
+
+Twice more we had both shuddered as we observed the faint smears of
+blood upon some leaf; but there was a stern determination in my breast
+to see the adventure to the end; for I felt that it was to a great
+extent due to me that my uncle had been stricken down--for stricken down
+he must have been, I now felt sure.
+
+Following Tom's example, I drew and cocked a pistol; and then we pushed
+aside the foliage, which grew densely as soon as we had passed through
+the plantation, moving forward cautiously, and expecting to see an enemy
+spring up from every tuft of thick growth.
+
+"Why, the trail goes right down where the snake went, Mas'r Harry!"
+cried Tom suddenly.
+
+"Towards the river, Tom," I said huskily; for it was now plain enough;
+and my heart seemed to stand still, and my breath to come in gasps, as
+my imagination conjured up horror after horror that must have befallen
+the free, generous hearted man who had ever given me so warm a welcome
+to his home.
+
+"Keep a sharp look-out, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom, as a rustling
+amongst the bushes and swamp-loving grass told of something rapidly
+retreating towards the river.
+
+Then once more the trail turned off, and it was plain enough to see that
+it was now pointing right for the thick reed and cane-brake where we had
+slain the jaguar; and my heart told me plainly enough that, if this
+track had been made by some one dragging my uncle's body, it was in
+order to dispose of it in the great reptile-haunted stream.
+
+There was a strangely strong inclination to stay back and leave Tom to
+finish the adventure, but with an effort I crushed it down; and now,
+close abreast, we crept on, pushing the reeds and canes aside as we
+entered the brake, sinking to our knees at every stride, and feeling to
+our horror that the ooze beneath our feet was alive with little
+reptiles.
+
+"Make haste, Tom!"  I cried, shuddering in spite of my efforts to drive
+away the tremor I felt.
+
+Tom responded to my words, and we were pushing and forcing our way on,
+when the horror that was oppressing me would have its way, and--be it
+boyish, unmanly, what you will--I gave vent to a cry, torn from me by
+the extreme dread I felt as my further progress was stayed by something
+invisible to me amongst the thick reeds, suddenly seizing me by the leg.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY.
+
+MY UNCLE'S ADVENTURE.
+
+"Let me get a shot at him, Mas'r Harry!" cried Tom excitedly.  "Hold
+up--don't go down, whatever you do.  It's one of them great beasts--I
+know it is.  There's thousands of 'em here."
+
+As if to prove the truth of Tom's words, one of the monsters dashed,
+half-running, half-wallowing, by us while, completely unnerved, I could
+do nothing but stand motionless as Tom beat the canes aside and tried to
+get a clear view of that which held me.
+
+"Why, Mas'r Harry!" he exclaimed in tones I could hardly understand,
+"who ever saw such a game as this?"
+
+Tom's words brought me to myself, and, looking down, I found that which
+clasped me so tightly was a man's hand--my uncle's!
+
+Angry with myself for my cowardice, the next moment I was down upon my
+knees helping to extricate him from the position in which he lay, with
+one arm still bound to his side, and the dark cloth garment from which
+Tom had shaken the gold bound round and round his head and face,
+effectually gagging him; and if the intention of his captors had been to
+suffocate him, they had nearly effected their purpose.
+
+"Uncle!"  I exclaimed, as I held his head up and he began to draw his
+breath more freely.
+
+"I thought it was all over, my boy, when I heard your voice," he said
+faintly, and evidently not without considerable effort.
+
+With some difficulty we got him upon his legs; but until we had
+thoroughly chafed them he could not take a step, so tight had been the
+bonds with which he had been confined.
+
+But at last he seemed to exert himself to the utmost; and, sometimes
+leaning on Tom's arm, sometimes on mine, we went slowly along the track
+we had made to the great prostrate tree, where, after a hasty glance
+around to make certain that no serpents were in the way, we sat down to
+rest, and my uncle, unasked, began to speak.
+
+"I must sit down for a few minutes, my lad," he said, "and then we will
+make haste on, for those women must not be left for an instant more than
+we can help.  The gold has all gone, though, Harry."
+
+"Uncle," I exclaimed, "it seems as if my thirst for gold is bringing
+down a curse upon your peaceful home."
+
+"Not so fast, my lad--not so fast.  Gold is a very good thing in its
+way, and helped me this morning out of a terrible difficulty.  Remember
+that it set me free from Garcia."
+
+"And they've got it all back from him again," chuckled Tom.
+
+"What!" exclaimed my uncle.
+
+"Knocked the poor old lawyer about and grabbed all the bars," said Tom.
+
+My uncle seemed astonished at the news, but his brow knit the next
+minute.
+
+"Never mind, Harry," he said, "we'll risk the curses of the gold.  I'll
+help you, my lad, to the last gasp; and if we don't get the treasure
+safe on board some vessel bound for old England, it sha'n't be for want
+of trying.  But you must give me time, lad--you must give me time; for,
+what with Garcia's bullet and this blow on the head, I'm as weak as a
+child."
+
+"But how was it, Uncle?"  I exclaimed anxiously.
+
+"Give me your arm, lad, and let's make haste back to the hacienda.  You,
+Tom, keep that pistol in your hand cocked, and walk close behind; and if
+you see one of those lurking copper-skins jump up, shoot him down
+without mercy.  You know how you both left me to go into the house,
+where I meant to put the gold into a chest in my little office?  Well, I
+stood looking at you for a few moments, Hal, and then I had taken a step
+forward, when I felt myself dashed to the ground by a tremendous blow
+upon the head; hundreds of lights danced before my eyes, and then all
+was darkness, from which I came to myself with the sensation of being
+suffocated by something bound over my face.  I felt, too, that my hands
+and arms were tightly bound, and that I was quite helpless, for I could
+not cry out.  I did not feel much troubled, though, for a heavy, sleepy
+feeling was on me.  All I wanted was to be left alone, while instead of
+that I could feel that I was being dragged slowly along over the ground;
+and then at last came a stoppage, and I knew that I was left."
+
+My uncle stopped for a few minutes, apparently exhausted, but he soon
+recovered himself and went on:
+
+"I struggled hard to get at liberty; but, do all I would, I could only
+get one hand and arm loose as far as the elbow, while as to freeing my
+legs and face, that I soon found to be impossible; and as I lay there I
+could feel that the muddy ooze was all in motion beneath me with the
+spawn of those great alligators of the river."
+
+"Wur-r-r-ra!" ejaculated Tom in a long shudder.
+
+"Over and over again I felt something crawl over me, and once something
+seized me, gave me a shake, and then let go; but the height of my horror
+was reached when I felt slowly gliding and coiling upon me what must
+have been one of the water-boas.  I could feel it gradually growing
+heavier and heavier with the great thick folds lying upon my chest, my
+legs, and even up to my throat, till the sense of suffocation was
+horrible, and I lay momentarily expecting to be wrapped in the monster's
+folds and crushed to death, till suddenly I felt every part of the body
+in motion, and that it was gliding off me, for the sense of the crushing
+weight was going.  For a moment I thought it was to enable the beast to
+seize me, but the next instant I knew what it meant, for I could faintly
+hear voices, which I rightly judged to have scared the reptile away.
+Then something touched me as I heard indistinctly the voices close by,
+and with what little strength I had left I clutched at whatever it was;
+and you know the rest."
+
+By this time we had reached the edge of the plantation, and I was
+glancing anxiously towards the hacienda in dread lest anything should
+have happened.  But so far all appeared at peace.  It was drawing
+towards evening and the shadows were lengthening, but the whole place
+seemed to be sleeping in the gorgeous yellow sunlight, so still and
+placid looked all around.
+
+Still, indeed! for an ominous change met us upon our reaching the
+court-yard.  Every Indian labourer, male and female, had gone, and the
+place was silent and deserted.
+
+"The rats desert the sinking ship, Harry," said my uncle huskily.  "For
+Heaven's sake run in and see if all is well; I dare go no farther!"
+
+I needed no second bidding to rush in and hurry to the room where the
+wounded Spaniards had lain, to find it deserted.
+
+With a strange clutching at the heart I ran to the inner room and called
+Lilla by name, when, to my intense delight, she answered, and with my
+aunt, weak and trembling, she came forth.
+
+We soon learned the cause of the silence about the place.  Shortly after
+I had taken my departure Senor Xeres had roused up from the short sleep
+into which he had sunk, to express his determination to recommence his
+journey, declaring that he had nothing now to lose; while, half an hour
+after, Lilla had seen through one of the verandahs the whole of the
+labourers glide silently away towards the forest, and then a silence as
+of death had fallen upon the hacienda.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY ONE.
+
+THE ATTACK ON THE HACIENDA.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle about sundown, "if I could do as I liked I should
+rest my cuts and bruises for a few days; but, as it is, I cannot give
+up.  Now, look here, my lad--here, you, Tom Bulk, don't shrink away,
+man--this is as much for your ears as for his.  I've been thinking this
+over, and, from what I know of the Indians, I'm quite sure that they
+mean mischief.  It seems hard, but I fear that there will be a fierce
+attack upon this place before many hours are past; and then, unless we
+can beat them off, ours will be a bad case.  You two must see to the
+closing up of the bottom of the place, and doing what you can to put it
+in a state of defence."
+
+"Uncle," I said, "is not this almost madness?  Here we are, only three.
+How, then, can we defend such a house as this?"
+
+"It is our only hope," he said gloomily.  "If we had your treasure here,
+we might try to escape down the river; but as it is, we'll fight to the
+last, and then take to the woods."
+
+"And the cave--eh, Mas'r Landell?" said Tom.
+
+"Tom," I cried joyfully, "why, that would indeed be a place of refuge
+when all here failed."
+
+"Yes," said my uncle thoughtfully.  "I did not think of that.  Such a
+place might indeed be useful for a retreat if we could take with us
+provisions.  But now see about this place.  I will not leave here yet--
+not until we are obliged."
+
+In obedience to his wishes, though with an aching heart, I set to
+bolting and barring, closing shutters, and providing one or two windows
+that commanded likely points of assault with mattresses over which we
+could fire.  But all the while I knew well enough that, with anything
+like a daring attack, the place must be carried directly.  The great
+dread I had, though, was of fire, which I knew would prove the most
+formidable of adversaries--for a brand applied to one of the posts of
+the verandah would be sufficient to ensure the total destruction of the
+light, sun-dried, wooden building.
+
+Meanwhile, on returning, I found that my uncle had nearly forgotten his
+pains, and was busily arranging such firearms as we had--ample, as it
+happened; for there were five guns, and he had a couple of brace of
+pistols, besides those with which we were provided.  Ammunition, too,
+was in fair quantity; while, one way or another, our little garrison
+could boast of plenty of provision.
+
+"No sleep to-night, Harry," said my uncle, cheerfully.  "We must all
+watch, for the Indians will not be satisfied till they have thoroughly
+ransacked the place."
+
+"Of course we shall beat them off if possible; but what arrangements
+have you made for retreat?"  I said.
+
+Without a word, my uncle led me into the kitchen of the hacienda, where
+he had stabled four mules, with plenty of fodder.
+
+"We must get off unseen if we can, my lad," he said, "and the mules will
+carry plenty of ammunition and food.  But about water?"
+
+"Plenty at the cavern," I said.
+
+"Good!" exclaimed my uncle.  "And now look here, Harry," he said,
+leading me to the inner room, and taking down a map, "show me, as nearly
+as you can, where the cavern lies which contains all this rich
+treasure."
+
+I examined the map as carefully as I could, and then pointed out the
+valley in which it seemed to me that, if the map were correct, the
+cavern must lie.
+
+"You say there is water?" said my uncle--"a stream?"
+
+"Yes, a little rivulet."
+
+"Then that must run down to this river.  Good!  And here again this
+river joins the great Apure, which, in its turn, runs into the Orinoco.
+Once well afloat, we should be pretty safe, and we could reach the mouth
+of the great river, and from there Georgetown, Demerara.  Why, Harry, it
+could not be above a dozen miles from the mouth of your cave to the
+water-way that should see us safe on the road homeward."
+
+"But about canoes, uncle?"  I said.
+
+"Canoes, my boy?  Well, of course, it would be well to have them; but we
+must not be particular.  I have known voyages made on skin-rafts before
+now; and recollect this, that we shall have the stream to bear us along
+the whole distance.  But there, after all, we may be alarming ourselves
+without cause."
+
+Tom and I exchanged glances at the mention of the skin-raft, and then we
+prepared to spend the watchful night.
+
+"I need not hint to you, Hal, about trying to protect poor Lilla," said
+my uncle, in tones that bespoke his emotion.
+
+"No," I said, quietly.
+
+My look, I suppose, must have satisfied Lilla, for I received one in
+return full of trust and confidence in the efforts of my weak arm.
+
+Night at last--beautiful, though anxious night, with the sky deepening
+from blue to purple, to black, with the diamond-like stars spangling the
+deep robe of nature till it glistened with their glorious sheen.  Around
+us on every side was the forest, in a greater or less depth, and from it
+came the many nocturnal sounds--sounds with which I was pretty familiar,
+but which, upon this occasion, had a more strange and oppressive effect
+than usual.  Boom, whizz, croak, shriek, yell, and moan, mingled with
+the distant rush of the great river, ever speeding onward towards the
+sea.  At times I could just distinguish the edge of the forest; then
+there would be the dark plantation spread around, and nothing more.
+
+It was weary work that, watching--stationed at one of the windows--
+watching till my eyes ached, as I tried to distinguish the many familiar
+objects by which I was surrounded, and then to make sure that some low
+bush was not a crouching or crawling enemy, approaching by stealth
+nearer and nearer, ready for a deadly spring.
+
+It was just the time for anxious troubled thought, and the gold lay like
+a dead weight upon my conscience.  At that moment I could have gladly
+given it all wherewith to purchase safety for those beneath this roof.
+
+I was startled from anxious reverie by a whisper at my side, and turning
+I found that it was Lilla, the bearer of a message from my uncle that he
+would like me to come to him for a few minutes.
+
+I had scarcely mastered the message, standing there close to the open
+window, when the words upon my lips were arrested, and my heart beat
+fast, as now, unmistakably no chimera of the brain, I could see six or
+seven figures glide out of the darkness towards the house, straight to
+where I stood with Lilla.
+
+Nearer they came, stooping down and apparently making for the shade of
+the verandah, till they stopped within a couple of yards of us, and
+began whispering in what seemed to be broken Spanish, or the _patois_ of
+the Indians.  Then I felt my hands clutched more tightly than ever, as a
+voice that I recognised in an instant uttered a few words that sounded
+like an order, given as it was in a tongue very little of which I could
+comprehend, catching only a word or two, while my imagination supplied
+the rest.
+
+It was plain enough that, perhaps ignorant of his loss, perhaps
+condoning it, Garcia had made common cause with the Indians, and Lilla
+was to be saved before fire was applied to the hacienda.
+
+For a few moments there was a dead silence, and then the party glided
+along under the verandah.
+
+"What was that Garcia said?"  I then whispered to Lilla.
+
+I knew that my interpretation must have been pretty correct from the
+start Lilla gave, and then her shudder.
+
+"I dare not tell you," she said, with a half sob.
+
+Then leaving the window, after softly closing and securing it, we
+hurried, hand in hand, to my uncle.
+
+"How long you have been!" he whispered.
+
+"There was a party of six or seven by my window," I said; "Garcia
+heading them."
+
+"Then I was right!" he exclaimed anxiously.  "I thought--"
+
+The next moment my hand was upon his lips; for, dimly-seen through the
+narrow aperture left, from which my uncle watched, were four dark
+figures; while at the same moment there was a sharp cracking noise, as
+of breaking woodwork, from another part of the house.
+
+"Am I to shoot or ain't I?  Is Mas'r Harry there?" whispered a voice
+from out of the darkness.  "Because they're trying to break in here."
+
+"You must fire, Tom," said my uncle huskily; "and mind this, if they do
+break in, our only hope is in the kitchen, which is stone built and
+strong.  Make your way there."
+
+"Right, Mas'r Landell," said Tom coolly.
+
+Then we heard him glide off.
+
+"Lilla, join your mother in there," I heard my uncle then whisper.
+
+Directly after I knew we were alone.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, "it seems to me that we ought to have beaten a
+retreat; but it is too late to talk of that.  Our only hope now is by
+giving them a sharp reception.  If we can keep them at bay till daylight
+we shall have a better opportunity of escaping."
+
+"I don't agree with you," I said.  "I think our hopes should be in the
+darkness."
+
+Drawing near to the window, my remarks were cut short by the sharp
+report of a gun, followed in a few seconds by another, when the crashing
+noise, evidently made by the tearing down of the jalousie bars at one
+window, suddenly ceased, and a loud shriek rang out upon the night air.
+
+We neither of us spoke, as we listened attentively, to hear the next
+moment the sound made by a ramrod in a gun-barrel, and we knew that Tom
+was safe.
+
+"They've gone from my window now, Mas'r Landell," whispered a voice at
+our elbow; "and they won't come back there, I think, seeing how hot it
+was.  But, harken there, isn't that them trying somewhere else?"
+
+There was no mistaking the sound.  Strong hands were striving to tear
+down a jalousie at the other end of the house; and, hurrying there, my
+uncle fired, just as several dimly-seen dark figures were beating in the
+window.
+
+"Crack--crack!" two sharp reports from my uncle's gun; but this time, as
+their flashes lit up the room where we stood, the fire was replied to by
+half a dozen pieces, but fortunately without effect.
+
+Then again fell silence, with once more the same result, that of a
+breaking jalousie at an upstairs window.
+
+"They've swarmed up the verandah posts, lads," said my uncle thickly;
+"but you two stay by your windows--you at this, Harry; you, Tom, at the
+other."
+
+We heard him steal away to the staircase, and then Tom left my side.
+The next instant came a loud report from upstairs, then a crash as of a
+falling body on the lattice-work of the verandah, and directly after a
+dull thud outside the window.
+
+I had no time for thought, though, for incidents now began to succeed
+each other with such startling rapidity.  As the dull thud came upon the
+bricks beneath the verandah it seemed to me that the darkness outside
+the window before which I stood was gradually growing deeper.  Another
+instant, and I knew the reason as I levelled my heavily loaded double
+gun.
+
+Was I to destroy life? my heart seemed to ask me, but only for the reply
+to come instantly.  Yes, if I wished to help and save the women beneath
+our charge; and then I drew rapidly, one after the other, both triggers.
+There was a gurgling, gasping cry, and the darkness grew less dense.
+
+"Crack--crack!" both barrels again from Tom's part of the house.  It was
+evident, then, that we had neither of us returned to our old posts too
+soon.
+
+I hastily reloaded, wondering from whence would come the next attack;
+but I had not long to wait, for three or four sharp discharges came
+through the window, striking the plaster of wall and ceiling, so that it
+crumbled down upon me in showers.
+
+Again and again I trembled for those in the kitchen; but the
+recollection of my uncle's words encouraged me; and, trusting in the
+strength of its stone walls, I began to grow excited, firing and
+loading, till all at once, as if by common consent, there was a
+cessation of the discharges, followed by an ominous silence.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY TWO.
+
+FLIGHT AND ITS ARREST.
+
+I would have given anything to have left my post just then, so as to
+have seen after the welfare of those who were anxiously awaiting the
+result of the attack; but I felt that such a proceeding might prove
+dangerous, and an entry be made during my brief absence.
+
+But a minute had not elapsed before my uncle was at my side.
+
+"They are all safe in the kitchen, Harry," he said.  "But what does this
+mean?"
+
+"Only a minute or two's halt before they make a fiercer attack," I said.
+
+"No 'tain't," said Tom, who had stolen up unobserved; "they're a-going
+to set us alight, and I've come to tell you."
+
+"Nonsense!" exclaimed my uncle.  "They'll never burn the place till they
+have searched and plundered it."
+
+"I quite think with you, Uncle," I said.
+
+"But they're a striking lights round my side," said Tom.  "Come and
+look!"
+
+We hurriedly passed round to Tom's post, just in time to see the truth
+of his words, for as we peered cautiously from his window there was a
+little flickering tongue of flame apparently dancing towards one end of
+an outhouse.  Then it was applied to the thatched roof, and a howl of
+joy arose as the flame ran rapidly up towards the ridge.
+
+Directly after, though, there arose a shout of rage, and more than one
+voice, so my uncle said, crying out for the fire to be extinguished;
+amongst which voices that of Garcia could plainly be heard.
+
+The firing was evidently premature, and efforts were directly made to
+extinguish it.
+
+A glance, though, showed that the attempt would be in vain; for, with a
+sharp hissing and crackling noise, the light material began to blaze
+rapidly, and my uncle gave a groan as he saw that his house was doomed
+to destruction.
+
+A loud voice now shouted what were evidently orders, and a pattering of
+feet succeeded, as a fierce struggle now began, to tear out the blazing
+part of the outhouse before it reached the hacienda, against whose sides
+it was reared.
+
+"Now is the time for escaping, Uncle," I whispered, as I thought how
+easily we could have brought down a dozen or so of our assailants, whose
+dark figures stood out well against the fire.
+
+"Yes," he said slowly; "we must make the venture now, for in an hour the
+old place will be level with the ground."
+
+Then, casting off his lethargy, he hurriedly made for the kitchen,
+closely followed by Tom and myself, when we closed after us, and
+thoroughly barricaded, the inner door, while my uncle unfastened and
+looked out cautiously from that which led into the yard.
+
+All was still on that side--not an enemy to be seen--when, hastily
+finishing the loading of the mules with the provisions, arms, and
+ammunition, Lilla was placed on one, my aunt on the other, and we had
+just determined upon opening the door to start across the yard, when a
+loud shout told that the enemy had made an entrance, and directly after
+we could hear footsteps coursing all over the house, as if in search of
+the gold that they expected to find; whilst one voice, which I twice
+heard shouting, sent a thrill through my body.
+
+"Quick, Uncle!"  I exclaimed, "before they find the kitchen door."
+
+"It is almost madness to try and escape, my lad," said my uncle
+despondently.  "Had we not better fight it out from here?"
+
+"No," I exclaimed fiercely, as I threw open the door and gave a glance
+out, to see that this side of the house was in shadow, while a bright
+light was beginning to illumine the trees around.  "No; let us make for
+the forest.  Tom, bring the two pack-mules.  Uncle, lead the other."
+
+Then taking the bridle of Lilla's mule in one hand, gun in the other, I
+led the way, trembling all the while with excitement, for we could hear
+the shouts of the searchers, and, above all, those of Garcia.  It seemed
+that every moment they must be upon us; but all four mules were led out
+at last and stood in the black shadow over on that side of the house.
+
+"Don't leave me, Harry!" whispered a voice at my side.
+
+For an instant I wavered, and that instant nearly sealed our fate.
+
+"Only for a few moments," I said huskily.
+
+I rushed to the kitchen door, dragged out the key, and inserted it on
+the outer side, with the Indians beating the while at the inner door,
+which was rapidly giving way, as they seemed now to have determined that
+it was here we had taken refuge.
+
+Then I had the door to, locked it, and hurled away the key into the
+plantation, just as, with a crash, the inner door succumbed; and, headed
+by Garcia, the party of Indians rushed into the kitchen, to utter howls
+of rage and disappointment on finding it empty, and then began battering
+the door I had that moment locked.
+
+Fortunately for us, the window was strongly barred; but I knew that some
+of them must be round directly; and dashing to Lilla's bridle, "Come
+along!"  I whispered hoarsely, and I led the mule towards the nearest
+packing shed.
+
+To reach this place part of our way was in black shadow, the rest across
+a broad glowing band of light, after which we could hurry along behind
+two or three long low coffee sheds, keeping them between us and the
+fire, when the plantation trees would shelter us, I knew, till we could
+reach the forest.
+
+"Quick--quick!"  I exclaimed.  "To the left of the shed!"
+
+The yells behind us were fearful, the light of the fire growing
+momentarily more intense, for the flames were running swiftly up one
+side of the house, with the effect of broadening the glowing belt which
+we had to pass, when, if an eye was turned towards us, or the kitchen
+door were to give way, I knew that our efforts had been in vain, and
+that we should be overtaken and surrounded in a minute.
+
+An anxious passage of only a few seconds' duration, and I had led Lilla
+across, my uncle had followed with Mrs Landell, and Tom was close
+behind, when one of his mules turned restive, stopping short in the full
+glare of the flames, and I felt choking with rage and despair.
+
+There was another shout as the flames shot higher--another shout and
+another close at hand, with the pattering of feet, to show that the
+Indians were running round to our side of the house, when I saw Tom
+stoop for an instant, and his restive mule gave a bound; and then, as a
+chorus of yells smote our ears, we were once more in the shadow,
+hurrying along past first one and then another shed, which formed a
+complete screen, though the glare was momentarily growing brighter.
+
+"I don't like using the point of a knife for a spur, Mas'r Harry," said
+Tom to me, as, leaving Lilla's bridle once more for a moment, I ran back
+to urge him on; "but, blame this chap, he was obliged to have it, and he
+won't turn nasty no more.  Never mind me--I'll keep up if I can, and you
+shall have the stuff I've got.  If I can't keep up, why, I must be left
+behind, and you must save the ladies; but don't hang back for me."
+
+I squeezed Tom's hand and ran on, to find Lilla trembling so that she
+could hardly keep her seat; then, as she clung convulsively to my arm,
+we passed the shadow of the last shed, but not until we had paused for a
+few moments to listen to the chorus of savage yells in our rear.
+
+"Now, Uncle!"  I exclaimed.
+
+"But where do you make for?" whispered my uncle.
+
+"The great cave," I said.
+
+As I spoke we issued from the friendly shadow and passed on.
+
+It seemed as if that plantation would never be passed and the shade of
+the great black forest reached.  The yells continued louder than ever,
+startling us by proceeding from unexpected spots, which showed us that
+the Indians, certain now of our evasion, were spreading in all
+directions.
+
+"Another fifty yards," I whispered to my uncle over my shoulder, "and
+then safety."
+
+For the great dense trees now rose like a large bronzed wall right in
+front; and though full of dangers, we were ready enough to dare those
+sooner than the peril of meeting the fierce party of Indians who sought
+our lives.
+
+We pushed forward now, heedless of shout and cry, though some of them
+appeared to come from close by on our left.  There was the forest which
+was to prove a sanctuary, and at last the cocoa-trees were behind, and
+we were parting the dense growth that now hid from us the glow of the
+burning house.
+
+"There is a track more to the right, Harry," whispered my uncle.
+
+Turning in that direction, I hurried the mule, burning as I did to get
+on to the direct route to the cavern.  I had whispered a few encouraging
+words to Lilla, and was then thinking how my locking the kitchen door
+had retarded the enemy and given us time to escape, when I felt that,
+worn out and overcome by the excitement and terrors of the night, my
+companion had given way and was sinking, fainting, from the saddle.
+
+By an effort, though, I kept her in her place, and whispered to my uncle
+to take the lead, so that our mule might follow.
+
+He did so; and then, with the cries of the searching Indians still
+ringing in our ears, we pushed on till, under my uncle's guidance, we
+reached the open track, and I whispered to him the direction we had
+followed to reach the cave.
+
+"I think if we pursue this path for about a mile, Harry, we can then
+turn off to the right and reach your track--that is, if we do not lose
+our way."
+
+So spoke my uncle; and then, all burdened as I was, I levelled my gun
+and uttered a warning cry to my companions; for there was a rustling on
+our left, a heavy panting, and then with a loud and triumphant yell a
+couple of savages sprang out into the dim twilight of the open space
+where we were standing.
+
+"Let them have us all dead, not living, Hal," said my uncle, his sad
+tones giving place to those of fierce excitement.
+
+And he, too, levelled his piece just as, with a fresh burst of yells,
+the savages dashed on.
+
+Two loud, echoing reports--two dimly-seen, shadowy figures falling back
+into the underwood--and then we were hurrying along the track as fast as
+we could urge the mules.
+
+"There is another path farther on, Harry," said my uncle; "we must reach
+that."
+
+Onward, then, we went through the gloomy shades, black now as night
+could make them, not even daring to pause to try whether we could detect
+the sounds of pursuit.  That the reports of our guns would bring the
+Indians to that spot we had no doubt, but I was hopeful that they might
+not at first find the bodies of their companions; and if they did not, I
+knew that all endeavours to trace us by the mule-trail until the morning
+would be futile.
+
+Now the way was of pitchy blackness, then an opening would give us a
+glimpse of the stars.  The track was found and pursued for a long
+distance, and then my uncle called a halt, and we listened for some
+minutes for tokens of pursuit, but all was now still save the nocturnal
+cries of the inhabitants of the wilderness through which we were
+passing.
+
+Tom standing now close up, my uncle asked me if I thought I could
+recognise where we were.
+
+I could not; but Tom made a sort of circle, examining some of the great
+tree-trunks around.
+
+"It's all right, Mas'r Harry," he said; "we're on the right track for
+Goldenland.  That's it, straight away there to the left."
+
+"But are you sure, Tom?"  I said.  "Recollect how important it is that
+we should be right."
+
+"Well, so I do," said Tom gruffly.  "But there, if you won't believe one
+donkey, you perhaps will another.  Now, look ye here, Mas'r Harry, this
+here left-hand mule of mine is one of them as we took with us to the
+cave, and we'll have his opinion.  If he goes off to the right, I'm
+wrong; but if he remembers the way and goes off to the left, why, it's
+being a witness in my favour.  Now, then, moke, cock them old long ears
+of yours and go ahead."
+
+As he spoke Tom led one of his mules to the front, gave it a clap on the
+back, and it trotted forward and went off down the dark track Tom had
+declared for.
+
+"Now, who's right, Mas'r Harry?" said Tom triumphantly, as he halted at
+the opening into the ravine, just as, far above us, we could see, pale,
+cold, and stately, mountain peak after mountain peak, whose icy slopes
+were just growing visible, lit by the faint streak in the east which
+told of the coming day.
+
+Tom led on again, and by degrees the familiar sides of the ravine became
+more and more steep and craggy, the way grew narrower, the music of the
+little rill was audible; and at last, just as the sun was rising, we
+reached the rocky barrier of the great cave, and prepared to halt.
+
+But there was no occasion.  Tom's left-hand mule slowly began to climb
+the rocks, the second mule followed, as did those ridden by my aunt and
+Lilla, without word or urging, and we were just congratulating ourselves
+upon our escape, when Tom, who had crept close to me as I turned for an
+instant to peer back along the valley, pointed with one hand towards the
+left side where the crags stood out most roughly.
+
+I followed his pointing finger and then started, as I was just in time
+to see a dark form, barely visible in the shadow beneath some
+overhanging rocks, crawl silently away with a stealthy, cat-like motion.
+
+"Jaguar, Tom?"  I said, though my heart gave my lips the lie.
+
+"Indian!" said Tom laconically; and then I knew that our coming would
+soon be spread through the tribe of those who constituted the guardians
+of the treasure, for this was evidently one posted as a sentinel to
+watch still the sacred place where the treasure might yet again be
+brought to rest when those who were its enemies should sleep.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY THREE.
+
+TRACKED.
+
+I was obliged to acknowledge that it was more than we could expect to
+reach the cavern without being discovered, and that we ought to be well
+content to have gained a haven of safety without loss or injury; but all
+the same my heart sank, and I had hard work to keep back the feeling of
+despair that, cold and deadening, came upon me.
+
+The thoughts I have set down here flashed through my brain almost
+momentarily, but I was brought back to the necessity for action by a
+motion now made by Tom.
+
+"Shall I, Mas'r Harry?" he said.  And he covered the retreating Indian
+with his gun.
+
+"No," I said, arresting him.  "It would only be more bloodshed, and
+would not prevent our being discovered."
+
+The next moment I thought that I was wrong, and that the destruction of
+that one foe might be our saving.  But it was too late now; the Indian
+had disappeared.
+
+I led the way farther in till the increasing darkness compelled a halt,
+and I said a few words of encouragement to the shuddering companions of
+our travel.
+
+"Tom," I then said--for the thought had that moment struck me--"we have
+no lights."
+
+Tom did not reply, but plunged into the darkness ahead; when, after a
+while, we could hear the clinking of flint and steel, followed, after a
+short interval, by a faint light, towards which one of Tom's mules
+directly began to walk, closely followed by the rest.
+
+"Is it safe to go on?" said my uncle.
+
+"Quite," I replied.  "I don't think any enemies would be here."
+
+I was divided in my opinions as to which way we should go.  It was most
+probable that the Indians would be aware of the existence of the
+bird-chamber, but would they penetrate to it?  I should much rather have
+made that our retreat; but at last I felt that I hardly dared, and that,
+if I wished for safety, we must take to the rift beyond the vault of the
+troubled waters, leaving the mules in the farthest corner by the arch of
+the tunnel.
+
+Leading the way, then, they followed me right away into this land of
+gloom and shadow, my brain being actively employed the while as to our
+defence of our stronghold.
+
+At last we reached the farthest chamber, below the rocky tongue which
+projected over the great gulf; and then, after securing the mules, with
+Tom's help, and to the great astonishment of my uncle, I fitted together
+the little raft, placed upon it the store of provisions, and then
+secured it to a piece of rock, ready at any moment for us to embark and
+continue our retreat along the tunnel; for I had come to the conclusion
+that it would be better not to expose the women to the terrors of the
+water passage unless absolutely obliged.
+
+Thus prepared for escape, I felt better satisfied; and after partaking
+of some refreshment, and urging Lilla and my aunt to try and obtain some
+rest upon the sandy floor, which was here clean and dry, I whispered to
+Tom to follow; and, this time in the dark, we began to thread our way
+towards the entrance.
+
+When we had left them about fifty yards behind we turned to gaze back,
+to see only the faintest glimmer of the candle they had burning; while
+at the end of another minute there was nothing but black darkness, for
+the passage had narrowed and wound round a huge block of stone.
+
+It was slow work, but I wanted to grow more familiar with the way; and
+at last, by persevering, we passed the vault where was the opening to
+the bird-chamber, and then pressed on till, nearing the entrance, we
+proceeded with more caution, for I was quite prepared to see a cluster
+of savages collected in the mouth of the great subterranean way.
+
+The caution was needed, for upon proceeding far enough we could hear the
+buzz of voices, and a glance showed me Garcia and a full score of his
+dark-skinned followers.
+
+In a few moments they crossed the rocky barrier and I could see that
+they were all armed with pine splints and preparing to light them.  It
+was evident, too, that there was a feeling of awe existing amongst the
+party, many of the savages hanging back till, by fierce and threatening
+gestures, Garcia forced them farther in.
+
+"He's at the bottom of half the mischief, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom.
+"The Indians are after the gold, and he's after Miss Lilla, so they've
+joined hand.  Let me bring him down, Mas'r Harry; there's a good chance
+now."
+
+My only reply was to lay my hand upon Tom's arm, and then we watched
+till fire was obtained, the pine torches lit, and, half driven by
+Garcia, the Indians led the way towards where we crouched.
+
+Compelled thus to retreat, we hurried back for some distance, our part
+being easy, for we had the black darkness, the knowledge of the way, and
+the excessively slow, timid advance of the enemy in our favour.
+
+On came the Indians, with their flashing torches lighting up in a
+beautiful though weird way each passage and vault through which they
+passed, and still we retreated before them, wondering at their silence;
+for Garcia's was the only voice heard beyond a whisper, and even his was
+subdued, as if the gloomy grandeur had some little influence upon his
+mind.
+
+Twice over there was a halt, and we learned that the Indians were
+striving to return, till by violent threats and expostulations Garcia
+once more urged them on.
+
+I did not wish to shed blood, otherwise we could have brought down enemy
+after enemy at our leisure, while I could not but think that the loss of
+one or two of the party would have produced a panic.  There was still,
+though, this for a last resource; and I kept feeling hopeful that the
+party would return, or else take the way which led to the bird-chamber.
+
+My latter surmises were correct, for, upon crossing the large vault, and
+gaining a good post of observation, we saw the Indians stop short and
+elevate their torches, pointing out the opening which led to the great
+guano-filled chasm, when Garcia placed six men there, evidently as
+sentinels, and collecting the rest, made a tour of the vault, and then
+pointed down the rift where Tom and I were hidden--the passage which led
+to the great gulf.
+
+"No, no, no!" chorused the Indians, giving vent to their negative in a
+wild despairing fashion.
+
+Then they all threw themselves upon their knees upon the rocky floor and
+began to crawl back.
+
+Garcia raged and stormed, but it soon became evident that if he explored
+the passage where we were, it must be alone.  Superstitious dread was
+evidently at the bottom of it all, and I breathed more freely as I felt
+that for the present, unless he could overcome his companions' terror,
+we were safe.
+
+The Indians seemed to be willing enough though to pursue the other
+route, for as soon as they went back to their six fellows they began
+pointing up at the dark passage and gesticulating, when, feeling
+probably that he must submit, Garcia changed the position of his
+sentinels, intending apparently to leave them to guard the passage where
+we were.  But here again there was a new difficulty; when the men found
+that the others were to depart, they refused at once to be left alone,
+and at last, after striking one of them down, Garcia had to submit, and
+sprang up the rocks, torch in hand, followed by all but two, the
+stricken man and another, who hastily retreated towards the mouth of the
+cavern.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY FOUR.
+
+ILLAPA.
+
+We were safe yet, and I felt quite hopeful as I thought of what an
+advantage we, as defenders, possessed in the darkness over an attacking
+party advancing light in hand.
+
+The sight, too, of the superstitious terror of the Indians was cheering,
+and I again felt assured that should Garcia persevere in his
+determination to search our part of the cave, he must seek other
+companions or else come alone.
+
+"Tom," I said then, gently, "we have been away some time now; creep back
+to my uncle and tell him quietly that the Indians are in the cave, but
+at present there is no danger to fear.  Ask him, though, to put out the
+light in case they should come this way."
+
+Tom made no answer, but crept away directly, leaving me in that thick
+darkness watching for the return of the enemy, and wondering whether we
+should succeed in getting safely away.
+
+My heart sank as I thought of our peril, with the cunning of the savage
+and the European mingled to fight against us; while, as to our position,
+we could set them, I was sure, at defiance here; but could we escape to
+the river?  I still hoped that they would not penetrate our part,
+forcing us to take to the raft; and at times I began to wonder whether
+it would not be better to resist their entrance for the sake of saving
+the mules, unless we could compel these to swim after the raft.
+
+My reverie was broken by the return of Tom.
+
+"All right, Mas'r Harry," he said; "they're in the dark now; but I think
+Miss Lilla was disappointed because you didn't go.  I'll keep watch if
+you'd like to go."
+
+If I'd like to go!  I fought down the desire, though, just as a distant
+echoing murmur, ever increasing, fell upon our ears, and we knew that
+the searchers were on their way back.
+
+Another minute, and with their last torch burning dimly they were
+scrambling down from the rift to the cavern chamber, and then hurrying
+away as fast as the obscurity would allow.
+
+The hours glided by, and at last it became manifest that there was to be
+no further search that night, so, with Tom, I cautiously made my way to
+the mouth of the cavern, to find that the enemy had made their bivouac
+just by the barrier, a bright fire illumining the broad arch, and
+ruddying the swarthy faces that clustered round, some standing, some
+lying about upon the sand, while a couple were evidently sentries and
+stood motionless a little farther in, gazing towards the interior of the
+cave.
+
+"No more visitors to-night," whispered Tom.
+
+Together we crept back--no light task--through the densely black maze,
+but at last we felt our way to where we had watched, when Tom,
+undertaking to be the first guard, I continued my journey to where
+Lilla, wearied out, was fast sleeping in her mother's arms.
+
+I told my uncle how we were situated, and then, after partaking of the
+refreshment he offered me, I lay down for a couple of hours' sleep; but
+I'm afraid I far exceeded it before I awoke with a start to try and
+recall where we were.  Soon after, though, I was at Tom's side, to find
+that he had twice been to the cave mouth to see the sentries still
+posted, and the rest of the Indian party sleeping round the fire.
+
+I should think that four hours must have elapsed, and then, at one and
+the same moment, I heard Tom's whisper and saw the distant glimmer of
+approaching lights.
+
+"Look out, Mas'r Harry!"
+
+The lights grew brighter moment by moment, and then we could see once
+more the party of Indians coming slowly forward, headed by Garcia, upon
+whose fierce face the torch he carried flashed again and again.
+
+But it soon became evident that the Indians were advancing very
+unwillingly; and more than once, when, alarmed by the light, one of the
+great birds went flapping and screaming by, there was a suppressed yell,
+and the men crowded together as if for mutual protection.
+
+At last they stood together in the centre of the vault, and Garcia made
+a hasty survey, pausing at last by the passage, where we watched him
+hold up his light and peer down it, and then turn to his companions.
+
+The conversation we could not understand, but it was evident that Garcia
+was urging them to follow him, and that they refused.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom, "why, if we could be in the
+bird-chamber and fire off both guns, how those niggers would cut and run
+like a lot of schoolboys."
+
+"Hist!"  I said softly.
+
+For Garcia was now evidently appealing most strongly to one who appeared
+to be the leader of the Indians--a tall, bronzed giant of a fellow, who
+pointed, waved his arms about, and made some long reply.
+
+"I'd give something to understand all that, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom.
+
+"He says that if the senor's enemies and the searchers for the sacred
+treasure are in this direction, the great spirit who dwells in this part
+of the cave has flown with them down into the great hole that reaches
+right through the world."
+
+"Uncle!"  I exclaimed, as he whispered these words close to our ears.
+
+"I was uneasy about you, Harry," he replied.  "But who is that--Garcia?
+Ah! he will never get the Indians to come here.  They dread this gloomy
+place, and believe it is full of the departed souls of their tribe.  I
+have heard that they will never come beyond a certain point, and this
+must be the point."
+
+Standing where we did we could plainly see all that was taking place,
+even to the working of the excited countenances.  Garcia was evidently
+furious with disappointment, and, as my uncle afterwards informed me,
+spared neither taunt nor promise in his endeavours to get the Indians
+forward, telling them that they risked far more from their gods by
+leaving the treasure-takers unpunished than by going in there after
+them.  He told them that they must proceed now--that it was imperative,
+and as he spoke in a low, deep voice, it gave us a hint as to our own
+remarks, for the cavern was like some great whispering gallery, and his
+words came plainly to us, though few of them were intelligible to my
+ear.
+
+All Garcia's efforts seemed to be in vain, and the Indians were
+apparently about to return, when our enemy made a last appeal.
+
+"No," said the Indian, who was certainly the leader; "we have done our
+part.  We have chased them to the home of the great god Illapa, and he
+will punish them.  They took away the great treasure, but have they not
+brought it back?  It would be offending him, and bringing down his wrath
+upon us, if we did more.  If the treasure-seekers should escape, then we
+would seize them; but they will not, for yonder is the great void where
+Illapa dwells; and those who in olden times once dared to go as far were
+swallowed up in the great home of thunder."
+
+The Indian spoke reverently and with a display of dignity, beside which
+the rage and gesticulations of Garcia looked contemptible.
+
+As a last resource it seemed to strike him that he would once more have
+the bird-chamber searched, and, appealing to the Indians, they
+unwillingly climbed up to the ledge for the second time, and disappeared
+through the rift, leaving Garcia, torch in one hand and pistol in the
+other, guarding the passage where we crouched; now walking to and fro,
+now coming close up to enter a few yards, holding his light above his
+head; but darkness and silence were all that greeted him.  I trembled,
+though, lest he should hear the whinnying of the mules, which, though
+distant, might have reached to where he stood.  At last, to our great
+relief, he stepped back into the vault, and began to pace to and fro.
+
+For full two hours Garcia walked impatiently up and down there by the
+torch he had stuck in the sand at the mouth of the passage, and then
+came the murmurs of the returning voices of the savages, accompanied by
+shriek after shriek of the frightened birds, scared by the lights which
+were intruding upon their domain.
+
+As the searching party descended, Garcia hurried towards them, seeing
+evidently at a glance that they had no tidings, but now using every art
+he could command to persuade the chief to follow him.  He pointed and
+gesticulated, asserting apparently that he felt a certainty of our being
+in the farther portion of the passage where his torch was stuck.  But
+always there was the same grave courtesy, mingled with a solemnity of
+demeanour on the chief's part, as if the subject of the inner cavern was
+not to be approached without awe.
+
+"We are safe, Harry," my uncle breathed in my ear at last.
+
+For it was plain that, satisfied that their work was done, the Indians
+were about to depart, when, apparently half mad with rage and
+disappointment, Garcia cocked the pistols he had in his belt, replaced
+them, and then, gun in one hand and torch in the other, he strode
+towards the passage, evidently with the intention of exploring it alone.
+
+The next moment a wild and mournful cry arose from the savage party,
+while their chief seemed staggered at Garcia's boldness, but recovering
+himself, he dashed forward, caught the half-breed by the arm, and strove
+to drag him back.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY FIVE.
+
+TAKING A PRISONER.
+
+A fierce struggle ensued, during which, for a few moments, the Indian
+proved the stronger.  Garcia's torch was extinguished, and the savage
+held him by clasping his arms tightly round his waist.  Then, with an
+effort, Garcia shook his adversary off, snatched up a torch stuck in the
+sand, and was already half a dozen yards down the passage, with our
+party in full retreat, when, with a yell of horror, the chief bounded
+after him, overtook him, and the struggle began anew.
+
+An instant more and Garcia's gun exploded, raising a roar of thundering
+echoes that was absolutely terrific.  Rolling volley after volley seemed
+to follow one another with the rapidity of thought, the very cavern
+appeared about to be crushed in, and, as we paused for an instant to
+gaze back, we could see the chief and all his followers upon their
+knees, their faces bent to the sand, and a dismal wailing chorus of
+"Illapa!  Illapa!  Illapa!"--the Indians' name for the god of thunder--
+could be fairly heard mingling with the rolling of the echoes.
+
+The chief was in the same position, with a burning torch close to his
+head, for which Garcia now returned, and stood for a moment hesitating,
+as he gazed at the prostrate figures behind.
+
+Would he dare to come on? or would he retreat? were now the questions we
+asked ourselves.
+
+The answer came in an instant, for Garcia was coming slowly on.  He
+paused for a few minutes when he reached the spot where we had watched
+from, and, stooping behind the rocks, he reloaded his piece; then, with
+his light above his head and his gun held ready, he pressed on, lighting
+us, though we were invisible to him, as we kept about fifty yards in
+advance.
+
+Twice over Tom wanted to fire; but he was restrained, for we hoped that,
+moment by moment, Garcia would hesitate and turn back.  But no; there
+was still the fierce satanic face, with its retiring forehead and
+shortly-cut black hair, glistening in the torchlight, ever coming
+forward out of the darkness, peering right and left, the torch now held
+down to seek for footprints in the sand, now to search behind some mass
+of crags.
+
+On came the light nearer and nearer, illumining the gloomy passage, and
+sending before it the dark shadows of the rocks in many a grotesque
+form.
+
+From where I stooped I could just catch sight of the sardonic face, with
+its rolling eyes, which scanned every cranny and crag.  Twenty yards--
+ten yards--five yards--he was close at hand now, when from far-off came
+the low whinny of a mule, followed directly by another.
+
+In an instant Garcia stopped short to listen.  Then the sardonic smile
+upon his face grew more pronounced, and, casting off his hesitation, he
+once more stepped forward nearer--nearer, till his torch, elevated as it
+was, shed its light upon us.  But he did not yet distinguish us from the
+rock around, and the next two steps bore him past, when his eye fell
+upon the flash of light from my gun-barrel, and, with an ejaculation in
+Spanish, he turned upon me, and we were face to face.  But ere his heart
+could have made many pulsations Tom's coat was over his head, the torch
+fell to the ground, to lie burning feebly upon the soil, there was a
+fierce struggle, and the swaying to and fro of wrestlers, the torch was
+trampled out, and then in the darkness there was the sound of a heavy
+fall, and, panting with exertion, Tom exclaimed:
+
+"I'm sitting on his head, Mas'r Harry, and he can't bite now.  Just you
+tie his legs together with your handkercher."
+
+I had thrown the gun aside, and, in spite of a few frantic plunges,
+succeeded in firmly binding the ankles of the prostrate man together.
+
+"Now, Mas'r Harry," whispered Tom, "take hold of one arm--hold it
+tight--and we'll turn him over on his face, and tie his hands behind his
+back.  Hold tight, for he's a slippery chap, and he'll make another
+fight for it.  He got away from me once, but I had him again directly.
+Now, then, over with him!  Here, ask your uncle to hold his legs down."
+
+There was a heave, a struggle, and then a half-suffocated voice
+exclaimed:
+
+"Tom!  Harry! are you both mad?"
+
+"Oh, Tom!"  I ejaculated; "what have you done?"
+
+"Ketched the wrong bird, Mas'r Harry, and no mistake," muttered Tom, as
+he hastily set my uncle at liberty.  "It was that darkness as done it.
+He slipped away like an eel just as the light went out."
+
+"Never mind," gasped my uncle.  "But what muscles you boys have!"
+
+"He did not go towards the entrance," I whispered excitedly, "and I have
+his gun.  If we are careful we shall have him yet."
+
+Then I could not help shuddering as I rejoiced over the merciful policy
+we had determined upon; for I thought how easily we might have caused
+the death of one of our own party.
+
+"It was an unlucky mistake, lads," whispered my uncle; "but we must have
+him, living or dead."
+
+The rest of the way to where we had left the companions of our trial was
+so narrow that by pressing cautiously forward I knew that we must
+encounter Garcia sooner or later.
+
+As we reached the part where the track ran along a ledge we divided, Tom
+continuing to walk along the ledge to where it terminated in the rocky
+tongue over the great gulf, while my uncle and I, trembling for those we
+loved, continued our search by the side of the little stream till we
+were where the passage widened into the vault where the mules were
+concealed, when I stopped short, my uncle going forward to search the
+vault, while I stayed to cut off the enemy's retreat, or to spring up
+the ledge to the help of Tom.
+
+I heard my uncle's whisper, and one or two timid replies, and then came
+an interval of anxious silence before my uncle crept back to me.
+
+"I have been all over the place, as near as I can tell, Harry," he
+whispered.  "Can he have passed us?"
+
+"Impossible!"  I said.  "Uncle, we must have a light."
+
+Without a word my uncle glided away; then I heard a rustle as of paper;
+there was the faint glow of a match dipped in a phosphorus bottle, the
+illumination of a large loose piece of paper, and then a torch was lit,
+showing us Garcia standing upon the extreme verge of the rocky point
+over the gulf; and at the same moment he drew the trigger of a pistol,
+to produce only a flash of the pan, which revealed to him his perilous
+position.
+
+"Senor Garcia!"  I cried loudly, as I climbed up to join Tom on the
+ledge which he must pass, "you are standing with a great gulf behind and
+on either side.  A step is certain death.  You are our prisoner!"
+
+With a howl like that of a wild beast he raised his other pistol and
+fired--the report echoing fearfully from the great abyss.  Then, darting
+forward, he leaped upon Tom, overturned him, and the next moment he was
+upon me, and we were in a deadly embrace, rolling down the side of the
+ledge, over and over in our fierce struggle, till we reached the little
+stream, whose waters were soon foaming around us.
+
+Garcia was active as one of the jaguars of the forest hard by; but I was
+young, and my muscles were pretty tough.  And, besides, a faint shriek
+that I had heard as he dashed at me had given me nerve for the struggle.
+
+It is hard to say, though, who would have gained the upper hand, for my
+principal efforts were directed at preventing him from drawing his
+knife, whilst I had his arms fast to his side, he all the while striving
+to free himself.
+
+I began to be hopeful, though, at last, when, by a feint, he got me
+beneath him, and the next moment he had forced my head beneath the icy
+waters of the little stream.  Very few minutes would have sufficed, for
+I could feel myself growing weaker; but there was help at hand.  We were
+dragged out, and by the time I had recovered myself sufficiently to
+wring the water from my eyes, and, with my temples throbbing, to gaze
+about, there was Garcia pinned to the ground by Tom, whose foot was upon
+the villain's throat, and his gun-barrel pointed at his head.
+
+"Now, then, Mas'r Harry," said Tom, "we've got the right one this time
+anyhow.  Here, come and stick your torch in here, Mas'r Landell, and
+we'll soon make it right."
+
+My uncle did as he was requested; and then, once more, Garcia made a
+savage fight for his liberty.
+
+But it was in vain; and while I helped to hold him down Tom tightly
+bound his legs, my uncle performing the same operation with the
+prisoner's hands.
+
+"That ain't no good, Mas'r Landell," said Tom.  "He'll wriggle them
+loose in no time.  Look here, I'll show you.  Turn him over."
+
+There was no heed paid to the savage glare nor the muttered Spanish
+oaths of our prisoner, as he was forced over on his face, when,
+producing some string, Tom placed Garcia's hands back to back, and then
+tightly tied his thumbs and his little fingers together with the stout
+twine.  A handkerchief was next bound round the wrists, and Tom rose.
+
+"He won't get over that, Mas'r Landell.  He'll lie there as long as we
+like--only, if he don't hold his tongue, we'll stick something in his
+mouth; and he may thank his stars that he has got off so well.  And now,
+Mas'r Harry, I proposes that we all go back and see what the Indians are
+doing; and if they are not gone, why, we'll all fire our guns off one
+after the other, as'll kick up such a hooroar as'll scare 'em into
+fits."
+
+Tom's advice found favour; but it was not until I had thoroughly
+satisfied myself of the security of my enemy's bonds that I had the
+heart to leave.
+
+Then, and then only, we crept cautiously back, till, after a long and
+painful walk, we perceived the faint glow from the burning torches in
+the vault of the entrance to the bird-chamber, and on making our way
+once more, as near as we dared go, we could see that the Indians were
+clustered together, and anxiously watching the passage.
+
+Stepping back, then, thirty or forty paces, we fired off six barrels in
+quick succession, with an effect that startled even ourselves, and, had
+the thundering roar been followed by the falling in of block after block
+of stone, I, for one, should not have been surprised.  It seemed as
+though the noise would never cease; but when, with the last
+reverberation dying away, we crept forward, it was only to find that
+there was darkness everywhere, for the Indians to the last man had fled.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY SIX.
+
+TAKING FLIGHT.
+
+It was with a feeling of thankfulness that can be well understood that
+we returned once more to the small cavern, to seek the rest and
+refreshment of which we were all so much in need.
+
+The words of encouragement we were able to utter respecting our present
+safety were most thoroughly needed, while the lights we now ventured to
+burn took off something of the sense of oppression caused by the
+darkness.
+
+Our arrangements were soon made for one to be always on guard, and
+trusting to the dread of the Indians for our safety in other directions,
+we gladly partook of the welcome rest.
+
+At the end of some hours we were seated together to consult upon our
+future operations, and arrived at the decision that the sooner we set
+off the better, and the next night was fixed upon for our departure.
+
+"You see, Harry," said my uncle, "that the difficulty is in journeying
+through the forest; if once we can strike a stream, the rest is easy."
+
+"Or would be if we had boats, uncle, or--"
+
+I stopped short, for I had recalled the skin-raft once more, and the
+possibility of increasing its size.  As my uncle had said, if once we
+could hit upon a good stream, the rest would be easy, floating ever
+downward from stream to river, and from river to one of the great
+waterways.
+
+Then came the subject of the treasure.
+
+"But are you sure that you have it safe?" said my uncle anxiously.
+
+"As safe, Uncle, as I soon hope to have our other treasures," I said,
+cheerfully.
+
+A visit to the mouth of the cave showed that all was still, and the
+valley to all appearance deserted.
+
+But our walk was not unprofitable, for we were able to collect a good
+bundle of pine-wood for torches, left behind by the Indians--brightly
+burning, resinous wood, which cast a powerful light when in use.
+
+We found Tom watching his prisoner on our return, and my aunt and Lilla
+ready to welcome us gladly.  But not a sigh was uttered--not a question
+as to when they might expect to escape; they were patience exemplified.
+
+As to the prisoner, Tom said that he was as sulky as a bear with a sore
+head.  It was a great tie upon us, but upon retaining him in safety
+rested our success; for it seemed evident that the Indians believed that
+their share in the matter was at an end, and had gone away strengthened
+in their belief that it was death to him who penetrated the mysterious
+portion of the cave, sacred to the thunder god, Garcia not having
+returned.
+
+My uncle relieved Tom--not to rest, but to aid me in seeking to recover
+the treasure; but upon a second consideration it was determined not to
+proceed further until the next morning.
+
+Watching and sleeping in turns, the next morning arrived, and we once
+more journeyed to the mouth of the cave.
+
+All in the vale was silent as the grave; not a leaf rustling.
+
+On returning, the mules were well fed, only leaving one more portion.
+We breakfasted, and the prisoner, compelled at last by hunger,
+condescended to partake of some food; when we afterwards moved to a
+narrow part, where our proceedings were to him invisible.
+
+A rather anxious question now arose: what were we to do with him?
+
+We could not leave him bound, to die of starvation in the darkness of
+the cavern; humanity forbade the thought for an instant.  We could not
+take him with us, neither could we take his life in cold blood, even
+though our safety depended upon it.
+
+"We must take him a part of the way, and then leave him in some track,
+where there is a possibility of his being found," said my uncle.  "He
+ought to die, Harry; but we cannot turn murderers."
+
+It was evident that our prisoner did not expect much mercy; for we could
+see that his face was absolutely livid when, pistol in hand, either of
+us approached to examine his bonds; and once, in his abject dread, he
+shrieked aloud to Lilla to come and save him from me.
+
+My uncle's seemed the only plan that we could adopt; and leaving him in
+charge, Tom and I fixed our light at the head of the raft, and, to the
+horror of Lilla and Mrs Landell, set off upon our subterranean voyage--
+one which produced no tremor in us now, for familiarity had bred
+contempt.
+
+The passage was safely traversed till we came to the hiding-place of the
+treasure, when, after a few attempts to fish up the packages, we found
+that there was no resource but for one of us to plunge boldly into the
+icy water.
+
+Tom would have gone, but I felt that it was my turn; and after divesting
+myself of my clothing I lowered myself over the side of the raft, waded
+a little, and then, after a few tries, succeeded in bringing up, one at
+a time, the whole of the treasure.  Then, with a little contriving, I
+once more obtained a place upon the heavily-weighted raft, dressed, and
+we floated back in triumph to where, torch in hand, stood Lilla gazing
+anxiously along the dark tunnel, and ready to give a joyous cry as she
+saw our safe return.
+
+I sent Tom to relieve my uncle's guard, and he hurried excitedly to my
+side and helped me to unload.
+
+"Harry, my boy," he exclaimed huskily as we lifted the packages on to
+the rocks, "I can hardly believe it.  Is it true?"
+
+I smiled in his face, and then with more rope we bound the packages
+securely before leaving them to drain off the water.
+
+Our next act was to carefully take the raft to pieces and save the bands
+by which it was secured.  This was no easy task, for the water had
+saturated and tightened the fastenings, which we did not cut, because
+they would be extremely valuable in fastening it together again.
+
+It proved to be a very, very long job, but we worked at it with all our
+might, knowing as we did that our future depended upon our getting the
+pieces of our pontoon safely with us to some stream, where we could fit
+it once more together and use it to help in floating down to a place of
+refuge.
+
+"It's a rum job, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "My word, if these knots
+weren't well tied!  I never thought about having to undo it over again."
+
+"Never mind, Tom; work away," I cried.
+
+"Oh!  Ah!  I'll work away," he replied.  "That's better!  That's one of
+'em.  They won't bear the lot, Mas'r Harry, when we fits it together
+again?"
+
+"If the raft is not strong enough, Tom, we must make it stronger," I
+said; and he gave a grunt and worked away, tugging at the knots and very
+often using his teeth.
+
+At last, though, we had all the ties secured together in a bunch ready
+for immediate use--the poles bound in small bundles, and the skins
+fastened together by their necks, they having the advantage of being
+very light.
+
+Then followed a pause for rest and refreshment, with a short
+consultation between my uncle and me as to our plans, which resulted in
+a busy hour at work, two of the mules being laden then with the gold.
+
+This was a very difficult task, as the packages were so awkward and
+heavy, the object being to make them secure against any antic on the
+part of the mules if they became restive, and also to guard against the
+corners of the plates rubbing the animals' backs.
+
+"I'd give anything to open those bags, Harry," said my uncle.  "I feel
+as curious as a boy."
+
+"Take my word for it, Uncle," I replied, "that they are wonderful
+treasures.  Come, I'll make a bargain with you."
+
+"What is it, my boy?"
+
+"You shall do the unpacking and the breaking up when we set to in
+safety, and melt them down into ingots."
+
+"If we ever have the chance," he said sadly.
+
+"Don't be down-hearted, Uncle," I cried cheerily.  "Recollect we are
+English, and Englishmen never know the meaning of the word `fail.'"
+
+"True, my boy," he replied; "but we have our work before us."
+
+"And that's just the work we mean to get done," said Tom, interposing
+his opinion.  "And now just you look here, moke," he continued,
+addressing the mule he was helping to load--one which kept on laying
+down its ears and showing its teeth as if it meant to bite--"here am I
+a-doing all I can to make your load easy and comfortable for your ugly
+back, and you're saying you're a-going to bite.  Am I to kick you in the
+ribs?  'Cause if you're not quiet I just will."
+
+The mule seemed to understand either Tom's words or the threatening
+movement of his foot, for it allowed itself to be loaded in peace; and
+soon after the valuable treasure was declared to be quite safe, though I
+knew perfectly well that any violent fit of kicking on the part of the
+obstinate beasts must result in the whole being dislodged.
+
+The next task was to apportion the remainder of our extremely reduced
+stock of provision between the two mules that my aunt and Lilla were to
+ride; and upon these mules, on the off-side away from the stirrup, I
+proposed to secure the light poles and skins of the raft.
+
+"They will be very awkward going amongst the trees," I said, "but it is
+the best we can do."
+
+"Why not carry them?" said my uncle.
+
+"Because we must have our hands free to use our weapons," I replied.
+
+"True, my lad," he said, "and we might have to drop and not recover
+them."
+
+"They'll be no end of a bother for the ladies, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.
+"Lookye here: they sticks 'll ride as comf'able as can be atop of the
+gold bags.  Why not have 'em here?"
+
+"Because, Tom, it may be necessary to leave the gold bags behind, and we
+shall want the raft to escape."
+
+"Leave the gold behind, Mas'r Harry!" he cried; "not if I know it."
+
+"Life is worth more than gold, Tom," I said in reply.
+
+Tom made no answer.  He only set his teeth very hard, and the skins and
+poles were secured just as I wished.
+
+Towards evening, according to arrangement, Tom led the way with one of
+the gold mules; my uncle followed leading another and bearing a light,
+and the others required no inducement to keep close behind.
+
+Garcia must have imagined that he was to be left to starve, for he did
+not see me as I stood back listening to the pattering of the mules' feet
+upon the hard rock, and the silence that fell directly after when they
+touched sand; and, raising his voice, he gave so wild and despairing a
+shriek that my uncle came hurrying back.
+
+"Harry, my dear lad, surely you have not--"
+
+"No, Uncle," I said contemptuously, "I had not even spoken.  It was his
+coward heart that smote him."
+
+Loosening his legs, which of late we had slackened so as to guard
+against numbness, we made him rise; and then forcing my arm under his, I
+led him along till we overtook the last mule bearing my aunt; and then
+our slow, dark journey was continued till, nearing the entrance, the
+lights were extinguished and my uncle, taking Tom's place as leader, the
+latter stole forward, and returned in half an hour to say that the sun
+had set, and that though he had watched long and carefully from the very
+mouth of the cave, there was nothing to be seen.
+
+We went forward then, to rest for fully an hour in the cavern close now
+to the barrier, for the darkness fell swiftly into the ravine, rolling,
+as it were, down the mountain-sides; and then, with beating hearts, we
+prepared to start, our course being along the little valley to the
+entrance, and then, according to my uncle's plans, as nearly south-east
+as we could travel until we could hit upon a stream.
+
+The time for starting at length came, and after a little further
+consultation Garcia was once more carefully secured and laid upon his
+back in the mouth of the cave, that being the only plan we could adopt;
+and then, panting with excitement, each man with all his weapons ready
+for immediate action, we started in single file and began to move down
+the ravine.
+
+The darkness was intense, and but for the sagacity of the leading mule
+our progress would have been slow indeed; but the patient brute went on
+at a quiet, regular pace, and his fellows followed, the breathing of the
+animals and the slight rustle through the herbage being all that smote
+the ear.
+
+I should think that we had gone about a quarter of a mile, straining our
+eyes to catch sight of an enemy on either side as we made our way
+through what was like a dense bank of darkness, when, loud and clear
+upon the night air, rang out a wild, strange cry, which made us
+instinctively stop to listen.
+
+Twice more it rang out, evidently distant, but still plainly heard as it
+echoed along the ravine.
+
+"It is some beast of prey, but it will not come near us," said my uncle,
+to encourage Mrs Landell.
+
+"Harry, what is it?" whispered Lilla.
+
+Her soft arm was passed round my neck as she clung, trembling, to me,
+unable to master her agitation.
+
+"We must push on," I said.
+
+Once more the mules were in motion when the cry rang out again, louder
+and clearer this time.
+
+I did not answer Lilla's question, for I thought it better not; but I
+had my own thoughts upon the subject, and I was wondering whether my
+uncle suspected the meaning of the cry, when I was startled by a voice
+which seemed to rise out of the darkness.
+
+"Mas'r Harry--Mas'r Harry!  I shall never forgive myself.  Only to think
+of me being the one as tied the last knot, and then never to think of
+gagging him.  He'll be there shouting till he brings down all the
+Indians within twenty miles.  Let's make haste, for I sha'n't breathe
+till we get out of this great long furrer here."
+
+The darkness was still so thick that we could hardly see the bushes
+against which we brushed, while even when passing beneath dense masses
+of foliage there seemed to be no difference.  A hundred enemies might
+have been right in front of us, and we should have walked right into
+their midst.
+
+It was a daring adventure; but it was only by keeping on that we could
+hope to escape, and if the black darkness did not prove our friend until
+we were clear of the ravine, I felt that we could hardly hope to get
+away.
+
+The cries still continued at intervals; but now every cry only seemed to
+nerve us to greater exertion, and at last they sounded but faintly, as,
+under the impression that we were now past the entrance to the rift, I
+was about to tell Tom to try and bear off to the right, if the
+undergrowth would allow.  We had all drawn up, and the mules were
+reaching down their heads, tempted by the dewy grass, when Tom gave a
+warning whisper; and directly after, just to our left, came the sound of
+bodies moving through the bushes, coming nearer and nearer, till about
+abreast, when they turned off again, and seemed to be proceeding up the
+ravine towards the cavern.
+
+It was a painful five minutes as we stood there, trembling lest one of
+the mules should shake buckle or strap; for no one there, on afterwards
+comparing notes, had a doubt as to the cause of the sounds.  It was
+evidently a body of some half dozen men making their way as fast as the
+darkness would allow, and it was not until all was once more quiet that
+we could again breathe freely, and continue our journey as swiftly as we
+could pass through the trees.
+
+We had no difficulty in journeying to the right, and it soon became
+evident that we were out of the rift; but I had very little hope of our
+being able to continue in a straight line, seeking the direction where
+we expected to find a river.
+
+Our progress was necessarily slow, but every half mile, we all felt, was
+that distance nearer to safety.  I was hopeful, too, about our trail;
+the dew fell heavily, and that and the elastic nature of the growth
+through which we passed, would, I thought, possibly conceal our track
+from those who might try to follow it.
+
+And so we journeyed on through that thick darkness, till the first grey
+dawn of day found us still hurrying through the dripping foliage, heavy
+everywhere with the moisture deposited during the night.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY SEVEN.
+
+ON THE RIVER'S BRINK.
+
+"Now we can see what we're about, Mas'r Harry," said Tom cheerfully.
+"Look, there's the first peep of where the sun's coming, and if we'd
+been boxing the compass all night we couldn't have been trundling more
+south-easter than we are.  Hooroar, Miss Lilla, keep up your sperrits,
+and we shall soon be all right."
+
+Lilla smiled a response, and, cheered by the bright day, we made good
+progress during the next two hours before the mules began to flag, when,
+letting them graze, we made a short and hasty meal ourselves, each eye
+scanning the forest round for enemies, such as we knew might spring up
+at any moment.
+
+An hour's rest taken of necessity, and then we were once more journeying
+on, hopeful that we might soon strike upon one of the tributaries of the
+great stream fed by the eternal snow of the mountains; but hours went
+by, and no sign of river appeared, till suddenly, Tom, who was in
+advance, said softly:
+
+"Here's water somewhere, not far off, Mas'r Landell, for my mule's
+cocking his nose up, and sniffing at a fine rate."
+
+There was no doubt of its being the case, for no sooner had Tom's beast
+given evidence of its power of scent, than similar manifestations
+followed from the others; and now, instead of nagging and labouring
+along, the hot and wearied beasts broke into a trot, and had to be
+restrained as they tugged at the bridles.
+
+The character of the undergrowth now, too, began to indicate moisture,
+and that floods sometimes swept along the low flat jungle, where we with
+some difficulty forced our way; and at last, almost overcome by the heat
+and excitement, we came suddenly upon one of the broad sluggish streams
+that intersect the vast forest lands, and go to form the vast water
+system of the Orinoco.  The stream, in spite of its sombre current and
+the desolation of its muddy banks, whispered to us hope and escape from
+the pursuit that might be now even pressing upon our heels.
+
+My uncle and I hurried forward to scan the bank, ready to shoot at any
+noxious reptile that might show fight.  But we were not called upon to
+fire; for though a couple of large crocodiles scuttled off into the
+water, and once or twice there was a sharp rustling amongst the reeds,
+we were unmolested; and bringing forward our weaker companions, we made
+a temporary halt.
+
+Now it is quite possible that, had I been a naturalist, I might have
+called the horrible reptiles that abounded in these muddy streams by
+some other name than crocodile; but even now, after consulting various
+authorities, I am not quite satisfied as to the proper term.  The
+English of the district always called them crocodiles, and to me they
+certainly seemed to differ from the alligator or cayman, whose
+acquaintance I afterwards made amongst the lagoons of the Southern
+United States.
+
+But to return to our position on the river bank.
+
+We knew that there was no time to be lost; and having cut a few stout
+bamboos, we inflated the four skins we had, but not without some
+difficulty, as they required soaking, and the tying up of one or two
+failing places.
+
+Our little raft was at length made, and, provided with a couple of
+poles, afforded easy means of escape for three--at a pinch for four.
+
+And now came the arrangements for the gold.
+
+It seemed cruel, but, situated as we were, what else could we do?  I did
+not like the plan, but could see no alternative; so with Tom's aid the
+mules were unloaded, and we led the poor brutes into the leafy screen,
+so that Lilla and her mother might not be witnesses of how they were to
+be offered up for our safety.
+
+For our plan was this--to slay the poor beasts, and with their inflated
+skins to try and make a raft that should bear Tom, myself, and the gold.
+
+My heart failed me as the faithful brutes, that had brought us thus far,
+turned their great soft eyes up to mine, and for a few minutes I
+hesitated, trying to think out some other plan for our escape, when a
+warning cry from my uncle brought Tom and myself back to the river bank,
+where we could see, half a mile higher up the stream, a couple of
+canoes, each containing two Indians, who were lazily paddling down
+towards where we were.
+
+At first we took them for enemies, and gave ourselves up for lost; and I
+was about to beg of my uncle to risk flight with Lilla and my aunt upon
+the little raft, while I and Tom covered their escape with our guns; but
+the distance being lessened each moment, we could make out that these
+men belonged to one of the inoffensive fishing tribes who lived upon the
+rivers and their banks; and a new thought struck me--one which I
+directly communicated to my uncle.
+
+"Keep strict guard," I then said, "and mind this--a loud whistle shall
+bring us directly back to your help.  Come, Tom--bring your gun, man!"
+
+The next minute Tom and I were upon the raft, dragging ourselves slowly
+upstream by means of the bushes that overhung the river, till we found
+that the Indians could see our coming, when we began to paddle the best
+way we could out towards the middle.
+
+As I expected, the Indians first stopped, and then made as if to turn
+round and flee, raising their paddles for a fierce dash, when--
+
+"Now, Tom!"  I exclaimed; and, standing up together, we presented our
+guns as if about to fire.
+
+"Ah! they're like the crows at home," muttered Tom; "they know what a
+gun is."
+
+Tom was right; for the poor fellows uttered a wail of misery, held up
+their paddles, and then suffered their canoes to drift helplessly
+towards us.
+
+"Quick, Tom!"  I now exclaimed; "lay down your gun; and try and fight
+against this stream, or we shall lose them after all."
+
+Tom seized the bamboo pole, and by rapid beating of the water contrived
+to keep the raft stationary till the Indians were nearly abreast, when,
+pointing to the bank from which we had come, and still menacing them
+with my gun, I made the poor timid creatures slowly precede us, and tow
+us as well, to where my uncle was anxiously watching.
+
+Upon landing, the poor fellows crouched before us, and laid their
+foreheads upon the muddy grass; when, after trying to reassure them, my
+uncle, who knew a little of their barbarous tongue, explained that we
+only wanted their canoes; when, overjoyed at escaping with their lives,
+the poor abject creatures eagerly forced the paddles into our hands.
+
+"Tell them, Uncle, that we don't want their fishing-gear," I said; when
+there was a fresh demonstration of joy, and Tom threw out their rough
+lines and nets on to the grass.
+
+"They may as well help us load, Mas'r Harry, mayn't they?" said Tom--a
+proposition I at once agreed to.
+
+In a very short space of time the gold was all placed in one canoe while
+we tethered the other by a short rope to the raft: this boat contained
+the provisions and ammunition, and in this Tom and I were to go, towing
+the gold canoe and the raft, upon which more convenient place my uncle,
+armed and watchful while we paddled, was to sit with Lilla and my aunt.
+
+It was nearly dark when our arrangements were at an end; and thankful
+that, so far, we had been uninterrupted, I drew the raft close in,
+secured it to our canoe, and Tom took his place, paddle in hand.  My
+uncle made a couple of good easy seats for Lilla and my aunt, and then
+took his place beside them; and now nothing was wanted but for me to
+take a paddle beside Tom, when he exclaimed:
+
+"This here stuff makes the canoe all hang to the starn, Mas'r Harry.
+Tell you what, I'll go in that canoe for the present, and get the
+freight shifted, and then join you again."
+
+I nodded acquiescence, and then turned to the poor miserable creatures
+whom we seemed to be robbing, and who now stood, dejected of aspect,
+watching us.
+
+"What shall I give them?"  I thought.  "A gun--a knife or two?  Pish!
+how absurd!  Here--here!"  I exclaimed, catching the two nearest savages
+by the hand and hastily drawing them into the brake, when the others
+followed.  "One apiece for you, my good fellows, and you gain by the
+exchange."
+
+They could not understand my word; but as I pointed to the animals
+tethered in the gloom, and then placed the bridle of a mule in each of
+the four men's hands, their joy seemed unbounded, and, with a nod and a
+smile, I was turning to depart, eager to continue our flight, when a
+wild cry from the raft seemed to fix me to the spot.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY EIGHT.
+
+IN THE DARK.
+
+The cry was repeated twice before I could make a dash through the thick
+swampy growth towards the bank.
+
+"Quick--quick, Harry!  They are here!"
+
+"Mas'r Harry!" cried Tom in a piteous voice.
+
+The next moment I was on the trampled bank a little below where we had
+landed, to see in a moment that the little raft was being pushed off;
+for in cat-like silence our enemies had approached us, and I bitterly
+repented that I had not joined Tom, instead of wasting time over the
+fishers whose canoes we had taken.  I knew that not a moment had been
+wasted, and that it would have been impossible to have half-made another
+raft by this time; but the means of safety had been open to me, and, so
+as to be fair, I had slighted it; while now I was in despair.
+
+Those were terrible moments!  As I emerged from the brake there arose a
+fierce yell; there was a scattered volley, and the flashes gave me a
+momentary glimpse of the pale face of Lilla upon the raft.  Then there
+was the loud splashing of the water, and the hurrying to and fro of
+dimly-seen figures--for the darkness was now deepening with that
+rapidity only known in equatorial regions.
+
+A moment after, I heard the splashing of water, as of some one swimming;
+and feeling that it was my only chance, I prepared to dash into the
+muddy current, when there was a crash, a hoarse cry, and a heavy body
+struck me on the back, driving me down upon my hands and knees, a tight
+clutch was upon my throat, and I felt that I was a prisoner, when, with
+a despairing effort for liberty, I threw myself sidewise towards the
+river, rolled over in the mud, and then my adversary and I were beneath
+the water.
+
+We rose directly, and I felt that I was free; for, with a guttural cry,
+my foe loosened his hold and made for the bank, while, blinded and
+confused, I swam desperately in the direction I thought might have been
+taken by the raft.
+
+I almost dashed through the water for a few minutes, as I tried to put
+in force every feint I knew in swimming; while, as I made the current
+foam around, I could hear the noise of struggling, muttered
+imprecations, and then a low, panting breathing, and then once more
+there was silence.
+
+I began to feel that I had made my last effort, and I was nerving myself
+for another stroke when my hand touched something hard.
+
+"Loose your hold or I fire!" cried a fierce voice, and the barrel of a
+gun was pressed against my cheek.
+
+"Uncle!"  I gasped, in a voice that did not sound like mine, and as I
+spoke I grasped the cold barrel of the gun.
+
+There was a loud ejaculation, a faint cry, hands were holding mine, I
+could feel the raft rocking to and fro, as if about to be overturned;
+and then, as I felt that I was drawn upon it--that I was saved--my
+senses reeled, and my mind became dark as the sky which hung over the
+river.
+
+I believe my swoon did not last many minutes.  How could it, when my
+head was being held to my aunt's breast, which heaved with emotion, and
+hot tears were falling upon my forehead.
+
+"Lilla?"  I whispered.
+
+"Harry!" was breathed upon my cheek, as she came forward.
+
+But this was no time for talking, and rallying my strength I rose to my
+knees.
+
+"I thought I should never have reached you, Uncle," I said.
+
+"I did my best, Harry," he whispered; "but I felt that when those
+blood-hounds leaped suddenly out from the brake that I must push off."
+
+"But what was that struggle I heard?  Did I not hear Garcia's voice?"
+
+"Yes," said my uncle, huskily.
+
+"And where is Tom?"
+
+My uncle was silent.
+
+"Poor Tom?"  I said, in an inquiring voice.
+
+"Yes," said my uncle, huskily.  "It seemed to me that Garcia and another
+reached the canoe Tom was in--the gold canoe, Harry--and that then there
+was a desperate fight, which lasted some minutes.  I had seized the
+paddle, and tried to make for where the struggle seemed to be going on;
+but first there was a faint, gurgling cry, and then utter silence; and
+though I softly paddled here and there I could find nothing.  Harry,
+that canoe was heavily laden--the gold was a dead weight--"
+
+"And it took down with it what was worth ten thousand times more than
+the vile yellow trash," I cried bitterly--"as true a heart as ever beat.
+Oh, Uncle--Uncle!  I have murdered as noble a man as ever breathed, and
+as faithful a friend.  Oh, Tom--Tom!"  I groaned.
+
+I could say no more; but out there that night on the breast of the
+black, swift stream, with not a sound now but the sobs of the women to
+break the terrible silence, I--a woman myself now in heart--bent down to
+cover my face with my hands and cry like a child.
+
+At last I grew more calm, for there was work to be done.  I found that
+we had floated on to a kind of mud bank, and were aground, and I had to
+help my uncle to get the raft off, which we managed by drawing the canoe
+up alongside, and then getting in and paddling hard, with the effect
+that the raft at last floated off, and we retained our places in the
+canoe guiding the raft down the swiftly flowing stream.
+
+Morning at last, to bring no brightness to my heart.
+
+We paddled on, the little raft, buoyant as possible, following swiftly
+in our wake.
+
+"Harry," said my uncle, almost sternly, "I have thought it over during
+the darkness of the night, and I cannot feel that we have been wanting
+in any way.  Poor lad! it was his fate."
+
+"Uncle," I cried, throwing down my paddle, "I can bear this no longer.
+I must go back!"
+
+"Harry," cried my uncle, "you shall not act in that mad fashion.  You
+have escaped with life, and now you would throw it away."
+
+"Is it not mine to cast away if I like?"  I said bitterly.
+
+"No," he said in a low tone, as he bent forward and whispered something
+in my ear.
+
+"Say no more, Uncle--pray say no more," I groaned.  "Indeed, I believe
+that I am half mad.  I would almost sooner have died myself than that
+this should have happened.  How can I ever face those at home?"
+
+"Harry, my lad," said my uncle, "take up your paddle, and use it.  You
+are thinking of the future--duty says that you must think now of the
+present.  We have two lives to save; and, until we have them in one of
+the settled towns, our work is not done."
+
+I took up my paddle in silence, and plunged the blade in the stream, and
+we went on, swiftly and silently, along reach after reach of the river.
+
+Many hours passed without an alarm, and then, just as we were passing
+into another and a wider river, there came from the jungly edge of the
+left bank a puff of smoke, and a bullet struck the canoe.
+
+"To the right," whispered my uncle softly; "we shall soon be out of
+that."
+
+The paddles being swiftly plied, we made for the opposite bank, striving
+hard to place those we had with us out of reach of harm.  But with
+bullets flying after us our efforts seemed very slow, and the raft was
+struck twice, and the water splashed over us several times, before I
+felt a sharp blow on my shoulder--one which half numbed me--while a
+bullet fell down into the bottom of the canoe.
+
+"Spent shot, Harry," said my uncle, striking on alternate sides with his
+paddle, for I was helpless for the next quarter of an hour.  "There will
+be no wound, only a little pain."
+
+The skin-raft held together well--light and buoyant--so that our
+progress down stream was swift, but apparently endless, day after day,
+till our provisions were quite exhausted, and our guns had to be called
+into requisition to supply us with food.
+
+We were suffering too much to appreciate the wonders of the region
+through which we were passing; but I have since then often recalled it
+here at home in the quiet safety of my chair by my fireside, wondering
+often too how it was that we managed ever to get down to a civilised
+town in safety.
+
+There was, of course, always the consciousness of knowing that, if we
+kept afloat, sooner or later we must reach the sea; but what an
+interminable way it was!  At one time we were slowly gliding down a wide
+river whose banks were not only covered to the water's edge with the
+dense growth of the primeval forest, but the huge branches of the great
+trees spread far over the muddy flood.  These trees were woven together,
+as it were, by the huge cable-like lianas which ran from tree to tree.
+From others hung the draperies of Spanish moss, while others were
+clothed with flowers from the water's edge to the very summits, whose
+sweet blooms filled the air with their spicy odours.  This wondrous wall
+of verdure rose to a great height; and when the current sometimes swept
+us near what was really a shoreless shore great herons would sometimes
+take flight, or a troop of monkeys rush chattering up amongst the leafy
+branches, going along hand over hand with the most astonishing velocity,
+or making bounds that I would think must end in their falling headlong
+into the river.  But no, they never seemed to miss the branch that was
+their aim, and this, too, when often enough one of these agile little
+creatures would be a mother with a couple of tiny young ones clinging so
+tightly to her neck that the three bodies seemed to be only one.
+
+Curious little creatures these monkeys were, but as a rule exceedingly
+shy.  Sometimes on a hot mid-day I would be seated listlessly, paddle in
+hand, dipping it now and then to avoid some mass of tangled driftwood,
+and then watching the great wall of verdure, I would see the leaves
+shake a little and then all would be still; but if I watched attentively
+as we glided by, it was a great chance if I did not see some little,
+dark, hairy face gazing intently down at me with the sharp, eager eyes
+scanning my every movement, and if I raised a hand the little face was
+gone like magic, a rustling leaf or waving strand of some
+convolvulus-like plant being all that was left to show where the little
+creature had been.
+
+At other times, instead of the winding river with its walls of verdure,
+we passed into what seemed to be some vast island-studded lake, some
+being patches of considerable extent, others mere islets of a dozen
+yards across, but all covered with trees and tangled with undergrowth.
+Landing on any of these was quite impossible unless through one of the
+verdant tunnels in which now and then there would be a swirl of the
+water that formed their bottom, showing where some huge reptile had
+dived at the sight of our boat and raft; while at other times a great
+snout, with the two eminences above its eyes, would be thrust out of the
+water and then slowly subside, to be seen no more.
+
+At these times the current swept us through winding channels in and out
+among the islands, and if I could have felt in better spirits I should
+have found endless pleasure in investigating the various beauties of the
+vegetable world: the great trumpet-shaped flowers that hung from some of
+the vines, with endless little flitting and poising gems of
+humming-birds feeding upon the nectar within the blossoms.  Then
+squirrels could be seen running from branch to branch, at times boldly
+in sight, at others timid as the other occupants of the tree, the
+palm-cats, that were almost as active.
+
+Once I caught sight of the spots of a jaguar as the agile beast crept
+along a branch in its hunt for food, the object of its aim being a group
+of little chattering and squealing monkeys which were feasting on the
+berries of a leafy tree.
+
+Lilla shuddered on one occasion as I pointed out the long, twiny body of
+a large boa which was sluggishly making its way through the dense
+foliage of an india-rubber tree, apparently to get in a good position
+where it could secure itself in ambush, ready for striking at any bird
+that might come within its reach.
+
+As it happened the current drove us right in close to the tree and
+beneath some of its overhanging branches, with the result that the
+creature ceased its slow gliding movement through the dense leafage, and
+raised its head and four or five feet of its neck, swaying it slowly to
+and fro as if hesitating whether or no to make a dart at us.
+
+It was by no means a pleasant moment, and I felt for the time something
+of the sensation that I had so often read of as suffered by people who
+have been fascinated by snakes.  I had a gun lying close by me, but I
+made no movement to reach it; and though I had a paddle in my hand I
+believe that, if the creature had lowered its head, I should not have
+struck at it.  In short, I could do nothing but gaze at that waving,
+swaying head, with the glistening eyes, and the beautiful yellow and
+brown tortoiseshell-like markings of the neck and body.
+
+Then the stream swept us slowly away, and we were beyond the reptile's
+reach.
+
+Taking; the recollection of these wild creatures of the South American
+forests, though, altogether, there was not so much cause for fear.  As a
+rule every noxious beast seemed to aim at but one thing, and that was to
+escape from man.  Even the great alligators, unless they could find him
+at a disadvantage in their native element, would rush off through the
+mud and undergrowth to plunge into the water and seek safety right at
+the bottom of the river.  The jaguars were timid in the extreme; and
+though they would have fought perhaps if driven to bay, their one idea
+seemed to be to seek safety in flight.  It was the same with the
+poisonous serpents, the most dangerous being a kind of miniature
+rattlesnake which was too sluggish and indifferent to get out of the
+traveller's way, and many a poor fellow suffered from their deadly bite.
+
+In fact the most dangerous and troublesome creatures we had to encounter
+on our journey down the river, excepting man, were the mosquitoes--which
+swarmed all along the river borders and pestered us with their bites--
+and an exceedingly small fish that seemed to be in myriads in parts of
+the stream, and to make up in absolute ferocity for their want of size.
+This savageness of nature was of course but their natural instinctive
+desire for food, but it was dangerous in the extreme, as I knew later
+on.  Our experience was in this wise:--
+
+It was one lovely afternoon when we were floating dreamily along between
+two of the most beautiful walls of verdure that we had seen.  Many of
+the trees were gorgeous with blossoms, the consequence being that
+bright-winged beetles, painted butterflies, and humming-birds abounded.
+
+My uncle was seated half asleep with the heat, and his gun across his
+knees, waiting for an opportunity to shoot some large bird that would be
+good for food; I was dipping in my paddle from time to time so as to
+keep the canoe's head straight and away from the awkward snags that
+projected from the river here and there--the remains of trees that had
+been washed out of the bank by some flood--and I was thinking
+despondently about the loss of poor Tom.
+
+Then my thoughts reverted to home and those I had to meet there, with
+our accounts of how it was that poor Tom had met his death.
+
+"All due to my miserable ambition," I said to myself; "all owing to my
+wretched thirst for gold.  And what has it all come to?"  I said
+bitterly.  "I had far better have settled down to honest,
+straightforward labour.  I should have been better off."
+
+I gave the paddle a few dips here, and noted that the water was much
+purer and clearer than it had seemed yet.  We were very close in to the
+shore, but we had floated down so far that we had ceased to fear the
+Indians, believing as we did that they were now far behind.
+
+Then I began to think once more of how much better off I should have
+been if I had settled down to work on my uncle's plantation.
+
+Not much, I was obliged to own, for my settling down would not have
+saved me from quarrelling with Garcia, neither would it have cleared my
+uncle from the incumbrance upon his home.
+
+"Perhaps things are best as they are," I said; and then I looked back to
+where Lilla was thoughtfully gazing down into the river from where she
+reclined upon the raft, and letting one of her hands hang down in the
+water, which she played with and splashed from time to time.
+
+I was just going to warn her not to do so, for I remembered having read
+or heard tell that alligators would sometimes make a snap at a hand
+dragging in the water like that, when she uttered a sharp cry, snatching
+her hand away; and as she did so I saw a little flash, as if a tiny,
+silvery fish, dropped back into the water.
+
+"What is it?"  I said.
+
+"Something bit me--a little fish," she said.  "It has nipped a morsel
+out of my finger."
+
+She held up her hand as she spoke before wrapping a scrap of linen round
+it, and I could see that it was bleeding freely.
+
+"Surely it could not have been that tiny fish," I said, thrusting one
+hand into the water and snatching it back again, for as it passed
+beneath the surface it was as if it had been pinched in half a dozen
+places at once; and when I thrust it in again I could see that the water
+was alive with little fish apparently about a couple of inches long, and
+instantaneously they made a rush at my hand, fastening upon it
+everywhere, so that it needed a sharp shake to throw them off; and when
+I drew it out, hardened and tough as it was with my late rough work, it
+was bleeding in a dozen places.
+
+"Why, the little wretches!"  I exclaimed; and by way of experiment I
+held a piece of leather over the side, to find that it was attacked
+furiously; while even later on, when I had been fishing and had caught a
+small kind of mud-carp, I hauled it behind the canoe, in a few minutes
+there was nothing left but the head--the little ravenous creatures
+having literally devoured it all but the stronger bones.
+
+I remember thinking how unpleasant it would be to bathe there, and often
+and often afterwards we found that it would be absolutely impossible to
+dip our hands beneath the water unless we wished to withdraw them
+smarting and covered with blood.
+
+What more these little creatures could effect we had yet to learn, but
+we owned that they were as powerful in the water as the fiercer kind of
+ants on land, where they were virulent enough in places to master even
+the larger kinds of snakes if they could find them in a semi-torpid
+state after a meal--biting with such virulence and in such myriads that
+the most powerful creatures at last succumbed.
+
+At last, as the days glided on, we became more and more silent.  Very
+little was said, and only once did my uncle talk to me quietly about our
+future, saying that we must get to one of the settlements on the
+Orinoco, low down near its mouth, and then see what could be done.
+
+A deep, settled melancholy seemed to have affected us all; but the
+sight, after many days, of a small trading-boat seemed to inspire us
+with hopefulness; and having, in exchange for a gun, obtained a fair
+quantity of provisions, we continued our journey with lightened spirits.
+
+In spite, though, of seeing now and then a trading-boat, we got at last
+into a very dull and dreamy state; while, as is usually the case, the
+weakest, and the one from whom you might expect the least, proved to
+have the stoutest heart.  I allude, of course, to Lilla, who always
+tried to cheer us on.
+
+But there was a change coming--one which we little expected--just as,
+after what seemed to be an endless journey, we came in sight of a town
+which afterwards proved to be Angostura.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY NINE.
+
+HOW TOM SAVED THE TREASURE.
+
+It was the afternoon of a glorious day, and we were floating along in
+the broiling heat, now and then giving a dip with the paddles, so as to
+direct the canoe more towards the bank, where we could see houses.
+There was a boat here and a boat there, moored in the current; and now
+and then we passed a canoe, while others seemed to be going in the same
+direction as ourselves.
+
+"Harry, look there!" cried my uncle.
+
+I looked in the direction pointed-out ahead, shading my eyes with my
+hand, when I dropped my paddle, as I rose up, trembling, in the boat;
+for just at that moment, from a canoe being paddled towards us, there
+came a faint but unmistakable English cheer--one to which I could not
+respond for the choking feelings in my throat.
+
+I rubbed my eyes, fancying that I must have been deceived, as the canoe
+came nearer and nearer, but still slowly, till it grated against ours,
+and my hands were held fast by those of honest old Tom, who was
+laughing, crying, and talking all in a breath.
+
+"And I've been thinking I was left behind, Mas'r Harry, and working away
+to catch you; while all the time I've been paddling away."
+
+"Tom!--Tom!"  I cried huskily, "we thought you dead!"
+
+"But I ain't--not a bit of it, Mas'r Harry.  I'm as live as ever.  But
+ain't you going to ask arter anything else?"
+
+"Tom, you're alive," I said, in the thankfulness of my heart, "and that
+is enough."
+
+"No, 'tain't, Mas'r Harry," he whispered rather faintly; for now I saw
+that he looked pale and exhausted.  "No, 'tain't enough; for I've got
+all the stuff in the bottom here, just as we packed it in.  Ain't you
+going to say `hooray!' for that, Mas'r Harry?" he cried, in rather
+disappointed tones.
+
+"Tom," I said, "life's worth a deal more than gold."  And then I turned
+from him, for I could say no more.
+
+We pushed in now to the landing-place, with a feeling of awakened
+confidence, given--though I did not think of it then--by the knowledge
+of our wealth; and leaving Tom in charge of the canoes, we sought the
+first shelter we could obtain, and leaving there my uncle to watch over
+the safety of the women, I set about making inquiries, and was
+exceedingly fortunate in obtaining possession of a house that was
+falling to ruin, having been lying deserted since quitted by an English
+merchant a couple of years before.  A few inquiries, too, led us to the
+discovery that there was an English vice-consul resident, to whom I told
+so much of our story as was safe, mentioning the attack upon my uncle,
+and speaking of myself as having merely been upon an exploring visit.
+
+The result was a number of pleasant little attentions, the consul
+sending up his servants to assist in making the house habitable, and
+sending to buy for us such articles of furniture as would be necessary
+for our immediate wants.
+
+I took the first opportunity of impressing upon all present secrecy
+respecting the treasure, for I could not tell in what light our
+possession of it might be looked upon; and then I hurried down to the
+canoes to Tom with refreshments, of which he eagerly partook, as he said
+at intervals:
+
+"I believe I should have been starved out, Mas'r Harry, if there hadn't
+been some of the eatables stuffed in my canoe by mistake; for I'd got
+nothing much to swop with the Indians when I did happen to see any
+ashore."
+
+It was then arranged that he should still stay with the boats till I
+could return and tell him that I had a safe place, while as Tom lazily
+stretched himself over the packages in the canoe, sheltering his head
+with a few great leaves, his appearance excited no attention, and I left
+him without much anxiety, to return to my uncle.
+
+The discovery that Tom existed had robbed our perils of three parts of
+their suffering; and now, with feelings of real anxiety respecting the
+treasure springing up, I hurried back again to the landing-place, to
+find all well, for the place was too Spanish and lazy for our coming to
+create much excitement.
+
+"Say, Mas'r Harry," cried Tom, grinning hugely, in spite of his pale
+face and exhaustion, "I've got you now.  I said you was to let me have a
+pound a week; I must go in for thirty bob after this.  Come, now, no
+shirking.  Say yes, or I'm hanged if I don't scuttle the canoe."
+
+It was evident, though, that Tom had undergone a great deal, and was far
+from able to bear much more; for that evening, after telling the Indian
+porters that I was a sort of curiosity and stone collector, and getting
+the treasure carried up safely to the house which I had taken, he
+suddenly gave a lurch, and would have fallen had I not caught his arm.
+
+"Why, Tom!"  I cried anxiously.
+
+"I think, Mas'r Harry," he said softly, "it might be as well if you was
+to let a doctor look at me--it would be just as well.  I've a bullet in
+me somewhere, and that knife--"
+
+"Bullet--knife, Tom?"
+
+"Yes, Mas'r Harry, that Garcia--but I'll tell you all about it after."
+
+The doctor I hastily summoned looked serious as he examined Tom's hurts;
+and though, with insular pride, I rather looked down upon Spanish
+doctors, this gentleman soon proved himself of no mean skill in surgery,
+and under his care Tom rapidly approached convalescence.
+
+"You see, Mas'r Harry, it was after this fashion," said Tom one evening
+as I sat by his bedside indulging in a cup of coffee, just when one of
+the afternoon rains had cooled the earth, and the air that was wafted
+through the open window was delicious.  "You see it was after this
+fashion--"
+
+"But are you strong enough to talk about it, Tom?"  I said anxiously.
+
+"Strong, Mas'r Harry!  I could get a toller cask down out of a van.
+Well, it was like this: I was, as you know, in the gold canoe; and being
+on my knees, I was leaning over the side expecting you to swim off to
+me, and at last, as I thought, there you was, when I held out my hands
+and got hold of one of yours and the barrel of a gun with the other,
+when a thought struck me--
+
+"`Why, surely Mas'r Harry hadn't his gun with him?'
+
+"But it was no time, I thought, for bothering about trifles, with the
+night black as ink, and the Indians collected together upon the bank; so
+I did the best I could to help you, and the next minute there you was in
+the gold canoe, and not without nearly oversetting it, heavy-laden as
+she was--when I whispers, `You'd best take a paddle here, Mas'r Harry,'
+when I felt two hands at my throat, my head bent back, a knee forced
+into my chest, and there in that black darkness I lay for a few minutes
+quite stupid, calling myself all the fools I could think of for helping
+someone on board that I knew now was not you.
+
+"That was rather ticklish work, being choked as I was, Mas'r Harry,"
+said Tom, with his pale face flushing up, and his eyes brightening with
+the recollection; "but above all things, I couldn't help feeling then
+that, if I did get a prick with a knife, I deserved it for being such a
+donkey.  Then I got thinking about Sally Smith, and wishing that we had
+parted better friends; then about you and Miss Lilla, and about how all
+the gold would be lost; and then I turned savage, and seemed to see
+blood, as I made up my mind that, if you didn't have the treasure, the
+Don shouldn't, for I'd upset the canoe and sink it all first for the
+crockydiles.
+
+"I don't know what I said, and I don't much recollect what I did, only
+that fox ever so long there was a reg'lar struggle going on, which made
+that little canoe rock so that I expected every moment it would be
+overset; but I s'pose we both meant that it shouldn't: and at last we
+were lying quite still on the gold, with all round us black and quiet as
+my lord's vault in the old churchyard at home.  Garcia had got tight
+hold of my hands, and I kept him by that means so that he couldn't use
+his sting--I mean his knife--you know, Mas'r Harry.
+
+"It seemed to me at last that my best plan was to lie still and wait
+till he give me a chance; for after one or two struggles I only found
+that I was nowhere, and ever so much weaker; so I did lie still, waiting
+for a chance, and wondering that Mas'r Landell didn't come and lend me a
+hand.
+
+"All at once there came a horrible thought to me, and that was--ah!
+there were two horrible thoughts--that you had missed the canoe and had
+gone down, and that the raft had broke away from the gold canoe while we
+were jerking and rocking about, and that I was left alone here on this
+big river, with the Don waiting for a chance to send that knife of his
+through me.
+
+"Now, you needn't go thinking it was because I cared anything about you,
+Mas'r Harry," continued Tom in a sulky voice, "for it wasn't that: it
+was only just because I was a weak great booby, and got a wondering what
+your poor mother would say when I got home, and then, I couldn't help
+it, if I didn't get crying away like a great girl kep' in at school, for
+I don't know how long, and the canoe gliding away all the time on the
+river.
+
+"Getting rid of all that warm water made me less soft; and when Mas'r
+Garcia got struggling again I give him two or three such wipes on the
+head as must have wound him up a bit; and then, after nearly having the
+boat over again, there we lay for hour after hour in the thick darkness,
+getting stiff as stiff, as we kep' one another from doing mischief.  And
+then at last came the light, with the fog hanging over the river, thick
+as the old washus at home when Sally Smith took off the copper-lid and
+got stirring up the clothes.  Then the sun came cutting through the
+mist, chopping it up like golden wires through a cake of soap.  There
+was the green stuff like a hedge on both sides of the river, the parrots
+a-screaming, the crockydiles crawling on to the mud-banks or floating
+down, the birds a-fishing, and all looking as bright as could be, while
+my heart was black as a furnace-hole, Mas'r Harry, and that
+black-looking Don was close aside me.
+
+"I ain't of a murderous disposition, Mas'r Harry, but I felt very nasty
+then, in that bright, clear morning, though all the time I was thinking
+what a nice place this world would be if it wasn't for wild beasts, and
+men as makes themselves worse; for there was that Don's eye saying as
+plain as could be:--
+
+"`There ain't room enough in this here canoe for both of us, young man!'
+
+"`Then it's you as must go out of it, Don Spaniard,' says my eyes.
+
+"`No; it's you as must go out of it, you beggarly little soap-boiling
+Englishman,' says his eyes.
+
+"`It's my Mas'r Harry's gold, and if he's gone to the crockydiles I'll
+save the treasure for his Miss Lilla and the old folks--so now, then!'
+says my eyes.
+
+"And all this, you know, was without a word being spoke; when all at
+once if he didn't make a sort of a jump, and before I knew where we were
+he was at one end of the canoe and I was at the other.
+
+"Well, you may say that was a good thing.  But it wasn't; for as I
+scrambled up there he was with both guns at his end, and me with nothing
+but my fisties.
+
+"I saw through his dodge now, but it was too late; and in the next few
+moments I thought three things:--
+
+"`Shall I sit still like a man and let him shoot me?'
+
+"`Shall I rock the canoe over and let it sink?'
+
+"`Shall I go at him?'
+
+"I hadn't pluck enough to sit still and be shot, Mas'r Harry, for you
+know what a cur I always was; and I thought it a pity to sink the canoe
+in case you, if you were alive, or Mas'r Landell, might come back to
+look for it.  So I made up my mind to the last, being bristly, and, with
+my monkey up, I dashed at him.
+
+"_Bang_!  He got a shot at me, and I felt just as if some one had hit me
+a blow with a stick hard enough to make me savage; but it didn't stop me
+a bit, for I reached at him such a crack with my double fist just as he
+struck his knife into me; and then we were overboard and struggling
+together in the sunlit water, making it splash up all around.
+
+"`It's all over with you, Tom!'  I said to myself; for as we rose to the
+surface after our plunge he got one arm free, his knife was lifted, and
+I looked him full in the face as I felt, though I didn't say it--`You
+cowardly beggar! why can't you fight like a man with your fists?'
+
+"The next moment he must have struck that knife into me again, when I
+never see such a horrible change in my life as come over his face--from
+savage joy to fear--for in a flash he let go the knife, shrieked
+horribly, and half-forced himself out of the water, leaving me free,
+when, with a terrible fear on me that the crockydiles were at him, I
+swum for the canoe; and how, I don't know, I managed to get in, with
+hundreds of tiny little fish leaping and darting at me like a shoal of
+gudgeons, only they nipped pieces out of my hands and feet, which were
+bare; and if I hadn't been quick they'd have had me to pieces.
+
+"No sooner was I in the canoe than I turned, for Garcia was shrieking
+horribly in a way that nearly drove me mad to hear him, as he beat, and
+splashed, and tore about in the water--now down, now up, now fighting
+this way, now that--wild with fear and despair, for those tiny fish were
+at him by the thousand; his face and hands were streaming with blood,
+and I could see that it would be all over with him directly, when,
+catching up a paddle, I sent the canoe towards him, to pass close by his
+hand just as he sank.
+
+"To turn and come back was not many moments' work; but he didn't come up
+where I expected, and I had to paddle back against stream, but again I
+missed him, and he went down with a yell, Mas'r Harry, that's been
+buzzing in my ears ever since--wakes me up of a night, it does, and
+sends me in a cold perspiration as all the scene comes back again.
+
+"I forgot all about his shooting and knifing me; and, Mas'r Harry, as I
+hope to get back safe to old England I did all I could to save him when
+he come up again--silent this time!  Did I say him?  No, it wasn't him,
+but a horrible, gashly, bleeding mass of flesh and bone, writhing and
+twisting as the little fish hung to it and leaped at it by thousands,
+tearing him really to pieces before he once more sank under the stream,
+which was all red with blood.
+
+"I paddled here and I paddled there, frantically, but the body didn't
+come up again; and then, Mas'r Harry, it seemed to me as if a strong
+pair of hands had taken hold of the canoe and were twisting it round and
+round, so that the river and the trees on the banks danced before my
+eyes, making me that giddy that I fell back and lay, I don't know how
+long.
+
+"When I opened my eyes again, Mas'r Harry, I thought I was dying, for
+there was a horrible sick feeling on me--one which lasted ever so long--
+till, remembering all about what had taken place, I felt that I had only
+been fainting; and, raising myself up, I looked on the river for a few
+minutes, shuddering the while as I tried to leave off thinking about the
+horrors in it; but try hard as I would, I couldn't help looking--the
+place having a sort of way for me as if it was pulling me towards it--
+and I seemed to see all that going on again, though, perhaps, I'd
+floated down a good mile since it happened.
+
+"At last I dragged my eyes from the water and they fell upon the
+packages, and they made me think of you, Mas'r Harry; and, in the hope
+that you were a long way on ahead, I took up a paddle--thinking, too, at
+the same time, that if you was alive, as soon as you had got Miss Lilla
+safe you would come back for me."
+
+I did not speak--I could not just then; for in a flood the recollection
+of the past came upon me, and taking Tom's hands in mine, for a good ten
+minutes I sat without speaking.
+
+"Well, Mas'r Harry," continued Tom--but speaking now in a thick, husky
+voice--"I took up the paddle and then I dropped it again, I was that
+weak, faint, and in pain; and it seemed to me that before I could do
+anything else I must wash and bind up a bit.
+
+"One of my hands was terribly crippled from my hurt, but I managed to
+bind a couple of paddles together; and then, rowing slowly on, I was
+thinking that my labour had been all in vain unless I could manage still
+to save the gold, when, happening one day to turn round to look
+upstream, I saw that, Mas'r Harry, as seemed to give me life, and hope,
+and strength all in a moment; and you know the rest."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTY.
+
+THE USE OF THE TREASURE.
+
+It is one thing being possessed of a treasure and another knowing what
+to do with it.  Here was I with the fortune, as my uncle called it, of a
+prince, found, as I had found it, and to which some people may say I had
+no right, and I often thought so myself.  But on the other hand I felt
+that I could do more good with it than it would do left there in the bed
+of that stream--so many relics of a superstition--of a pagan idolatry
+carried on three hundred years ago.  The traditions of its being hidden
+there had of course been handed down, but it had never been seen since
+it was buried at the time of the conquest, and all who had a right to it
+had been dead for ages.
+
+So I comforted myself that I was only the one who had brought it to
+light, and that it was my duty to put it to as good a purpose as
+possible, and that I meant to do.
+
+Well, here I had the treasure; but the next thing was, should I be able
+to keep it?
+
+If the Indians could trace me and dared to come across the river all
+this distance down and into the civilised region, I knew that my life
+would not be safe, and that they would have the treasure back at any
+cost.
+
+But then it was not likely that the simple savages would venture after
+me even if they could find out where I had come.
+
+Then there were the Spaniards about us.  If they knew of the wealth we
+had in the ordinary house of which we had taken possession they would
+either get it away by legal means, claiming it as belonging to one or
+the other government, or else make a regular filibustering descent upon
+us and secure it by violence, even taking our lives as well.
+
+Secrecy, then, seemed to be the only thing possible; and after a good
+deal of thinking and planning, my uncle, Tom, and I constructed a little
+furnace in a corner of the house, after boarding up the window and
+covering it with blankets as well.  Here we purposed to melt down the
+treasure into long ingots, which we hoped to mould in sand--little,
+long, golden bars being the most convenient shape in which we could
+carry our gold.
+
+I knew even then that it was a great pity to destroy what were equally
+valuable as curiosities as for their intrinsic worth as precious metal;
+but any attempt to dispose of them would have meant confiscation, and
+such a treasure was not to be introduced to the notice of strangers with
+impunity.
+
+My uncle joined with me in lamenting the difficulties of the case, and
+that we should be under the necessity of melting the cups and plates
+down; but he urged me to do it as soon as possible, and we soon set to
+work, carrying on our metal fusing in secret by the help of a crucible
+and a great deal of saltpetre, which soon helped to bring the heat to a
+pitch where the gold would melt like so much lead, and then by the help
+of a strong handle the pot was lifted out and its glowing contents
+poured forth into the moulds.
+
+The ingots we thus cast had to be filed and the rough projections taken
+off, the dust and scraps being remelted down with the other portion.
+
+It was a tremendous task, though.  The plates we managed pretty easily,
+but the discs had to be cut up first by means of a great hammer and a
+cold chisel, and the progress we made upon some days was very small.
+
+The cups, too, were very difficult to manage; and Tom and I used to work
+exceedingly hard, hammering and breaking the gold into small pieces that
+would go into the melting-pot.  Sometimes our fingers were quite sore
+with the hammering and filing.
+
+Still we kept on making progress, nervous progress, lest people should
+find out what we were about; and by slow degrees we added ingot to
+ingot--little, bright, yellow bar after bar--to one heap, and bar after
+bar of silver to another heap, which were kept buried under a stone in
+the floor of one of the rooms.
+
+Over and over again we hesitated before breaking up some
+beautifully-worked cup, though without exception these had been battered
+and flattened, perhaps three hundred years ago, for the convenience of
+carriage and hiding from the Spaniards, who had gone west with such a
+thirst for gold.  Several of the best cups were almost flat, the tough,
+soft metal having evidently been driven in with blows from stones.
+
+We did not get through our task without alarms; for now and then some
+kindly-disposed person would call, and then we were obliged to hurriedly
+conceal our work, smothering the fire, and this perhaps when we were at
+some particular part of our task.  But there was no help for it, as we
+were compelled to work by daylight for fear of the glow of our
+furnace-fire taking attention if we attempted anything of the kind by
+night.
+
+That melting down was like a nightmare to me, and over and over again I
+used to ask myself whether the gold were worth all this trouble.  Slave,
+slave, slave, till our fingers were sore; and now I would be blistering
+my hands with a small-toothed saw which Tom had bought one day and
+brought home in triumph for cutting through the gold, and next time
+toiling away with a great file.
+
+Yes, it seemed as if we were working ourselves to death for this bright
+yellow metal; and several times over, without being led up to it by me,
+Tom quite took my view.
+
+"S'pose this here stuff's going to be very useful, Mas'r Harry," he
+said.
+
+"Useful, Tom?"
+
+"Ay!  I mean I hope it's going to be worth all this work and trouble.
+My word, Mas'r Harry, soap-boiling's nothing to this!"
+
+"Tired, Tom?"  I said.
+
+"Tired, Mas'r Harry?  Not I!  But I tell you what I am, and that's hot."
+
+"Yes, it is hot work, Tom," I said.
+
+"Ay, Mas'r Harry, that's just what it is, 'specially when you gets
+ladling out the soup and pouring it into the moulds.  Fine rich soup,
+ain't it?" he said with a grin.
+
+"The richest of the rich, Tom."
+
+"Ah! it is, Mas'r Harry; but it is hot work, and no mistake, and it sets
+me thinking a deal."
+
+"Well, Tom, what of?"  I asked, for we were waiting for the melting.
+
+"'Bout setting up soap-boiling out here, Mas'r Harry," he said,
+grinning.
+
+"Well, what about it, Tom?"
+
+"'Twouldn't do, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "First of all, the work would
+be a deal too hot; second of all, the trade wouldn't pay, 'cause the
+people look as if they never washed.  No, Mas'r Harry, I don't think the
+folks here are fond of soap."
+
+Two months of hard toil did we spend over that melting down.  For first
+of all, there was the preparation of the furnace; and a very hard task
+that was, there being such difficulty in getting proper materials.
+Stone seemed to go first into scales, and then into powder.  The bricks
+we obtained cracked; and it was not until my uncle had mixed up some
+clay in a peculiar manner, and beaten it up into bricks of a big, rough
+shape, that we managed to get on.  These bricks we built up into the
+furnace, and then slowly dried by leaving in a small fire; and this we
+increased till it was hot enough to burn the rough bricks, which, as we
+increased the fire to a furious pitch, seemed to fuse the whole together
+into a solid mass.
+
+Then we had our hiding-place to dig out; and all this work had to be
+done in such a secret way that it used to make me think of Baron Trenck
+in prison, so careful and watchful were we in all we did.
+
+Industry mastered it all though at last; and, weary as Tom must have
+been of his job, he began to feel at last that the gold was worth
+working for.
+
+"I usen't to think so at one time, Mas'r Harry," he said; "but since
+I've been working away here, melting of myself away almost as fast as I
+melted gold, it's seemed to me as if, when I get home, and Sally Smith
+knows as I'm a gentleman with a large income of two pound a week, she
+may be a bit more civil like to me."
+
+"Very likely, Tom," I said smiling.
+
+"That's just what I say, Mas'r Harry--very likely; that is, you know, if
+there's anything more left of me than the ivory."
+
+"Ivory, Tom?"  I said, wondering what he meant.
+
+"Yes, Mas'r Harry--the bones, you know.  Don't you see, I mean if I
+ain't melted all away."
+
+Two months, I say, had it taken before the rich metal was all reduced to
+neat little bars ready for packing up.
+
+Then we had to discuss the question of the size and material of the
+cases in which we were to carry home our treasure so as not to excite
+suspicion.
+
+"We must risk suspicion and inquiry too," said my uncle.  "Our way now,
+Harry, is to get the stuff packed up and go straight away."
+
+"I should do it quite openly," said Lilla quietly, "and if inquiries are
+made you can say that the chests in which it is packed contain gold.  No
+one can be suspicious then.  The people will only think that you are
+very rich, and be the more respectful."
+
+"You are right, Lilla," said my uncle.  "We can show our ingots--I mean
+your ingots, Harry.  No one can prove how you came by them."
+
+The result was that we boldly ordered some little cases to be made of
+the strongest South American oak, and corded together and bound firmly
+with hoop-iron; and into these, bedding them neatly with the finest
+sawdust, we packed the little shining bars.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTY ONE.
+
+OUR TROUBLESOME BURDEN.
+
+By the time we felt that we might very well make a start for home, we
+found out that though Lilla's advice had seemed so good, it would not do
+to act upon, and she laughingly owned that she was wrong.
+
+For, feeling the necessity for obtaining a little spare cash in hand, my
+uncle undertook to dispose of half a dozen of the little bars of gold,
+and the adventures were such that he came back to me to say that we
+should have to be very careful.
+
+"It would never do to attempt a passage in a Spanish vessel boldly, my
+boy.  The very sound of the word _gold_ seems to fill the people full of
+suspicion, and the dealer I went to to-day has been questioning me in
+all sorts of ways.  He thinks, evidently, that I have discovered a rich
+gold mine somewhere, and is boiling with curiosity to know where."
+
+"And you did not tell him, Uncle," I said laughing.
+
+"No, my boy; but seriously, we must not make these people suspicious.
+We have to pass through their custom-house places if we go in the
+regular way, and if we attempt that, depend upon it we shall be stopped,
+and have to give the fullest of explanations as to where the gold was
+obtained, before we are allowed to quit the country, even if we are
+then."
+
+"Depend upon it, Uncle, we should not be allowed to go then.  How
+vexatious!"  I ejaculated.  "After all this trouble it will be hard if
+we are stopped now!  We will not be," I cried, with a stamp of the foot.
+"I have succeeded so far, and if I fail it shall not be for want of
+foresight."
+
+"What do you mean, Harry?" said my uncle, who seemed to be pleased with
+my energy and determination.
+
+"I mean, Uncle, that if the treasure is lost it shall be through storm
+and shipwreck, not from the scheming of men.  If they know of our rich
+treasure they will plan to get it away from us.  Well, we must scheme
+harder to save it.
+
+"Here, let's take Tom into consultation," I said after a pause, and Tom
+was called in.  "Here, Tom," I said, "we've got all the gold packed, how
+are we to get it away?"
+
+"How are you to get it away, Mas'r Harry?" he said, giving his head a
+rub, not that it itched, but so as to clear his thoughts, I suppose.
+
+"Yes.  How are we to get it away?"
+
+"Stick direction cards on, same as we did with the soap boxes at home,
+and shove it aboard ship."
+
+"To be stopped as something contraband.  No, Tom, that won't do.  They
+would want to know what it was."
+
+"Serve them same as we did the Injins," said Tom grinning: "pretend as
+they are all forsles and stigmy tights, as you called 'em, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"That may do for Indians, but it will never do for people who are
+civilised.  No, Tom, if you cannot give better advice than that, it is
+of no use."
+
+"That's the best I've got, Mas'r Harry," said Tom.  "I never was a good
+one that way.  You tell me what to do and I'll do it.  And as for
+sticking to you--There, Mas'r Landell, sir, haven't I stuck to Mas'r
+Harry through thick and thin?"
+
+"Most faithfully, Tom."
+
+"Thanky, sir, thanky," cried Tom.
+
+"Yes, yes, Tom, we know all about that," I said.  "No one doubts your
+fidelity, but it is not the question.  We want to know what to do about
+getting the treasure home safely."
+
+"Oh!  Ah!  Yes, I see," said Tom, as if he had not understood before,
+and it made me so vexed, what with being hot and nervous and bothered,
+that I felt as if I should have liked to kick Master Tom.
+
+"I have it," I exclaimed suddenly, and I gave the table a thump.
+
+"He's got it," cried Tom, rubbing his hands.  "Mas'r Harry's got it,
+Mas'r Landell, sir.  He's a wunner at hitting out things, he is."
+
+"What is your idea, Harry?"
+
+"It is rather a risky one, sir," I replied; "but it seems to me the only
+likely one.  We must put up with some inconvenience to get our treasure
+safe.  Once we are at a good British port, of course we need not mind,
+and can do as we please."
+
+"Well," he said, "what do you propose doing?"
+
+"Find out some small vessel going to Jamaica, and arrange with the
+captain to take us.  If we pay him pretty well he will ask no questions
+about what our luggage is."
+
+"And you might make him think it was forsles and them
+what-you-may-call-'em tights.  He wouldn't be much cleverer than the
+Injins," said Tom.
+
+"We'll see about that, Tom," I said, and my uncle having approved of my
+plan, we began at once to see if we could not set it in force.
+
+It sounded very easy, but when I had to put it in practice I found it
+extremely difficult, and to be hedged in with prickles of the sharpest
+kind.
+
+We wanted to go to Jamaica, as being a suitable port for our purpose,
+and an easy one to obtain passage home in a mail steamer; but though I
+could find small vessels, schooners, and brigs going everywhere else,
+there did not seem to be one likely to sail for Kingston; and try how I
+would, it appeared as if the very fact of our wanting to go otherwise
+than by the regular mail route made our conduct suspicious.
+
+In fact more than one of the skippers seemed to think so, and as a rule
+they declined to take us, saying that it would get them into trouble,
+while in one case, where the captain of a schooner eagerly agreed to
+take us, merely stipulating to be well paid, the vessel was such a
+cranky, ill-found affair that I shrank from trusting my aunt and Lilla
+in such a crazy hull.
+
+"There's a chap out in the river yonder going to sail for New York at
+the end of the week, Mas'r Harry," said Tom one morning.  "I got into
+conversation with him last night when I was smoking my pipe, and in
+about half a minute he'd asked me what my name was, where I was born,
+how many teeth I'd got, why I came here, what I was going to do next;
+and when I told him I wanted to go back to England, he hit me over the
+back and says: `Case o' dollars, stranger.  I'll take you.'  He's coming
+to see you this morning."
+
+About an hour after I saw a tall, thin, yellow-looking man coming up to
+the house.  He had a narrow smooth face, and two very dark eyes that
+seemed to have been squeezed close up to his nose--a sharp nose--and a
+very projecting much-pointed chin.  His face was as devoid of hair as a
+baby's, and taking him altogether, if Tom had not told me he was
+curious, I should have said at once that he was a man who loved to ask
+questions.
+
+"Mornin', stranger," he said to both Tom and me, and then, with his
+queer-looking sharp little eyes searching me all over, he went on: "I
+guess you're the Englishman who wants to get home with all your tots."
+
+"I am," I said.  "May I ask your name?"
+
+"Perks," he said sharply.  "'Badiah P. Perks, o' New York.  What's
+your'n?"
+
+I told him.
+
+"Hah, yes.  I could see you warn't an A-murray-can.  I'll take you if
+you'll pay."
+
+"Oh, I'll pay a reasonable fare for our party," I replied.
+
+"Party, eh?  How many?"
+
+"My uncle, his wife and daughter, and us two," I said.
+
+"And that makes five, stranger.  Baggage?"
+
+"Yes," I said, "Let's look."
+
+I hesitated for a moment, and then took him into the room where our neat
+little chests were packed, one on the top of the other, with a couple of
+blankets thrown over them.
+
+"Hah!" said the skipper, trying one of the iron-bound cases.  "Precious
+heavy, mister.  What's in 'em?"
+
+"Curiosities," I replied.
+
+"Just so," he said, winking one eye.  "I said they was to myself soon as
+I see the iron bands round 'em.  Wal, they'll weigh up pretty smart.
+You'll have to pay for them."
+
+"Of course," I said; "anything reasonable."
+
+"That's square, mister," he said, scanning the whole place eagerly.
+"Now, what might bring you out here, eh?"
+
+"I came to see my uncle," I replied, annoyed at the fellow's
+impertinence, but thinking it better to be civil.
+
+"Did you, though, mister?  Find him?"
+
+"Yes, I found him right enough."
+
+"Did you, though?  Old man all right?"
+
+"Quite right."
+
+"Didn't stop with him, though?"
+
+"No, we are all going home together."
+
+"Wonder at it when you might stay in A-murray-kay.  I say, mister, you
+know, what's in them chesties?"
+
+He accompanied the question with a wink and a grin, and pointed over his
+shoulder towards the cases.
+
+"I told you," I replied, "curiosities."
+
+"Are they, though?  Wonder what the custom chaps would call 'em when
+they overhauled them, eh?"
+
+I was silent, for it was evident that the fellow suspected me of a
+desire to evade the regular authorities of the port.
+
+"Come, mister," he said with a grin, evidently divining my thoughts,
+"out with it, come; you want them chesties smuggled off on the quiet,
+don't you now?  Best take 'Badiah P. Perks into confidence, I guess;
+makes it smooth for all parties."
+
+"If you like to take our party and luggage to New York, Mr Perks," I
+said quietly, "I am ready, as my uncle will be ready, to pay you well
+for the passage.  Is it agreed?"
+
+"Luggage, of course, mister; but them there arn't luggage.  Curiosities,
+didn't you say?  What's in 'em?"
+
+"That is my affair, Mr Perks."
+
+"'Badiah P. Perks, please mister.  Now, then, is it square and
+confidence, and 'Badiah P. Perks' friends, or isn't it?"
+
+"I shall place every confidence in the captain of our vessel, Mr
+Perks."
+
+"'Badiah P. Perks, mister."
+
+"Mr Obadiah P. Perks," I said.
+
+"Drop that O, stranger.  Don't belong.  'Badiah P. Perks, mister."
+
+"Mr 'Badiah P. Perks," I said.
+
+"And my folks calls me Kyaptin," said the skipper.  "Say, it's wonderful
+how much ignorance there is 'mongst you Englishers.  Wal, I won't say
+I'll take you, stranger, till I've brought one o' these here yellow
+nigger officers to look over them chesties, and see if there's anything
+in 'em as is contraband."
+
+I could not help changing colour, and the fellow saw it.  He suspected
+my motives evidently, and with a smile he turned to go, reaching the
+door slowly and then pausing, as if he expected me to call him back, but
+as I did not he hesitated.
+
+"Say, mister," he said, "s'pose anny time'll do for me to bring down the
+yaller nigger chap?"
+
+I was so wroth with the scoundrel and his cool impudence that I took a
+defiant tone and said shortly:
+
+"Any time you like, Captain Perks."
+
+"'Badiah P. Perks, mister.  All right.  I won't be long."
+
+"But mind this," I said, "you are doing it for your own amusement, for I
+shall advise my uncle not to go by your vessel."
+
+"Riled, mister?  Jest a little bit, eh?  All right.  You'll cool down by
+the time I've got the custom-house chap here, and then we can settle
+terms."
+
+He went off laughing, and for the moment I felt as if we were in his
+power.
+
+"All my labour will have been thrown away, Tom," I cried, "and we shall
+be called upon for explanations that I cannot give."
+
+I called my uncle into the consultation, and we agreed that the best
+line to take was the defiant one.
+
+"We are under no engagement to this fellow, Harry," said my uncle; "and
+we need not enter into one, as he would fleece you--perhaps rob you.
+For, once at sea on the vessel of such a man, he can play tyrant and do
+as he pleases."
+
+"You are right, uncle; we will not go.  But if he returns with one of
+the Spanish officials, what then?"
+
+"Set him at defiance; and if you are driven to extremities, appeal to
+the British vice-consul for aid."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTY TWO.
+
+HELP AT A PINCH.
+
+Captain Obadiah P. Perks came back at the end of an hour, when I had
+pretty well ripened my plans, and, retiring within the house, I left Tom
+to deal with him.
+
+A tall, dark Spaniard was the captain's companion, and he might have
+been an official or an impostor in the skipper's pay.  It was impossible
+to judge, though he wore something purporting to be a uniform.
+
+"Wal, mister," the skipper said to Tom, "where's your young boss?"
+
+"Busy," said Tom, blocking the doorway and coolly smoking his pipe.
+
+"Then just you go and tell him that Kyaptin 'Badiah P. Perks is here
+with a gentleman who'll overhaul that stack o' chesties, and say whether
+I can take 'em board o' my schooner without getting into trouble."
+
+"Oh!  Mas'r Harry won't get you into no trouble, cap'en," said Tom, "nor
+he won't give you no trouble.  He's altered his mind and won't go."
+
+"Oh, no, he haven't," said the skipper.  "Just you go and say Kyaptin
+'Badiah P. Perks is here and wants to see him tew wunst."
+
+For answer Tom drew a long breath and puffed out a cloud of smoke at the
+skipper.
+
+"Air yew a-going?" said the latter.
+
+"No," said Tom, "I air not.  My young master don't want you, nor your
+ship, nor anything else.  You wouldn't take the job when you could get
+it, so now it's gone."
+
+The Yankee skipper turned of a warmer yellow, and there was a malignant
+gleam in his closely-set eyes as he thrust one hand into his pocket and
+drew it out directly.
+
+"Here, I don't want to quarrel along o' you," he said sharply.  "Go and
+tell him I want him, and he must come."
+
+"Sha'n't," said Tom coolly.  "Who are you ordering about?  This here
+ain't aboard ship."
+
+"It would be okkard fur yew, boy, if it weer board ship," snarled the
+skipper, going close up and thrusting his ugly face almost in Tom's.
+"Yew just do as I tell yew, my lad, 'fore it's worse for yew.  Guess I
+don't want to quarrel."
+
+"And guess I don't want to quarrel with you," said Tom; "though I allus
+have felt as if I should like to whack a sailor."
+
+The man's hand went to his pocket again, but in spite of his furious
+glances Tom did not for a moment quail, giving him back again look for
+look.
+
+"Guess it 'll be the worse for yew, stranger," said the skipper, "if you
+don't go and fetch out that theer fellow o' yourn."
+
+"Guess it 'll be the worse for you, skipper, if you get shoving that
+sharp nose o' yours in my face," said Tom.  "You ain't skretched me with
+it yet, but if you do, ware hawk!"
+
+The man's face was a study.  He wanted evidently to seize Tom and thrust
+him aside, but there was something so solid and muscular about Tom's
+body, and something so hard and bull-like about Tom's head, that few
+people would have cared to tackle him; and certainly, seeing how
+determined he was, the skipper did not feel disposed.
+
+"Here, hi! you Englisher," shouted the fellow, "come out.  I want a word
+with you."
+
+"I say, don't make that row front of our house," said Tom.  "There's
+ladies here; and if you do it again I shall have to do what they does at
+home with noisy people--move you on."
+
+The skipper made a menacing movement towards Tom, and I was ready to go
+to his assistance, but Tom did not stir, only clenched his hand slowly
+in so ominous a manner that the skipper went no farther, but turned and
+advanced to his companion, before again approaching my faithful
+companion.
+
+"Now, look ye here, mister," said the skipper.  "I don't want to hurt
+you, so just you either get out o' the way or fetch your boss."
+
+"If you don't get out," said Tom slowly, "I shall have to make you.
+Mas'r Harry don't want no trade with you at all, so s'pose you be off
+while your shoes are good."
+
+"I will be off," said the skipper with a snarl, "and bring them here as
+will open some of your eyes a bit, and them chesties too."
+
+Then saying something in a whisper to his companion they both hurried
+off, and for the rest of the day, in spite of the aspect I carried
+before those in the house, I was in no little trepidation.
+
+Late in the afternoon, when we had been expecting a call every moment
+from some one in authority, and Tom had been waiting ready to run off at
+the first attack to the British vice-consul, a quiet, firm-looking,
+sailor-like man came up to where I was standing.
+
+"Are you the Englishman who wants to go with his family to Kingston?"
+
+"Yes," I said, looking at him earnestly, for I was wondering whether it
+was a trap laid by the Yankee skipper.
+
+"I just heard of it down at the wharf," he said.  "I'll take you, only I
+sail to-night."
+
+I was going to exclaim, "That's just what I want!" but restrained
+myself, and said quietly, "That's a very short notice."
+
+"Well, 'tis, sir; but I'm all laden, and time's money.  If you can be
+ready I'll take you, and be glad to earn the passage money, and do the
+best I can to make you and the ladies comfortable, but if you can't I
+must lose the job."
+
+"We will be ready, then," I said; "only I have these heavy chests to
+go."
+
+"Oh, they're nothing," said the skipper good-humouredly.  "I'll bring
+the boat up abreast here, and four o' my lads.  We'll soon have them
+in."
+
+We soon settled about terms, which were reasonable enough, and promising
+to be there with the boat in an hour, the man left.
+
+"Well, Tom, what is it?"  I said excitedly.  "A trap or honesty?"
+
+"Honesty, Mas'r Harry," he cried sharply.  "That chap's straight-forrard
+enough."
+
+"So I think," I cried, "and we'll risk it.  To-morrow we may be
+stopped."
+
+My aunt and Lilla were almost startled at the suddenness of the proposed
+departure, and my uncle looked anxious; but they said nothing, only made
+their final preparations, and soon after dark the fresh skipper came up
+with half a dozen men.
+
+"I thought I'd bring enough," he said.  "Now, my lads, be smart.  Chest
+apiece, they ain't big."
+
+It was all so sudden that my breath was almost taken away; but I had
+said that I would risk it, and there was nothing else to do but go on.
+In the darkness, too, it was hard to tell whether our property was all
+being fairly dealt with, but I watched as keenly as I could, and Tom
+went down to the boat with the first men, my uncle taking charge of
+Lilla and my aunt, while I stopped back at the house and sent all the
+luggage off.
+
+It was pitchy dark now, and matters were carried out with a rapidity
+that was startling.  In fact, in a quarter of an hour everything was on
+board the heavy boat, the men in their places, my aunt, Lilla, and my
+uncle in the stern sheets, and Tom and I were about to step in when
+Lilla exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, Harry!  I've left the great cloak in my room!"
+
+I was about to exclaim "Never mind," and, in my excitement to get clear,
+order the men to push off, but it was Lilla's wish, and without a word I
+started back to fetch the cloak.
+
+It was the most painful passage I ever had in my life.  It was only
+minutes but it seemed hours, and with my heart beating furiously, I
+tried to crush down the fancies that kept coming into my head.
+
+"Suppose," I thought, "that man is in the American skipper's pay, and
+that, now they have possession of my treasure, they should carry it off,
+and I should never see it more."  I knew that I might go back and find
+the boat gone, pursuit would be vain in the darkness; and so tortured
+was I as I reached the house we had left, that I turned instead of going
+in, and stepped back to run down again to the boat.
+
+That bit of indecision saved me, for just at my elbow a voice I
+recognised said:
+
+"Now then, four o' you just go round to the back and stop whoever comes
+out.  Two watch the windows, and we'll go in.  I guess it'll make the
+Englisher star'."
+
+The Englisher did stare as he tried to gaze through the darkness, and
+then, feeling satisfied that the new skipper had nothing to do with the
+American, I stepped softly back, trembling with eagerness and
+excitement, and made my way down to the boat.
+
+"All right," I said in as composed a manner as I could, and jumping in
+we were soon after being rowed softly down the river, past great vessel
+after vessel, all showing their mooring lights, till, wondering the
+while what sort of ship we were to have for our passage, we came at last
+alongside a large schooner, and were soon after safe aboard, treasure
+and all, of what proved to be a very good swift vessel.
+
+In the morning when the sun rose we were going rapidly down towards the
+mouth of the great river, but it was not until we were well out at sea
+that I felt safe from pursuit, and told my uncle of our narrow escape.
+
+"But I have not been able to find the great cloak, Harry," said Lilla.
+
+"No," I replied; "it was a question whether I should leave the cloak or
+myself, so I left the cloak," and then I told her of my adventure in the
+dark.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTY THREE.
+
+"HUZZA!  WE'RE HOMEWARD BOUND."
+
+And now it seemed as if our difficulties were at an end, for the passage
+to Kingston, Jamaica, was a pleasant one, and we took our berths from
+there in the mail, which landed us in safety at Southampton, without a
+soul suspecting the nature of the treasure that we had on board, one
+which we had gone through so much peril to obtain.
+
+It was a fine evening in July, that, after leaving my uncle and the
+others at a comfortable London hotel, Tom and I, after a quick run down
+by rail, found ourselves once more in the streets of the little town
+which we had left upon our setting off to foreign lands in quest of our
+fortunes.
+
+How familiar everything seemed and yet how shrunken!  Houses that I used
+to consider large appeared to have grown small, and people that I had
+been in the habit of considering great and important, somehow looked as
+if they were of no consequence at all.
+
+"Lor', look ye there, Mas'r Harry, they're practising in the cricket
+field.  What a while it seems since I have handled a bat!  Come and give
+us a few balls, the chaps would be glad enough to see us."
+
+"No, no, Tom," I said hastily, "I want to see the old people."
+
+"Oh, yes, of course, I forgot all about that, Mas'r Harry.  I haven't
+got no one to see."
+
+"Why, what about Sally?"  I said.
+
+"Pooh, it's all nonsense!  What stuff!  How you do talk, Mas'r Harry!"
+he cried indignantly.  "Just as if Sally was anything to me!"
+
+"Come, Tom," I said, "you know you were always very great friends."
+
+"Friends, Mas'r Harry!  Why, she were allus giving me spanks in the
+face.  I do wish you wouldn't be so foolish, Mas'r Harry."
+
+"All right, Tom," I said, for he was speaking in quite an ill-used tone.
+"There, what's that?"  I cried, as with beating heart, longing to look
+into the old home and yet almost afraid, I stopped short at the corner
+of the lane, and caught Tom by the arm.
+
+"What's that?" cried Tom grinning, as he took a long sniff.  "Taller.
+Say, Mas'r Harry, after missing it all this long time, it don't smell so
+very bad after all."
+
+"Well, it is not nice, Tom," I said smiling, "but how familiar it all
+does seem!  What days and nights it does recall!  Why, Tom, we hardly
+seem to have been away."
+
+"Oh, but don't we though?" said Tom, pulling down the front of a new
+waistcoat and pushing his hat a little on one side.  "We went away
+nobodies like, at least I did, Mas'r Harry, and I've come back an
+independent gentleman.  I wonder whether Sally's altered."
+
+I did not make any reply, but walked steadily on till I reached the
+familiar gates leading into our yard, and through which I had seen the
+laden van pass so many hundreds of times.  There beyond it was the
+soap-house with its barred window, the tall chimney, and, on looking
+over, there were the usual litter of old and new boxes, while an
+unpleasantly scented steam was floating out upon the evening air.
+
+How strange and yet how familiar it all seemed!  How old and shabby and
+forlorn everything looked, and yet how dear!  I wanted to creep in and
+catch my mother in my arms, but something seemed to hold me back, so
+that I dare not stir.
+
+I walked straight by, with Tom following me slowly, looking across at
+the opposite side of the road, and whistling softly, and as we walked on
+I could see into the garden, and my heart gave a throb, for, instead of
+being neat and well stocked as of old, everything appeared to have been
+neglected--creepers had run wild, the apple and pear trees were covered
+with long shoots, and tall thistles and nettles stood in clumps.
+
+My heart seemed to stand still, and I hesitated no longer.  My father
+must be ill, I thought, or the garden in which he took so much pride
+would never have been allowed to run wild like that.
+
+"Tom," I said, "there's something wrong."
+
+"Lor', no, Mas'r Harry, not there.  Nothing's wrong, only that Sally's
+left, and that's all right, ain't it?"
+
+I did not answer, but, going to the yard gate, pushed it open, and the
+hinges gave a dismal creak.
+
+"Bit o' soap would not hurt them," said Tom sententiously, and he
+followed me through the yard.
+
+I peeped in at the old, familiar boiling-house, but though work had
+lately been in progress there was no one there; so I went on to the back
+door and was about to enter, but Tom laid his hand on my arm.
+
+"Would you mind my going in first, Mas'r Harry?" he said softly.  "I
+know it ain't right, but I should like to go in just once--first."
+
+I drew back and Tom stepped forward to go in, but as he raised his hand
+to the latch he dropped it again and turned back to me.
+
+"'Twouldn't be right, sir, for me to go afore you; and don't you think,
+Mas'r Harry, now that you're a great, rich gentleman just come over from
+foreign abroad, that it would be more genteel-like to go round to the
+front and give a big knock afore you went in?"
+
+"Well, let's go round to the front, Tom.  Perhaps it isn't right to come
+round here.  We might startle them."
+
+"Wouldn't startle Sally, even if she were here, Mas'r Harry.  Nothing
+never did startle she, though she ain't here now."
+
+The fact was that I felt as nervous and tremulous about going in as poor
+Tom, and accordingly we went round to the front, and after a moment's
+hesitation I gave a rap at the door.
+
+No answer.
+
+I rapped again, and then, finding the door unfastened, I pushed against
+it with trembling hand to find it yield, and, walking straight in, I
+turned to the right and entered the little parlour.
+
+As I went in some one who had been sitting back asleep in the easy-chair
+started up and took a great red handkerchief from his face.
+
+As he did this I was advancing with open hands, but only to stop short,
+for it was not my father.
+
+"Hillo!" said the stranger, a dirty-looking man with an inflamed nose.
+
+"Hallo!"  I said; "who are you?"
+
+"Who am I?" said the stranger, staring at me as if I were asking a most
+absurd question.  "Why, persession--that's about what I am.  Are you
+come to pay me out?"
+
+"Pay you out!--possession!"  I faltered.  "Why, what does it mean?"
+
+"Sold by hockshin without reserve by one of the morkygees," said the
+man, "soon as the inwintory's took."
+
+"Where are my father and mother?"  I said, with my heart sinking at the
+idea of the distress they must have been in.
+
+"Now, then!" said a sharp voice, and a young woman came to the inner
+door; "who do you want?"
+
+"Sally!" whispered Tom excitedly.
+
+"Why, Sally!"  I exclaimed, "don't you know me again?"
+
+"It isn't Master Harry, is it?" she said wonderingly.
+
+"Yes, Sally," I said.  "Why, how you have altered and improved!"
+
+"Get along, Master Harry; it's you that's improved.  Who's that big,
+stoopid-looking young man with you?"
+
+"Oh, I say!" groaned Tom.
+
+"Oh, I see!" she said carelessly, "it's the boy!"
+
+"Ain't she hard on a fellow, Mas'r Harry?" whispered Tom; but I did not
+reply, for I was questioning Sally.
+
+"What! haven't you heard?" she said.
+
+"No, I've heard nothing," I exclaimed.  "What do you mean?"
+
+"'Bout master's having failed, and a set o' wretches,"--here she glanced
+at the dirty-looking man--"coming and robbing him of his business, and
+his house, and his furniture, and everything a'most he's got."
+
+"No, no, Sally, I have heard nothing.  But are they well?"
+
+"Oh, yes, as well as folks can be as is being robbed by folks who come
+sitting in all the chairs with hankychers over their heads, and going to
+sleep all over the place."
+
+"But where are they?"  I cried; "upstairs?"
+
+"Upstairs?  No," cried Sally.  "They're down at the little cottage in
+Back Lane, where old Mrs Wigley used to live."
+
+"I'll run down at once," I cried.  "Come along, Tom!"  I did not look
+back, for I was intent upon my task; and if I had I should have had no
+satisfaction, for Tom had stayed behind, as he afterwards said, to look
+after old master's property; but I never believed that tale for several
+reasons, one being that Tom looked shamefaced and awkward as he said it,
+and circumstances afterwards tended to show that he had some other
+reason.
+
+The old cottage named was one that I well remembered, and my spirit
+seemed to sink lower and lower as I neared the place; for it was
+terrible to think of those whom I had left, if not in affluence, at
+least in a comfortable position in life, brought down to so sad and
+impecunious a state, suffering real poverty, and with the home of so
+many years now in the broker's hands.
+
+Then I felt a wave of high spirits come over me, as it were, to hurl me
+down and then lift me and carry me on and on, till I literally set off
+and ran down turning after turning, till I came to the little
+whitewashed cottage where my father and mother had their abode.
+
+I half-paused for a moment, and then tapping lightly, raised the latch
+and entered.
+
+My father was seated at a common uncovered deal table, poring over an
+old account-book, as if in hopes of finding a way out of his
+difficulties.  My mother, looking very care-worn and grey, was seated by
+a back window mending some old garments, and now and then stopping to
+wipe her eyes.  At least that is what I presumed, for she was in the act
+of wiping them as I dashed in.
+
+"Mother! father!"  I exclaimed, and the next moment the poor old lady
+was sobbing in my arms, kissing me again and again, and amidst her
+sobbing telling my father that she knew how it would be--that it had
+been foolish of him to despair, for she was certain that her boy would
+come back and help them as soon as he knew that they were in trouble.
+
+"When did you get the letter, my darling?" she said as she clung closer
+to me.
+
+"Letter!"  I said; "I've had no letter."
+
+My mother looked up at me wonderingly.
+
+"Had no letter, Harry?"
+
+"No, my dear mother; I have not had a line since I have been gone."
+
+My mother loosened her hold of me and turned to my father as he stood
+looking on.
+
+"You did not write to him," she said.
+
+"Oh, yes, I daresay he did, mother," I cried, "but of late I have been
+travelling about a great deal."
+
+"Then the letter would have come back, Harry," said my mother.  "He did
+not write."
+
+"No," said my father quietly; "I did not write.  What was the use of
+troubling the poor fellow about our miserable affairs when he was far
+away?"
+
+"Then you did not come, Harry, because we were in trouble?"
+
+"No, mother," I replied.  "I came home because my task was done."
+
+"Your task was done?" said my mother.  "I don't understand you.  I
+thought you went to work at your uncle's."
+
+"I was with my uncle, mother," I replied, enjoying the knowledge of the
+surprise I had in store, and feeling that now, indeed, the treasure I
+had found was worth having, for what changes it would work! "but he was
+in trouble too."
+
+"In trouble!" said my father and mother in a breath.
+
+"Yes, he was in the same predicament as you are, and his coffee
+plantation was going to be sold up."
+
+"What an unhappy family ours is!" said my mother.  "Harry--Harry! you
+might as well have stayed at home."
+
+"If I had stayed at home, mother, would it have spared you this
+trouble?"
+
+"I--I don't know, my boy.  Would it, my dear?" she said, turning to my
+father.
+
+"No, wife--no," he said; "Harry was quite right to go.  He foresaw what
+was coming, and how useless it was for me to try.  The hardest part of
+it, my lad, is that I can't go out of business an honest man and pay
+every one his due."
+
+"Don't fret, dear," said my mother; "you've done your best and given up
+everything.  But tell me, Harry," she cried, "what did my poor brother
+do?  Had he no friend to help him?"
+
+"Yes, mother."
+
+"And did he?"
+
+"Yes, mother."
+
+"What! paid his debts?"
+
+"Yes, dear mother."
+
+"God bless him!" said my mother fervently.  "I wish I could take him by
+the hand.  And how is your uncle now?"
+
+"He was quite well when I left him to-day, mother."
+
+"Left him!--to-day?" said my mother wonderingly.
+
+"Yes, he is in town.  I brought him with me, and he will come down and
+see you with some one, mother, I want you very much to love."
+
+"You foolish boy!" said my mother.  "Ah, Harry--Harry! you are too young
+to think of that."
+
+"I'm sorry he's coming to see us," said my father sadly.  "We are not in
+condition to see company, wife."
+
+"No," said my mother, sighing as she glanced round.  "But don't be
+down-hearted, dear," she cried more cheerfully; "when things are at
+their worst they always mend, and I think they have got to their worst
+now, and have begun to mend, for Harry has come back."
+
+"Yes, mother," I cried, unable to keep back my good news, knowing as I
+did how welcome it must be to them at such a time.  "Yes, mother, I have
+come back, and brought with me the friend who helped my poor uncle in
+such a strait, and now he shall help you."
+
+"Ah, but my dear boy, we have no claims upon your uncle's friend."
+
+"The greatest of claims, mother," I cried excitedly, "for he is your own
+flesh and blood."
+
+"Harry!" cried my father, "what do you mean?  Did you help your uncle?"
+
+"Yes, father," I said modestly.
+
+"And paid his debts?"
+
+"Yes, father, and now I'm going to pay yours, or rather you are going to
+pay them yourself, and be what you called--an honest man."
+
+His eyes lit up, and he looked as if he were about to catch me by the
+hands, but he stopped short and shook his head.
+
+"No, no, no, my boy, you do not understand these things.  I owe nearly
+five hundred pounds."
+
+"My dear father," I cried, "I'm ready to pay it if you owe nearly five
+thousand.  I went out to make my fortune and I have made it, and I never
+knew its value thoroughly till I came home to-day.  There, come away
+home and I'll pay out that fellow, and--oh, come, mother--mother,
+mother!"  I cried as I took hold of her hands to raise her up, for she
+had sunk upon her knees and was embracing my legs.  "You must not give
+way like this, or you will make me behave like a great girl."
+
+"It is because I am so happy," she sobbed, and as I raised her so that
+she could weep on my shoulder, my father caught me by the hand.
+
+"God bless you, my boy!  God bless you!" he cried.  "I won't question
+you now, for like your mother I feel as if this is more than I can
+bear."
+
+We lost no time as soon as they had grown calmer.  For though I had not
+the money with me sufficient to pay all my father's debts, I had plenty
+to pay what was needed to get rid of the unpleasant tenant of my old
+home, and that night I slept happily once more beneath its roof.
+
+I had hard work to satisfy the old people about my right to the large
+sum of money I had brought back, but I found no difficulty with their
+creditors, who took the cash without asking any questions, and were very
+loud in their praises, saying that I was the best of sons, which was all
+nonsense, for I should have been the worst of sons if I had not done my
+duty as I did.
+
+The next few months were chiefly spent in getting things into order, and
+in the midst of my busiest time Tom came to me one day, bringing with
+him Sally.
+
+"Hallo!"  I said, "what does this mean?"
+
+"Oh, nothing at all, Mas'r Harry; only now I'm settled as a gentleman of
+property I'm going to be married."
+
+"Don't you believe him, Master Harry," said Sally; "it's all his
+nonsense," and she was scarlet as she spoke.
+
+"Don't you believe her, Mas'r Harry," said Tom grinning; "she promised
+me she would, and she can't draw back, can she?"
+
+"Certainly not, Tom," I said.  "A lady's under her bond just as a
+gentleman is."
+
+"There! hear that, Sally?" said Tom.
+
+"Yes, I hear," she said, "so I suppose I must;" and Sally spoke in quite
+a resigned way, keeping her word to Tom within three months, my father
+saying that Sally had been the most faithful of servants, and had forced
+upon them all her little savings in the time of their distress.
+
+You may be sure I did not forget this on the day when my father gave her
+away, and Tom had a nice little dowry with his wife.
+
+It may be thought that, with so great a sum of money--so large a
+fortune--I must have lived in great splendour during the rest of my
+life.  But it was not so.  Certainly I have always since enjoyed the
+comfort of a pleasant, well-kept, unostentatious home; but the fact is
+this--it was my fate to marry a woman generous almost to a fault.  As
+you have seen, she began by giving the greatest treasure I found in the
+New World--herself--to me; and then, upon the strength of our having
+plenty of money, she was of opinion that its proper purpose was being
+spent in doing good to others.
+
+My uncle and Mrs Landell were settled in a pleasant little estate of
+their own; and after a great deal of persuasion my father was induced to
+take upon himself the position of a country gentleman.  One way and
+another our income became shrunk down to very reasonable proportions;
+though, after Lilla has done all the good that she can in the course of
+the year, we have always a little to spare.
+
+My story is ended.  And now that grey hairs have made their appearance,
+bringing with them sounder thought and the ripe judgment of experience,
+I often go over my adventures again, and chat about them with Tom, and
+Sally his wife, when I have taken a run over to their prosperous farm;
+but in spite of all the success that has attended me and mine, I think,
+have thought, and I hope I shall still think to my last day, that my
+journey to the New World, my adventures, and all I gained, would have
+been but so much vanity and emptiness had I not won Lilla, who has shed
+upon my life a sunshine such as has proved that after all _she_ was the
+true gold.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Golden Magnet, by George Manville Fenn
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GOLDEN MAGNET ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24909.txt or 24909.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/9/0/24909/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.